HIKVISION DS-7732NI-I4B (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or page errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD HIKVISION DS-7732NI-I4B (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary: A&E System Specification DS-7708NI-I4 DS-7716NI-I4 DS-7732NI-I4 DS-7716NI-I4(B) DS-7732NI-I4(B) ALL TRADEMARKS ARE THE PROPERTIES OF THEIR RESPECTIVE OWNERS Part 1 General: 1.1 Summary of Requirements A. NVR 1. 8/16/32 Channel NVR 1.2 References A. Abbreviations 1. AGC Automatic Gain Control 2. AWB Automatic White Balance 3. BLC Back Light Compensation 4. CIF Common Intermediate Format 5. DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point 6. DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 7. DNR Digital Noise Reduction 8. DNS Domain Name Server 9. DDNS Dynamic Domain Name Server 10. FPS frames per second 11. FTP File Transfer Protocol 12. GUI Graphical User Interface 13. HLC High Light Compression 14. HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol 15. HTTPS Secure HTTP 16. ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol 17. IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol 18. IP Internet Protocol 19. JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group 20. MicroSD Removable miniaturized Secure 21. MicroSD Removable miniaturized Secure Digital flash memory card 22. MPEG Moving Pictures Experts Group 23. MWB Manual White Balance 24. NAS Network Attached Storage 25. NTP Network Time Protocol over Ethernet 26. PoE Power over Ethernet 27. PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet 28. QoS Quality of Service 29. ROI Region of Interest 30. RTP Real-Time Transport Protocol 31. RTSP Real-Time Streaming Protocol 32. SD Card Secure Digital flash memory card 33. SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 34. TCP Transmission Control Protocol 35. UDP User Datagram Protocol 36. UPnP Universal Plug and Play 37. VMS Video Management System Hikvision.com 38. WB White Balance 39. WDR Wide Dynamic Range 1.3 Certifications, Standards and Ratings A. Reference Standards 1. EMC a. FCC b. CE-EMC c. RCM d. IC-EMC e. KC 2. Safety a. UL b. CB c. CE-LVD 3. Environment a. RoHS b. WEEE c. Reach 1.4 Submittals A. Product Data 1. Manufacturer’s hard (physical) or soft (Electronic) datasheets 2. Installation and operating manuals for any and all equipment required for a VMS (Video Management System). 3. Manufacturer’s warranty documentation 1.5 Qualifications A. Requirements 1. This product shall be manufactured by an enterprise whose quality systems are in direct compliance with ISO- 9001 protocols. 2. All system components shall be carefully tested and proven in actual use. Comprehensive repair and spare parts shall be given, for which the manufacturer shall provide warranty. 3. All installations, integration, testing, programming, system commission, and related work shall be done by installers who are trained, authorized, and certified by the manufacturer. 1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Delivery 1. The NVR shall be delivered in the Manufacturer’s unique, sealed, undamaged package. 2. Any and all identification labels shall remain intact. Hikvision.com B. Storage and Handling 1. The NVR shall be protected from mechanical and environmental conditions as designated by the manufacturer. 1.7 Licensing and Support Agreements A. Recorder 1. Requires no licensing fees per channel or device, for basic software. 2. Requires no Software Support Agreements with the manufacturer. B. Free DDNS Service C. Free iVMS-4200 Client 1.8 Warranty and Support A. Warranty Agreement 1. The manufacturer provides a limited three year warranty which guarantees the product to be free of any defects in workmanship or material (three years, parts and factory labor). B. Spares and Repairs 1. Spare parts, as well as comprehensive repair parts shall be included for all systems and components. 2. The spare and repair parts, both of warranty and non-warranty items, shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer. END OF SECTION Part 2 Product: 2.1 Manufacturer A. Manufacturer Hikvision Digital Technology Co.,Ltd. No.555 Qianmo Road Binjiang District , Hangzhou China. Web: Hikvision.com B. DS-7708NI-I4 DS-7716NI-I4 DS-7732NI-I4 DS-7716NI-I4(B) DS-7732NI-I4(B) 2.2 Description 1. Le NVR prend en charge jusqu'à 8/16/32 entrées IP vidéo. 2. The NVR should support up to 12MP IP video input. 3. The NVR should support recording resolution includes 12 MP/8 MP/6 MP/5 MP/4 MP/3 MP/1080p/UXGA/720p/VGA/4CIF/DCIF /2CIF/CIF/QCIF. 4. The NVR shall be able to select from the following recording streams: Hikvision.com a. Main Stream b. Sub Stream 5. The DS-7708NI-I4 should support Incoming/outgoing bandwidth not less than 80 Mbps/256 Mbps. The DS-7716NI-I4 should support Incoming/outgoing bandwidth not less than 160 Mbps/256 Mbps. DS-7732NI-I4 should support Incoming/outgoing bandwidth not less than 256 Mbps/256 Mbps. The DS-7716NI-I4(B) should support Incoming/outgoing bandwidth not less than 160 Mbps/256 Mbps. DS-7732NI-I4(B) should support Incoming/outgoing bandwidth not less than 256 Mbps/256 Mbps. 6. The DS-7700NI-I4 should have 1 HDMI and 1 VGA output resolution includes HDMI: 4K (3840 × 2160)/60Hz, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 1920 × 1080p/60Hz, 1600 × 1200/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz VGA: 1920 × 1080p/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz The DS-7700NI-I4(B) should have 2 HDMI, 1 VGA and 1 CVBS output resolution includes CVBS: 1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resolution: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480 HDMI1: 4K (3840 × 2160)/60Hz, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K(2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080p/60Hz, 1600 × 1200/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz VGA: 2K(2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080p/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz, HDMI1/VGA Simultaneous Output HDMI2: 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz 7. Le NVR prend en charge plusieurs 34 langues, qui comprennent le chinois, l'anglais, le russe, l'estonien, le bulgare, le hongrois, le grec, l'allemand, l'italien, le slovène, le polonais, le néerlandais, le portugais, l'espagnol, le roumain, le danois, le suédois, le norvégien, le finnois, le croate, Slovène, serbe, turc, coréen, traditionnel chinois, thaï, vietnamien, japonais, letton, lituanien, ouzbek, kazak. 8. The NVR shall support multi-user level management with password protection. Three-level user management; admin user is allowed to create many operating accounts and define their operating permission, which includes the limit to access any channel. 9. Secure Activation a. The NVR shall not have a default admin password for enhanced cyber security. NVR shall require a secure password to be created and confirmed upon first connecting to the network. b. A system algorithm shall check the user defined password for strength, based on the manufacturer’s criteria. c. System shall determine and display password security level as “weak”, “medium”, or “strong”. d. Password shall contain a minimum of two kinds of characters (lowercase letters, uppercase letters, numbers and special characters). e. Only ASCII characters shall be allowed. f. Password length shall be eight characters minimum. g. NVR cannot have a backdoor password. No recovery of passwords should be possible. Resetting of password while maintaining settings shall require assistance of manufactures technical support. Reset switch can be used to restore camera to factory settings requiring a secure password to be created and confirmed. Use of reset switch may require assistance of technical support. Hikvision.com 10. Le NVR prend en charge onVIF pour le support de la caméra réseau de tiers. Les protocoles compatibles de caméras réseau tierces sont ACTI, Arecont, AXIS, Bosch, Brickcom, Canon, PANASONIC, Pelco, SAMSUNG, SANYO, SONY, Vivotek , HUNT et ZAVIO, et des caméras qui adoptent le protocole ONVIF. 11. The NVR shall be compatible with several free DDNS servers and support third-party network cameras, including Peanut, NOIP, DYNDDNS. 12. The NVR can be operable by front panel, mouse, remote control, or control keyboard. 2.3 Decoding, Recording and Playback 1. The NVR should support H.265/H.265+/H.264/H.264+/MPEG4 decoding format. 2. The NVR should support 12 MP/8 MP/6 MP/5 MP/4 MP/3 MP/1080p/UXGA/720p/VGA/4CIF/DCIF /2CIF/CIF/QCIF. 3. Audio decoding format: G.711ulaw, G.711alaw, G.722, G.726. 4. Video playback types including instant/event/tag/log/external file. 5. The DS-7708NI-I4 NVR shall offer 8-Channel, 1080P independent playback and support picture capture and playback. The DS-7716NI-I4, DS-7732NI-I4, DS-7716NI-I4(B), DS-7732NI-I4(B) NVR shall offer 16-Channel, 1080P independent playback and support picture capture and playback. 6. The NVR shall tag video clip, and offer search and playback by tag, as well as digital zoom on live view and playback. 7. The NVR shall be able to provider a snapshot icon for manual capture during live view and playback. 8. The NVR shall be able to playback the video footage at 8x without skipping and at rates up to 256x for improved video search. 9. The NVR should support holiday recording schedule configuration. 10. The NVR should support continuous and event video recording parameters. 11. The NVR should support multiple recording types: manual, continuous, alarm, motion, motion | alarm, motion & alarm VCA, and POS. 12. The NVR should support POS information overlay on image. 13. The NVR should support pre-record and post-record for alarm, motion detection for recording, and pre-record time for schedule and manual recording. 14. The NVR should support to searching record files and captured pictures by events (alarm input/motion detection). 15. The NVR should support tag adding for record files, searching and playing back by tags. 16. The NVR should support locking and unlocking record files. 17. The NVR should support local redundant recording and capture. 18. The NVR should support provide new playback interface with easy and flexible operation. 19. The NVR should support searching and playing back record files by channel number, recording type, start time, end time, etc. 20. The NVR should support playback by main stream or sub stream. 21. The NVR should support smart search for the selected area in the video. 22. The NVR should support zooming in when playback. Hikvision.com 23. The NVR should support reverse playback of multi-channel. 24. The NVR should support pause, play reverse, speed up, speed down, skip forward, and skip backward when playback, and locating by dragging the mouse. 25. The NVR should support thumbnails view and fast view during playback. 26. The NVR should support playback by transcoded stream. 27. The NVR should support manual capture, continuous capture of video images and playback of captured pictures. 28. The NVR should support to enable H.265+ to ensure high video quality with lowered bitrate. 29. The 8-ch NVR shall be able to support a 1/2/4/6/8 split screen in live view on connected monitor, and support click and drag the live view window to automatically adjust displayed camera order. The 16-ch NVR shall be able to support a 1/2/4/6/8/9/16 split screen in live view on connected monitor, and support click and drag the live view window to automatically adjust displayed camera order. The 32-ch NVR shall be able to support a 1/2/4/6/8/9/16/32 split screen in live view on connected monitor, and support click and drag the live view window to automatically adjust displayed camera order. 30. The NVR should support capture settings by timing, motion and alarm type, maximum 8 time zones each day, each time zone maximum 1 hour. 2.4 Storage 1. The 7700NI-I4 support up to 4 SATA hard disks can be connected. The 7700NI-I4(B) support up to 4 SATA hard disks and 1 eSATA disk can be connected. 2. The 7700NI-I4 and 7700NI-I4(B) support up to 8TB capacity for each HDD. 3. Supports 8 network disks (NAS/IP SAN disk). 4. Supports S.M.A.R.T. and bad sector detection. 5. HDD group management. 6. Supports HDD standby function. 7. HDD property: redundancy, read-only, read/write (R/W). 8. HDD quota management; different capacity can be assigned to different channel. 9. NVR with eSATA interface can support disk clone to the eSATA disk. 2.5 Network 1. Two self-adaptive 10M/100M/1000Mbps network interfaces, and the multi-address and network fault tolerance working modes are configurable. 2. IPv6 is supported. 3. TCP/IP protocol, DHCP, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, SMTP, SNMP, NFS, and iSCSI are supported. 4. TCP, UDP and RTP for unicast. 5. Auto/Manual port mapping by UPnPTM. 6. Remote web browser access by HTTPS ensures high security. 7. The ANR (Automatic Network Replenishment) function is supported, it enables the IP camera save the recording files in the local storage when the network is disconnected, and synchronizes the files to the NVR when the network is resumed. 8. Remote reverse playback via RTSP. Hikvision.com 9. Supports accessing by the platform via ONVIF. 10. Remote search, playback, download, locking and unlocking of the record files, and support downloading files broken transfer resume. 11. Remote parameters setup; remote import/export of device parameters. 12. Remote viewing of the device status, system logs and alarm status. 13. Remote keyboard operation. 14. Remote HDD formatting and program upgrading. 15. Remote system restart and shutdown 16. RS-232, RS-485 transparent channel transmission 17. Alarm and exception information can be sent to the remote host 18. Remotely start/stop recording. 19. Remotely start/stop alarm output. 20. Remote PTZ control. 21. Remote JPEG capture. 22. Virtual host function is provided to get access and manage the IP camera directly. 23. Two-way audio: 1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 k Ω). 2.6 Alarm 1. Configurable arming time of alarm input/output. 2. Alarm for video loss, motion detection, tampering, abnormal signal, video input/output standard mismatch, illegal login, network disconnected, IP confliction, abnormal record/capture, HDD error, and HDD full, etc. 3. POS triggered alarm supported. 4. VCA detection alarm is supported. 5. VCA search for human search, vehicle search, people counting and heat mapping. 6. Connectable to the thermal network camera. 7. Supports the advanced search for fire/ship/temperature/temperature difference detection triggered alarm and the recorded video files and pictures. 8. Alarm triggers full screen monitoring, PTZ linkage, audio alarm, notifying surveillance center, sending email and alarm output. 9. Automatic restore when system is abnormal. 2.8 POS 1. POS information overlay on live view and playback 2. POS triggered recording and alarm. 3. The NVR should support third party POS brand for integration such as EPSOM, AVE, NUCLEUS 4. The NVR can maximum support to overlay 44 characters each line, and 16 lines at most in image. 2.9 Physical Design 1. The NVR shall have the ability to be rack mounted. 2. Pluggable hard disk design with front panel. 3. Operation Conditions -10 to +55° C (+14 to +131° F) 4. Humidity 10 to 90 % 5. Power Supply 100 to 240 VAC Hikvision.com 6. Power Consumption 20W (without HDD disk) (DS-7700NI-I4) 7. Dimensions 445 × 400 ×71 mm (17.5"× 15.7" × 2.8") (DS-7700NI-I4) 8. Weight ≤ 5 kg (11 lb) (DS-7700NI-I4) 9. Chassis 19-inch rack-mounted 1.5U chassis (DS-7700NI-I4) 10. Physical Interface (DS-7700NI-I4) Index Description Index Description 1 LAN1 and LAN2 Interfaces 7 VGA Output (DB9 Connector) 2 AUDIO OUT 8 RS-485 Serial Interface 3 AUDIO IN 9 Controller Port, Alarm In/Alarm Out 4 HDMI Interface 10 GND 5 USB 3.0 Interface 11 100 to 240 VAC power supply 6 RS-232 Serial Interface 12 Power Switch (DS-7700NI-I4(B)) Index Description Index Description 1 LAN1 and LAN2 Interfaces 2 AUDIO OUT 3 AUDIO IN 4 HDMI Interface 5 USB 3.0 Interface 6 RS-232 Serial Interface 7 VGA Output (DB9 Connector) 8 RS-485 Serial Interface 9 Controller Port, Alarm In/Alarm Out 10 GND Hikvision.com 11 100 to 240 VAC power supply 12 Power Switch 13 eSATA Interface 14 VIDEO OUT 2.10 Warranty A. General 1. All system components shall be carefully tested and proven in actual use. Comprehensive repair and spare parts shall be given, for which the manufacturer shall provide warranty. 2. All equipment provided shall be backed by a 3 years manufacturer warranty. END OF SECTION Part 3 Execution 3.1 Examination A. Inspect chosen area of installation prior to receiving devices and report any conditions that affect the installation process or any subsequent operation. B. Please do not begin installation until all unacceptable conditions are rectified. 3.2 Preparation A. +Assess the compatibility of mounting screws for all equipment to be installed. B. Make sure all video systems are tested properly and meet standard operational requirements. C. Define, conclude, and report all issues with equipment to the manufacturers’ customer service representatives. 3.5 Adjusting A. Execute the necessary modifications to the Video Management System for proper operation in accordance with the instructions provided by the manufacturer. B. Ensure the customers unique requirements are reflected in the camera settings. 3.6 Demonstration A. Upon final inspection, validate the video solutions system and its device functions correctly. END OF SECTION Hikvision.com


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL

KENWOOD NX-P1300NU (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or page errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD KENWOOD NX-P1300NU (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary: VHF TRANSCEIVER NX-P1200NV NX-P1200AV NX-P1202AV UHF TRANSCEIVER NX-P1300NU NX-P1300AU NX-P1302AU USER GUIDE This User guide covers only the basic operations of your radio. For using the detailed instruction manual, refer to the following URL or QR code. manual.kenwood.com/files/B5K-0787-00.pdf B5A-3571-00 (K) NOTICES TO THE USER ◆ Refer service to qualifi ed technicians only. Safety: It is important that the operator is aware of, and understands, hazards common to the operation of any transceiver. Firmware Copyrights The title to and ownership of copyrights for firmware embedded in KENWOOD product memories are reserved for JVCKENWOOD Corporation. One or more of the following statements may be applicable: FCC WARNING This equipment generates or uses radio frequency energy. Changes or modifications to this equipment may cause harmful interference unless the modifications are expressly approved by the party responsible/ JVCKENWOOD. The user could lose the authority to operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or modification is made. INFORMATION TO THE DIGITAL DEVICE USER REQUIRED BY THE FCC This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can generate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer for technical assistance. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES FCC LICENSE INFORMATION Your KENWOOD transceiver operates on communications frequencies which are subject to FCC (Federal Communications Commission) Rules & Regulations. FCC Rules require that all operators using Private Land Mobile radio frequencies obtain a radio license before operating their equipment. Application for license must be made on FCC form 601, schedules D and H, and Remittance form 159. FAX: Forms can be obtained by fax from the FCC Fax-On-Demand system. Call 1-202-418-0177 from your fax machine and request document number 000601 for the form, schedules, and instructions. MAIL: Forms can be ordered by telephone, and will be sent to you by first class mail. Call the FCC Forms Hotline at 1-800-418-FORM (1- 800-418-3676). INTERNET: Form 601 and instructions can be downloaded from the FCC Forms website at fcc.gov/formpage.html Before filling out your Form 601 application Technical Data section, you must decide on which frequencies you will operate. See the frequency charts on the detailed instruction manual. QUESTIONS? Call the FCC for license application questions at 1-888-CALL-FCC (1-888-225-5322). SUPPLIER'S DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 47 CFR § 2.1077 Compliance Information Trade name: KENWOOD Model(s): NX-P1200NV/ NX-P1200AV/ NX-P1202AV/ NX-P1300NU/ NX-P1300AU/ NX-P1302AU Responsible party: JVCKENWOOD USA Corporation 1440 Corporate Drive, Irving, TX 75038 Telephone number: 972-819-0700 The RBRC Recycle seal found on KENWOOD lithium-ion (Li-ion) battery packs indicates KENWOOD’s voluntary participation in an industry program to collect and recycle Li-ion batteries after their operating life has expired. The RBRC program is an alternative to disposing Li-ion batteries with your regular refuse or in municipal waste streams, which is illegal in some areas. For information on Li-ion battery recycling in your area, call (toll free) 1-800-8-BATTERY (1-800-822-8837). KENWOOD’s involvement in this program is part of our commitment to preserve our environment and conserve our natural resources. The AMBE+2TM voice coding Technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use within this Communications Equipment. The user of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to extract, remove, decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a human-readable form. U.S. Patent Nos. #8,315,860, #8,595,002, #6,912,495, #8,200,497, #7,970,606, and #8,359,197. PRECAUTIONS Observe the following precautions to prevent fire, personal injury, and transceiver damage. • Do not charge the transceiver and battery pack when they are wet. • Ensure that there are no metallic items located between the transceiver and the battery pack. • Do not use options not specifi ed by KENWOOD. • If the chassis or other transceiver part is damaged, do not touch the damaged parts. • If a headset or earphone is connected to the transceiver, reduce the transceiver volume. • Do not place the optional speaker/ microphone, clip mic. with earphone, or headset around your neck while near machinery that may catch the cable. • Do not place the transceiver on unstable surfaces. • Ensure that the end of the antenna does not touch your eyes. • When the transceiver is used for transmission for many hours, the radiator and chassis will become hot. Do not touch these locations when replacing the battery pack. • Always switch the transceiver power off before installing optional accessories. • When water gets into the microphone opening or the speaker grill, the voice level may become low or distorted. Lightly shake the transceiver to remove the water from the speaker and/or microphone before operating the transceiver. • The charger is the device that disconnects the unit from the AC mains line. The AC plug should be readily accessible. • To dispose of batteries, be sure to comply with the laws and regulations in your country or region. Note: WARNING Turn the transceiver power off before entering the following locations: • Near explosives or blasting sites. • In aircraft. (Any use of the transceiver must follow the instructions and regulations provided by the airline crew.) • Where restrictions or warnings are posted regarding the use of radio devices, including but not limited to medical facilities. • Near persons wearing pacemakers. • In explosive atmospheres (infl ammable gas, dust particles, metallic powders, grain powders, etc.). • While pumping fuel or while parked at gasoline service stations. CAUTION • Do not disassemble or modify the transceiver for any reason. • Do not place the transceiver on or near airbag equipment while the vehicle is running. When the airbag infl ates, the transceiver may be ejected and strike the driver or passengers. • Do not transmit while touching the antenna terminal or if any metallic parts are exposed from the antenna covering. Transmitting at such a time may result in a high-frequency burn. • If an abnormal odor or smoke is detected coming from the transceiver, switch the transceiver power off immediately, remove the battery pack from the transceiver, and contact your KENWOOD dealer. • Use of the transceiver while you are driving may be against traffi c laws. Please check and observe the vehicle regulations in your area. • Do not expose the transceiver to extremely hot or cold conditions. • Do not carry the battery pack (or battery case) with metal objects, as they may short the battery terminals. • Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced; replace only with the same type. • When attaching a commercial strap to the transceiver, ensure that the strap is durable. In addition, do not swing the transceiver around by the strap; you may inadvertently strike and injure another person with the transceiver. • If a commercially available neck strap is used, take care not to let the strap get caught on nearby machine. • When operating the transceiver in areas where the air is dry, it is easy to build up an electric charge (static electricity). When using an earphone accessory in such conditions, it is possible for the transceiver to send an electric shock through the earphone and to your ear. We recommend you use only a speaker/microphone in these conditions, to avoid electric shocks. • Do not expose the transceiver to long periods of direct sunlight, nor place it near heating appliances. Information concerning the battery pack The battery pack includes flammable objects such as organic solvent. Mishandling may cause the battery to rupture producing flames or extreme heat, deteriorate, or cause other forms of damage to the battery. Please observe the following prohibitive matters. DANGER • Do not disassemble or reconstruct battery. • Do not short-circuit the battery. • Do not incinerate or apply heat to the battery. • Do not leave the battery near fi res, stoves, or other heat generators (areas reaching over 80°C/ 176°F). • Do not immerse the battery in water or get it wet by other means. • Do not charge the battery near fi res or under direct sunlight. • Use only the specifi ed charger and observe charging requirements. • Do not pierce the battery with any object, strike it with an instrument, or step on it. • Do not jar or throw the battery. • Do not use the battery pack if it is damaged in any way. • Do not solder directly onto the battery. • Do not reverse the battery polarity (and terminals). • Do not reverse-charge or reverse-connect the battery. • Do not touch a ruptured and leaking battery. If the electrolyte liquid from the battery gets into your eyes, wash your eyes out with fresh water as soon as possible, without rubbing your eyes. Go to the hospital immediately. If left untreated, it may cause eye problems. WARNING • Do not charge the battery for longer than the specifi ed time. • Do not place the battery pack into a microwave or high pressure container. • Keep ruptured and leaking battery packs away from fi re. • Do not use an abnormal battery. • Do not change or charge the battery in hazardous locations. DEFAULT CHANNEL SETTINGS RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY SAFETY INFORMATION This KENWOOD transceiver has been tested and complies with the standards listed below, in regards to Radio Frequency (RF) energy and electromagnetic energy (EME) generated by the transceiver. • FCC RF exposure limits for Occupational Use Only. RF Exposure limits adopted by the FCC are generally based on recommendations from the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements, & the American National Standards Institute. • FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition 97-01 Supplement C • American National Standards Institute (C95.1 – 1992) • American National Standards Institute (C95.3 – 1992) WARNING This KENWOOD transceiver generates RF EME while transmitting. RF EME (Radio Frequency Electric & Magnetic Energy) has the potential to cause slight thermal, or heating effects to any part of your body less than the recommended distance from this radio transmitter’s antenna. RF energy exposure is determined primarily by the distance to and the power of the transmitting device. In general, RF exposure is minimized when the lowest possible power is used or transmission time is kept to the minimum required for consistent communications, and the greatest distance possible from the antenna to the body is maintained. The transceiver has been designed for and is classified for Occupational Use Only. Occupational/ controlled exposure limits are applicable to situations in which persons are exposed to RF energy as a consequence of their employment, and such persons have been made aware of the potential for exposure and can exercise control over their exposure. This means you can use the transceiver only if you are aware of the potential hazards of operating a transceiver and are familiar in ways to minimize these hazards. This transceiver is not intended for use by the general public in uncontrolled environments. Uncontrolled environment exposure limits are applicable to situations in which the general public may be exposed to RF energy, or in which the persons who are exposed as a consequence of their employment may not be fully aware of the potential for exposure or cannot exercise control over their exposure. The following list provides you with the information required to ensure that you are aware of RF exposure and of how to operate this transceiver so that the FCC RF exposure limitations are not exceeded. • While transmitting (holding the PTT switch or speaking with VOX enabled), always keep the antenna and the radio at least 3 cm (1.18 inches) from your body or face, as well as from any bystanders. A LED on the top of the radio shows red when the transmitter is operating in both PTT and VOX modes. • Do not transmit for more than 50% of the total transceiver use time; transmitting over 50% of the total use time may exceed the limits in accordance to the FCC RF exposure requirements. Nominal transceiver operation is 5% transmission time, 5% reception time, and 90% stand-by time. • Use only the specifi ed antenna for this transceiver; this may be either the antenna provided with the transceiver or another antenna authorized by KENWOOD. Use only KENWOOD authorized accessories (antennas, battery packs, belt clips, Speaker/ Mics or headsets etc.): When worn on the body, always place the radio in a KENWOOD recommended clip or carrying case meant for this product. The use of other than recommended or approved body worn accessories may result in RF exposure levels which exceed the FCC’s occupational/ controlled environment RF exposure limits. CAUTION To ensure that your exposure to RF EME is within the FCC limits for occupational use, you must observe and adhere to the above points. Electromagnetic Interference Compatibility Electronic devices are susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if they are not adequately shielded or designed for electromagnetic compatibility. Because this transceiver generates RF energy, it can cause interference to such equipment. • Turn OFF your transceiver where signs are posted to do so. Hospitals and health care facilities use equipment that is sensitive to electromagnetic radiation. • Turn OFF your transceiver while on board an aircraft when so instructed. Use of the transceiver must be in accordance with airline regulations and/ or crew instructions. NX-P1300NU (NXDN/ Analog Transceiver)

Carefully unpack the transceiver. We recommend that you identify ◆ When the indicator blinks red, the battery pack is either defective or the battery pack contacts are not properly mated with those of the charger. These transceivers allows you to reprogram each of the channels with different frequencies and QT/DQT (Analog)/ RAN (NXDN Channel Zone 1/ Zone 2 (Analog) Zone 3 (Digital) Zone 4 (Digital) the items listed in the following list before discarding the packing material. If any items are missing or have been damaged during ◆ When the indicator fl ashes green and orange, the battery pack has not satisfi ed the charging start temperature. Remove the battery pack Digital) settings. The table below lists the default channel settings. Number Frequency (MHz) QT (Hz) Frequency (MHz) RAN Frequency (MHz) RAN

shipment, fi le a claim with the carrier immediately. Item Quantity Antenna 1 Battery charger/ AC adapter (KSC-35S) 1 from the charger and wait until it reaches a normal temperature before charging it again. ◆ The ambient temperature should be between 5°C and 40°C (41°F and 104°F) while charging is in progress. Charging outside this range may not fully charge the battery. ◆ The battery pack life is over when its operating time decreases even Note: ◆ The default setting of the zone differs depending on each model. For compatible KENWOOD models of each zone, refer to the detailed instruction manual. NX-P1200NV (NXDN/ Analog Transceiver) 1 464.5000 67.0 464.5000 1 464.5500 1 2 464.5000 77.0 464.5000 2 467.9250 1 3 464.5000 88.5 464.5000 3 461.0375 1 4 464.5000 179.9 464.5000 4 461.0625 1 5 464.5000 100.0 464.5000 5 461.0875 1

Li-ion battery pack (KNB-45L) 1 though it is fully and correctly charged. Replace the battery pack. Channel Zone 1/ Zone 2 (Analog) Zone 3/ Zone 4 (Digital) 6 464.5500 67.0 464.5500 1 461.1125 1 7 464.5500 82.5 464.5500 2 461.1375 1

Speaker/ microphone jack cap 1 Speaker/ microphone locking bracket 1 Number BASIC OPERATION Frequency (MHz) QT (Hz) Frequency (MHz) RAN 8 464.5500 94.8 464.5500 3 461.1625 1

Belt clip (KBH-10) 1 Screw (M3 x 8 mm) 2 Warranty card 1 User guide 1 Note: Power switch/ Volume control Selector Antenna Speaker 1 151.6250 67.0 151.6250 1 2 151.6250 77.0 151.6250 2 3 151.6250 88.5 151.6250 3 4 151.6250 179.9 151.6250 4 5 151.6250 100.0 151.6250 5 6 151.9550 67.0 151.9550 1 7 151.9550 82.5 151.9550 2 9 464.5500 179.9 464.5500 4 464.5000 1 10 464.5500 100.0 464.5500 5 467.7625 1 11 461.3625 74.4 461.3625 1 467.8125 1 12 464.4875 79.7 464.4875 1 467.8500 1 13 464.5375 85.4 464.5375 1 467.8750 1 14 466.0375 91.5 466.0375 1 467.9000 1 15 466.0875 97.4 466.0875 1 461.1875 1

◆ For the speaker/ microphone jack, waterproof performance is guaranteed by securing the supplied cap. Waterproof performance will not be guaranteed by connecting an optional speaker/ microphone, etc. PTT switch Side 1 button Side 2 button Microphone 8 151.9550 94.8 151.9550 3 9 151.9550 179.9 151.9550 4 10 151.9550 100.0 151.9550 5 16 466.1375 103.5 466.1375 1 461.2125 1 NX-P1300AU (Analog Transceiver)

Battery pack 11 154.4900 67.0 154.4900 1 Channel Zone 1 ~ Zone 4

INSTALLING/ REMOVING THE BATTERY PACK 12 154.5150 67.0 154.5150 1 Number Frequency (MHz) QT (Hz)

1 Align the battery pack with the back of the transceiver, then press the battery pack and transceiver fi rmly together until the release latch on the base of the transceiver locks. SWITCHING POWER ON/OFF Turn the Power switch/ Volume control clockwise to switch the transceiver ON. 13 151.5125 67.0 151.5125 1 14 151.6850 67.0 151.6850 1 15 151.7000 67.0 151.7000 1 16 151.7600 67.0 151.7600 1 NX-P1200AV (Analog Transceiver) 1 464.5000 67.0 2 464.5000 77.0 3 464.5000 88.5 4 464.5000 179.9 5 464.5000 100.0 6 464.5500 67.0

Turn the Power switch/ Volume control counterclockwise fully to Channel Zone 1 ~ Zone 4 7 464.5500 82.5

2 To remove the battery pack, lift the safety catch on the base of the transceiver, then switch the transceiver OFF. Number Frequency (MHz) QT (Hz) 8 464.5500 94.8

press the release latch underneath the safety catch. 3 While pressing the release latch, pull the battery pack away from the transceiver. ADJUSTING THE VOLUME Rotate the Power switch/ Volume control to adjust the volume. Clockwise increases the volume and counterclockwise decreases it. SELECTING A ZONE Press and hold the Side 1 button (Zone Up) or Side 2 button (Zone Down) for 1 second to change the Zone (1 ~ 4). SELECTING A CHANNEL Rotate the Selector to select your desired channel. TRANSMITTING 1 151.6250 67.0 2 151.6250 77.0 3 151.6250 88.5 4 151.6250 179.9 5 151.6250 100.0 6 151.9550 67.0 7 151.9550 82.5 8 151.9550 94.8 9 151.9550 179.9 10 151.9550 100.0 9 464.5500 179.9 10 464.5500 100.0 11 461.3625 74.4 12 464.4875 79.7 13 464.5375 85.4 14 466.0375 91.5 15 466.0875 97.4 16 466.1375 103.5 NX-P1302AU (Analog Transceiver) Zone 1 Zone 2 ~ Zone 4

1 Select the desired channel. 2 Press the PTT switch and speak to the microphone. Release the 11 154.4900 67.0 12 154.5150 67.0 Channel Number Frequency (MHz) QT (Hz) Frequency (MHz) QT (Hz)

CHARGING THE BATTERY PACK ATTENTION: ◆ Always switch OFF a transceiver equipped with a battery pack before inserting the transceiver into the charger. PTT switch to receive. • For best sound quality, hold the transceiver approximately 1.5 inches (3 ~ 4 cm) from your mouth. RECEIVING Select the desired channel. If signaling is confi gured on the selected channel, you will hear a call only if the received signal 13 151.5125 67.0 14 151.6850 67.0 15 151.7000 67.0 16 151.7600 67.0 NX-P1202AV (Analog Transceiver) 1 464.5500 67.0 464.5000 67.0 2 467.9250 67.0 464.5000 77.0 3 461.0375 67.0 464.5000 88.5 4 461.0625 67.0 464.5000 179.9 5 461.0875 67.0 464.5000 100.0 6 461.1125 67.0 464.5500 67.0

1 Plug the AC adapter cable into the jack located on the rear of the matches your transceiver settings. Channel Zone 1 Zone 2 ~ Zone 4 7 461.1375 67.0 464.5500 82.5

charger. 2 Plug the AC adapter into an AC outlet. Number Frequency (MHz) QT (Hz) Frequency (MHz) QT (Hz) 8 461.1625 67.0 464.5500 94.8 9 464.5000 67.0 464.5500 179.9

3 Slide a battery pack or a transceiver equipped with a battery pack into the charging slot of the charger. • Make sure the metal contacts of the battery pack mate securely with the charger terminals. • The indicator lights red and charging begins. Indicator 4 When charging is completed, the indicator fl ashing green. Remove the battery pack or the transceiver from the charging slot of the charger. • It takes approximately 3 hours to charge the battery pack. • When the charger will not be used for a long time, unplug the AC adapter from the AC outlet. 1 154.4900 67.0 151.6250 67.0 2 154.5150 67.0 151.6250 77.0 3 151.6250 67.0 151.6250 88.5 4 151.9550 67.0 151.6250 179.9 5 151.5125 67.0 151.6250 100.0 6 151.6850 67.0 151.9550 67.0 7 151.7750 67.0 151.9550 82.5 8 158.4000 67.0 151.9550 94.8 9 151.6250 77.0 151.9550 179.9 10 151.6250 88.5 151.9550 100.0 11 151.6250 179.9 154.4900 67.0 12 151.9550 82.5 154.5150 67.0 13 151.9550 94.8 151.5125 67.0 14 151.9550 179.9 151.6850 67.0 15 151.7000 67.0 151.7000 67.0 16 151.7600 67.0 151.7600 67.0 10 467.7625 67.0 464.5500 100.0 11 467.8125 67.0 461.3625 74.4 12 467.8500 67.0 464.4875 79.7 13 467.8750 67.0 464.5375 85.4 14 467.9000 67.0 466.0375 91.5 15 461.1875 67.0 466.0875 97.4 16 461.2125 67.0 466.1375 103.5 © 2020

TRANSCEPTOR VHF NX-P1200NV NX-P1200AV NX-P1202AV TRANSCEPTOR UHF NX-P1300NU NX-P1300AU NX-P1302AU GUÍA DEL USUARIO Este Guía del usuario sólo cubre las operaciones básicas de su radio. Para ver el manual de instrucciones detallado, consulte el siguiente URL o código QR. manual.kenwood.com/files/B5K-0787-00.pdf ACCESORIOS SUMINISTRADOS AVISOS AL USUARIO ◆ Solicite la reparación solamente a un técnico cualifi cado. Seguridad: Es importante que el operador conozca y entienda los peligros comunes derivados del uso de cualquier transceptor. Derechos de autor del firmware El título y la propiedad de los derechos de autor del firmware incorporado en memorias de productos KENWOOD están reservados para JVCKENWOOD Corporation. La tecnología de codificación de voz AMBE+2™ integrada en este producto está protegida por derechos de propiedad intelectual incluyendo los derechos de patente, los derechos de autor y secretos comerciales de Digital Voice Systems, Inc. Esta tecnología de codificación de voz otorga licencia para su uso únicamente dentro de este equipo de comunicaciones. Está explícitamente prohibido que el usuario de esta tecnología intente extraer, retirar, descompilar, realizer ingeniería inversa, o desmontar el código objeto, o convertir de cualquier otra manera el código objeto a una forma legible para el ser humano. Los números de patente de los EE.UU. #8,315,860, #8,595,002, #6,912,495, #8,200,497, #7,970,606 y #8,359,197. INFORMACIÓN SOBRE CONCESIÓN DE LICENCIA DE LA FCC Su transceptor KENWOOD funciona en frecuencias de comunicación sujetas a la Normativa y Reglamento de la FCC (Federal Communications Commission). El Reglamento de la FCC exige que todos los operadores que utilizan radiofrecuencias móviles terrestres privadas deben solicitar una licencia de radio antes de utilizar su equipo. La solicitud de dicha licencia debe realizarse a través del modelo 601 de la FCC, anexos D y H, y el modelo de Pago (Remittance) 159. FAX: Los modelos se pueden solicitar por fax al sistema de Fax On Demand de la FCC. Marque el 1-202-418-0177 desde su aparato de fax y solicite el número de documento 000601 para recibir el modelo, anexos e instrucciones. CORREO: Los modelos se pueden solicitar por teléfono y se le remitirá por correo preferente. Llame a la Línea Directa de solicitud Modelos de la FCC al 1-800-418-FORM (1-800-418-3676). INTERNET: El Modelo 601 y las instrucciones se pueden descargar del sitio Web de la FCC en la siguiente dirección: fcc.gov/formpage.html Antes de rellenar la sección de datos técnicos del Modelo de solicitud 601, debe decidir en qué frecuencias desea comunicarse. Consulte los cuadros de frecuencias del manual de instrucciones detallado. ¿PREGUNTAS? Si tiene alguna duda sobre la solicitud de la licencia, llame a la FCC al 1-888-CALL-FCC (1-888-225-5322). Nota: PRECAUCIONES Respete las siguientes precauciones para evitar incendios, lesiones personales y daños en el transceptor. • No cargue el transceptor ni la batería si están mojados. • Compruebe que no haya ningún objeto metálico interpuesto entre el transceptor y la batería. • No utilice opciones no indicadas por KENWOOD. • Si el chasis de fundición u otra pieza del transceptor resulta dañada, no toque ninguna de dichas piezas. • Si conecta un casco o auricular al transceptor, reduzca el volumen del aparato. Tenga cuidado con al nivel cuando desactive el silenciador. • No líe el cable del micrófono alrededor del cuello cuando esté cerca de máquinas que pudieran atrapar el cable. • No coloque el transceptor sobre superfi cies inestables. • Asegúrese de que el extremo de la antena no le roce los ojos. • Cuando utilice el transceptor para transmisiones prolongadas, el radiador y el chasis se recalentarán. No toque estos puntos al cambiar la batería. • Apague el transceptor antes de instalar los accesorios opcionales. • Si penetra agua en la apertura del micrófono o por la parilla del altavoz, el nivel de voz podría quedar distorsionado o reducido. Agite suavemente el transceptor para eliminar el agua del altavoz y/o del micrófono antes de utilizar el transceptor. • El cargador es el dispositivo que desconecta la unidad de la red eléctrica de CA. El enchufe de CA debe estar fácilmente accesible. • A la hora de desechar las pilas, asegúrese de cumplir con las normas y regulaciones de su país o región. ADVERTENCIA Apague el transceptor antes de entrar en las siguientes ubicaciones: • Apague el transceptor en los siguientes lugares: • En aeronaves. (El uso que se haga del transceptor deberá ajustarse en todo momento a las instrucciones y normativa que indique la tripulación de la aeronave.) • Cuando existan carteles de restricción o de advertencia sobre el uso de aparatos de radio, como pudiera ser en centros hospitalarios, entre otros. • Cerca de personas con marcapasos. • En atmósferas explosivas (gas infl amable, partículas de polvo, polvos metálicos, polvos de grano, etc.). • Mientras reposta combustible o está aparcado en estaciones de servicio. PRECAUCIÓN • No desmonte ni modifi que el transceptor bajo ningún concepto. • No coloque el transceptor encima o cerca de un sistema de bolsa de aire (airbag) con el vehículo en marcha. Al infl arse la bolsa de aire, el transceptor puede salir expulsado y golpear al conductor o a los pasajeros. • No transmita tocando el terminal de la antena o si sobresale alguna pieza metálica del recubrimiento de la antena. Si transmite en ese momento, podría sufrir una quemadura por alta frecuencia. • Si detecta un olor anormal o humo procedente del transceptor, apáguelo, retire la batería y póngase en contacto con su proveedor KENWOOD. • El uso del transceptor mientras conduce puede infringir las leyes de tráfi co. Consulte y respete el reglamento de tráfi co de su país. • No someta el transceptor a temperaturas extremadamente altas o bajas. • No transporte la batería (o el porta pilas) con objetos metálicos, ya que estos podrían producir un cortocircuito con los terminales de la batería. • Peligro de explosión si la batería se cambia incorrectamente; cámbiela únicamente por otra del mismo tipo. • Al instalar una correa comercial al transceptor, asegúrese de que la correa sea duradera. Además, no balancee el transceptor por la correa; podría golpear accidentalmente y lesionar a otra persona con el transceptor. • Si se usa una correa para el cuello disponible comercialmente, tenga cuidado de no dejar que la correa quede atrapada en una máquina cercana. • Cuando utilice el transceptor en zonas donde el aire sea seco, es fácil que se acumule carga eléctrica (electricidad estática). Cuando utilice un auricular accesorio en estas condiciones, es posible que reciba una descarga eléctrica en el oído, a través del auricular, procedente del transceptor. Para evitar descargas eléctricas, le recomendamos que en estas circunstancias utilice exclusivamente un micrófono/ altavoz. • No exponga el transceptor a la luz directa del sol durante periodos de tiempo prolongados, ni lo coloque cerca de calefactores. AJUSTES DE CANAL PREDETERMINADOS Información sobre la batería La batería contiene objetos inflamables, como disolvente orgánico. Su uso inapropiado puede hacer que la batería se rompa y se incendie o genere calor extremo, que se deteriore o se produzcan otros tipos de daños a la batería. Observe las siguientes prohibiciones. PELIGRO • ¡No desmonte o reconstruya la batería! • ¡No cortocircuite la batería! • ¡No arroje la batería al fuego ni le aplique calor! • ¡No deje la batería cerca del fuego, estufas, u otros generadores de calor (zonas por encima de 80°C/ 176°F)! • ¡No sumerja la batería en agua o deje que se moje de ningún otro modo! • ¡No cargue la batería cerca del fuego o bajo la luz directa del sol! • ¡Utilice únicamente el cargador especificado y observe los requisitos de carga! • ¡No perfore o golpee la batería con ningún objeto, ni tampoco la pise! • ¡No golpee ni tire la batería! • ¡No utilice la batería si presenta algún tipo de daño! • ¡No suelde nada directamente a la batería! • ¡No invierta la polaridad de la batería (ni los terminales)! • ¡No cargue o conecte la batería de forma invertida! • ¡No toque la batería si está rota y tiene fugas! Si el líquido electrolito de la batería llegara a entrarle en los ojos, láveselos con agua fresca lo antes posible, sin frotarlos. Vaya al hospital inmediatamente. Si no se trata, podría causar problemas a la vista. ADVERTENCIA • ¡No cargue la batería durante más tiempo del indicado! • ¡No coloque la batería dentro de un horno microondas o un recipiente de alta presión! • ¡Mantenga las baterías perforadas y con fugas lejos del fuego! • ¡No utilice una batería que presente anomalías! • ¡No cambie o cargue la batería en ambientes peligrosos! NX-P1300NU (Transceptor NXDN/ analógico)

Desembale el transceptor con cuidado. Recomendamos que ◆ Cuando el indicador parpadea de color rojo, la batería está defectuosa o los contactos no están bien acoplados a los del cargador. Estos transceptores le permiten reprogramar cada uno de los canales con distintes frecuencias y ajustes de QT/DQT (Analógico)/ Número Zona 1/ Zona 2 (Analógica) Zona 3 (Digital) Zona 4 (Digital) identifi que los artículos enumerados en la lista siguiente antes de desechar el material de embalaje Si falta o ha resultado dañado ◆ Cuando el indicador parpadea en vede y naranja, la temperatura de la batería no se ajusta a la temperatura de inicio de carga. Retire la RAN (NXDN digital). En la siguiente tabla se recogen los ajustes de canal predeterminados. de canal Frecuencia (MHz) QT (Hz) Frecuencia (MHz) RAN Frecuencia (MHz) RAN

algún artículo, presente inmediatamente una reclamación a la empresa de transporte. Artículo Cantidad Antena 1 Cargador de la batería/ Adaptador de CA (KSC-35S) 1 batería del cargador y espere hasta que se alcance una temperatura normal antes de cargarla de nuevo. ◆ Durante el proceso de carga, la temperatura ambiente debe ser de 5°C a 40°C (de 41°F a 104°F). Si la carga se realiza fuera de este rango de temperaturas, es posible que la batería no se cargue por completo. ◆ La vida útil de la batería termina cuando disminuye el tiempo de Nota: ◆ La confi guración predeterminada de la zona difi ere según cada modelo. Para los modelos KENWOOD compatibles de cada zona, consulte el manual de instrucciones detallado. NX-P1200NV (Transceptor NXDN/ analógico) 1 464,5000 67,0 464,5000 1 464,5500 1 2 464,5000 77,0 464,5000 2 467,9250 1 3 464,5000 88,5 464,5000 3 461,0375 1 4 464,5000 179,9 464,5000 4 461,0625 1 5 464,5000 100,0 464,5000 5 461,0875 1 6 464,5500 67,0 464,5500 1 461,1125 1

Batería de iones de litio (KNB-45L) 1 funcionamiento aunque se haya cargado de forma correcta y completa. Reemplace la batería. Número Zona 1/ Zona 2 (Analógica) Zona 3/ Zona 4 (Digital) 7 464,5500 82,5 464,5500 2 461,1375 1 Tapa del conector del altavoz/ micrófono 1 Soporte del bloqueo del altavoz/ micrófono 1 de canal OPERACIONES BÁSICAS Frecuencia (MHz) QT (Hz) Frecuencia (MHz) RAN 8 464,5500 94,8 464,5500 3 461,1625 1 9 464,5500 179,9 464,5500 4 464,5000 1

Gancho para cinturón (KBH-10) 1 Tornillo (M3 x 8 mm) 2 Tarjeta de garantía 1 Guía del usuario 1 Nota: Interruptor de encendido/ Control de volumen Selector Antena Altavoz 1 151,6250 67,0 151,6250 1 2 151,6250 77,0 151,6250 2 3 151,6250 88,5 151,6250 3 4 151,6250 179,9 151,6250 4 5 151,6250 100,0 151,6250 5 6 151,9550 67,0 151,9550 1 7 151,9550 82,5 151,9550 2 10 464,5500 100,0 464,5500 5 467,7625 1 11 461,3625 74,4 461,3625 1 467,8125 1 12 464,4875 79,7 464,4875 1 467,8500 1 13 464,5375 85,4 464,5375 1 467,8750 1 14 466,0375 91,5 466,0375 1 467,9000 1 15 466,0875 97,4 466,0875 1 461,1875 1 16 466,1375 103,5 466,1375 1 461,2125 1

◆ Para el conector del altavoz/ micrófono, el rendimiento de la impermeabilidad está garantizado mediante la fi jación de la tapa suministrada. El rendimiento de la impermeabilidad no estará Conmutador PTT Botón lateral 1 Micrófono 8 151,9550 94,8 151,9550 3 9 151,9550 179,9 151,9550 4 NX-P1300AU (Transceptor analógico) garantizado si conecta un altavoz/ micrófono opcional, etc. Botón lateral 2 10 151,9550 100,0 151,9550 5 Número Zona 1 ~ Zona 4

Batería 11 154,4900 67,0 154,4900 1 12 154,5150 67,0 154,5150 1 de canal Frecuencia (MHz) QT (Hz)

INSTALACIÓN/ EXTRACCIÓN DE LA BATERÍA 1 Alinee la batería con la parte posterior del transceptor, y luego apriete la batería y el transceptor fuertemente hasta que la pestaña de liberación situada en la parte inferior del transceptor chasquee. ENCENDIDO Y APAGADO Gire el Interruptor de encendido/ Control de volumen hacia la derecha para encender el transceptor. Gire el Interruptor de encendido/ Control de volumen 13 151,5125 67,0 151,5125 1 14 151,6850 67,0 151,6850 1 15 151,7000 67,0 151,7000 1 16 151,7600 67,0 151,7600 1 NX-P1200AV (Transceptor analógico) Zona 1 ~ Zona 4 1 464,5000 67,0 2 464,5000 77,0 3 464,5000 88,5 4 464,5000 179,9 5 464,5000 100,0 6 464,5500 67,0 7 464,5500 82,5

2 Para extraer la batería, suba el cierre completamente hacia la izquierda para apagar el transceptor. Número de canal Frecuencia (MHz) QT (Hz) 8 464,5500 94,8 9 464,5500 179,9

de seguridad situado en la base del transceptor y luego presione la pestaña de liberación situada debajo de dicho cierre. 3 Mientras presiona la pestaña de liberación, separe la batería del transceptor. AJUSTE DEL VOLUMEN Gire el Interruptor de encendido/ Control de volumen para ajustar el volumen. Hacia la derecha aumenta el nivel de volumen y hacia la izquierda, lo reduce. SELECCIONAR UNA ZONA Mantenga pulsado el Botón lateral 1 (Zona arriba) o Botón lateral 2 (Zona abajo) durante 1 segundo para cambiar la zona (1 ~ 4). 1 151,6250 67,0 2 151,6250 77,0 3 151,6250 88,5 4 151,6250 179,9 5 151,6250 100,0 6 151,9550 67,0 7 151,9550 82,5 8 151,9550 94,8 9 151,9550 179,9 10 464,5500 100,0 11 461,3625 74,4 12 464,4875 79,7 13 464,5375 85,4 14 466,0375 91,5 15 466,0875 97,4 16 466,1375 103,5 NX-P1302AU (Transceptor analógico)

SELECCIÓN DE UN CANAL Rote el Selector para seleccionar el canal deseado. 10 151,9550 100,0 11 154,4900 67,0 12 154,5150 67,0 Número de canal Zona 1 Zona 2 ~ Zona 4 Frecuencia (MHz) QT (Hz) Frecuencia (MHz) QT (Hz)

CARGA DE LA BATERÍA ATENCIÓN: ◆ Desconecte siempre el transceptor equipado con batería antes de insertarlo en el cargador. TRANSMISIÓN 1 Seleccione la zona y el canal deseados. 2 Presione el Conmutador PTT y hable al micrófono. Suelte el Conmutador PTT para recibir. • Para obtener una calidad de sonido optima, sujete el transceptor a 3 ó 4 cm de la boca. RECEPCIÓN 13 151,5125 67,0 14 151,6850 67,0 15 151,7000 67,0 16 151,7600 67,0 NX-P1202AV (Transceptor analógico) Zona 1 Zona 2 ~ Zona 4 1 464,5500 67,0 464,5000 67,0 2 467,9250 67,0 464,5000 77,0 3 461,0375 67,0 464,5000 88,5 4 461,0625 67,0 464,5000 179,9 5 461,0875 67,0 464,5000 100,0 6 461,1125 67,0 464,5500 67,0 7 461,1375 67,0 464,5500 82,5

1 Enchufe el cable del adaptador de CA en el jack situado en la parte Seleccione la zona y el canal deseados. Si se ha programado la función de señalización en el canal seleccionado, sólo oirá las Número de canal Frecuencia (MHz) QT (Hz) Frecuencia (MHz) QT (Hz) 8 461,1625 67,0 464,5500 94,8 9 464,5000 67,0 464,5500 179,9

posterior del cargador. 2 Enchufe el adaptador de CA en la toma de CA. 3 Introduzca en la ranura de carga la batería o un transceptor equipado con una batería. • Asegúrese de que los contactos metálicos de la batería se acoplen firmemente con los terminales del cargador. • El indicador se ilumina de color rojo y comienza la carga. Indicador 4 Una vez fi nalizada la carga, el indicador parpadea en verde. Retire la batería o el transceptor de la ranura de carga del cargador. • La batería tarda 3 horas aproximadamente en cargarse. • Cuando no se vaya a utilizar el cargador durante un tiempo prolongado, desenchufe el adaptador de CA de la toma de CA. llamadas en las que la señal recibida coincida con la confi guración del transceptor. 1 154,4900 67,0 151,6250 67,0 2 154,5150 67,0 151,6250 77,0 3 151,6250 67,0 151,6250 88,5 4 151,9550 67,0 151,6250 179,9 5 151,5125 67,0 151,6250 100,0 6 151,6850 67,0 151,9550 67,0 7 151,7750 67,0 151,9550 82,5 8 158,4000 67,0 151,9550 94,8 9 151,6250 77,0 151,9550 179,9 10 151,6250 88,5 151,9550 100,0 11 151,6250 179,9 154,4900 67,0 12 151,9550 82,5 154,5150 67,0 13 151,9550 94,8 151,5125 67,0 14 151,9550 179,9 151,6850 67,0 15 151,7000 67,0 151,7000 67,0 16 151,7600 67,0 151,7600 67,0 10 467,7625 67,0 464,5500 100,0 11 467,8125 67,0 461,3625 74,4 12 467,8500 67,0 464,4875 79,7 13 467,8750 67,0 464,5375 85,4 14 467,9000 67,0 466,0375 91,5 15 461,1875 67,0 466,0875 97,4 16 461,2125 67,0 466,1375 103,5


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL

COSTAR CR1600PC (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or page errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD COSTAR CR1600PC (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary:

Hybrid Digital Video Recorder WARNING RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. COMPLIANCE NOTICE OF FCC: THIS EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN TESTED AND FOUND TO COMPLY WITH THE LIMITS FOR A CLASS A DIGITAL DEVICE, PURSUANT TO PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. THESE LIMITS ARE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE REASONABLE PROTECTION AGAINST HARMFUL INTERFERENCE WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS OPERATED IN A COMMERCIAL ENVIRONMENT. THIS EQUIPMENT GENERATES, USES, AND CAN RADIATE RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY AND IF NOT INSTALLED AND USED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL, MAY CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE TO RADIO COMMUNICATIONS. OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT IN A RESIDENTIAL AREA IS LIKELY TO CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, IN WHICH CASE USERS WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT THE INTERFERENCE AT THEIR OWN EXPENSE. WARNING: CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT. THIS CLASS OF DIGITAL APPARATUS MEETS ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE CANADIAN INTERFERENCE CAUSING EQUIPMENT REGULATIONS. The information in this manual is believed to be accurate as of the date of publication. We are not responsible for any problems resulting from the use thereof. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. Revisions or new editions to this publication may be issued to incorporate such changes. The software included in this product contains some Open Sources. You may obtain the complete corresponding source code from us. See the Open Source Guide on the software CD (OpenSourceGuide\OpenSourceGuide.pdf) or as a printed document included along with the User's Manual. i User’s Manual

Important Safeguards 1. Read Instructions All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the appliance is operated. 2. Keep Instructions The safety and operating instructions should be kept for future reference. 3. Cleaning Unplug this equipment from the wall outlet before cleaning it. Do not use liquid aerosol cleaners. Use a damp soft cloth for cleaning. 4. Attachments Never add any attachments and/or equipment without the approval of the manufacturer as such additions may result in the risk of fire, electric shock or other personal injury. 5. Water and/or Moisture Do not use this equipment near water or in contact with water. 6. Accessories Do not place this equipment on an unstable cart, stand or table. The equipment may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the equipment. Wall or shelf mounting should follow the manufacturer's instructions, and should use a mounting kit approved by the manufacturer. This equipment and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the equipment and cart combination to overturn. 7. Ventilation Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, and to ensure reliable operation of the equipment and to protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. Do not block these openings or allow them to be blocked by placing the equipment on a bed, sofa, rug, or bookcase. Ensure that there is adequate ventilation and that the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. 8. Power Sources This equipment should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power, please consult your equipment dealer or local power company. You may want to install a UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) system for safe operation in order to prevent damage caused by an unexpected power stoppage. Any questions concerning UPS, consult your UPS retailer. 9. Power Cords Operator or installer must remove power and other connections before handling the equipment. 10. Lightning For added protection for this equipment during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the equipment due to lightning and power-line surges. 11. Overloading Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock. 12. Objects and Liquids Never push objects of any kind through openings of this equipment as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the equipment. 13. Servicing Do not attempt to service this equipment yourself. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. 14. Damage requiring Service Unplug this equipment from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: A. When the power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged. B. If liquid is spilled, or objects have fallen into the equipment. C. If the equipment has been exposed to rain or water. D. If the equipment does not operate normally by following the operating instructions, adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the equipment to its normal operation. E. If the equipment has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged. F. When the equipment exhibits a distinct change in performance — this indicates a need for service. 15. Replacement Parts When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or that have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards. 16. Safety Check Upon completion of any service or repairs to this equipment, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the equipment is in proper operating condition. 17. Field Installation This installation should be made by a qualified service person and should conform to all local codes. 18. Telnet Communication Cable Caution: To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. 19. Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with same or equivalent type recommended by manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instruction. 20. Elevated Operating Ambient If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient. Therefore, consideration should be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature (Tma) specified by the manufacturer. 21. Reduced Air Flow Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the amount of air flow required for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised. 22. Mechanical Loading Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading. 23. Circuit Overloading Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring. Appropriate consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern. 24. Reliable Earthing Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. Particular attention should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (e.g. user of power strips).

ii Hybrid Digital Video Recorder WEEE (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) Correct Disposal of This Product (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This marking shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. iii

User’s Manual iv

Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Table of Contents Chapter 1 — Product Information .................................................................................. 1 FEATURES.................................................................................................................... 1 SYSTEM DIAGRAM ...................................................................................................... 1 FRONT PANEL.............................................................................................................. 2 REAR PANEL ................................................................................................................ 2 TURNING ON THE DVR ............................................................................................... 4 TURNING OFF THE DVR ............................................................................................. 4 Chapter 2 — SmartGuard ................................................................................................ 5 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................... 5 FEATURES.................................................................................................................... 5 MAIN GUI ...................................................................................................................... 6 Screen Group Edit ..................................................................................................... 9 Instant Play ................................................................................................................ 9 PTZ ............................................................................................................................ 9 SmartGuard SETUP .................................................................................................... 10 Setting Up the System ............................................................................................ 10 Set up General ........................................................................................................ 11 Network ................................................................................................................... 12 System alert ............................................................................................................ 13 Time sync ................................................................................................................ 16 OSD ......................................................................................................................... 17 Archive .................................................................................................................... 18 System authority...................................................................................................... 20 Setting Up the Camera ............................................................................................ 21 Channel status ........................................................................................................ 23 Assign camera ......................................................................................................... 24 Channel ................................................................................................................... 26 Setting Up the Alert ................................................................................................. 27 Alarm Out ................................................................................................................ 29 User Define Alarm Out ............................................................................................ 30 NetCam Alarm Out .................................................................................................. 31 Email ....................................................................................................................... 32 Callback ................................................................................................................... 33 Setting Up the Event ............................................................................................... 34 Motion ...................................................................................................................... 37 Object ...................................................................................................................... 38 Video Loss ............................................................................................................... 39 Alarm In ................................................................................................................... 40 User Define Alarm In ............................................................................................... 40 Text In ..................................................................................................................... 41 Audio Detection ....................................................................................................... 42 NetCam Alarm In ..................................................................................................... 42 Tampering ............................................................................................................... 42 Tripzone .................................................................................................................. 42 Setting Up the Schedule ......................................................................................... 43 Schedule Setup ....................................................................................................... 46 Setting Up the SPOT ............................................................................................... 47 v User’s Manual Multi Channel .......................................................................................................... 48 Setting Up the User ................................................................................................. 50 Chapter 3 — SmartSearch............................................................................................. 51 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................. 51 FEATURES.................................................................................................................. 51 MAIN GUI .................................................................................................................... 52 SEARCH AND PLAYBACK OF RECORDED VIDEO ................................................. 54 Condition Search ..................................................................................................... 54 Time-Lapse Search ................................................................................................. 57 SAVING OF RECORDED VIDEO ............................................................................... 60 Save As Clip File ..................................................................................................... 60 Clip Player ............................................................................................................... 61 AUDIO PLAYBACK ..................................................................................................... 63 Checking Audio Recording Configuration ............................................................... 63 Playing Recorded Audio .......................................................................................... 63 External Saving ........................................................................................................... 64 Appendix 1 — Network Setup (LAN) ............................................................................ 65 Appendix 2 — WebGuard .............................................................................................. 67 Appendix 3 — Text-In Query ......................................................................................... 71 Appendix 4 — Connector Pin Outs .............................................................................. 73 Appendix 5 — Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 76 Appendix 6 — Specifications ....................................................................................... 77 vi Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Chapter 1 — Product Information FEATURES  Compatible with color cameras and other standard video sources  Video input from network cameras (Hybrid model only)  H.264 codec  Video synchronization not required  Simultaneous recording, multi-screen viewing, playback, remote monitoring and archiving  Video recording and archiving via eSATA interface  Versatile display formats for convenient user interface  Main and Spot monitor outputs  On-screen graphic display including camera title, time and event detection block  Sequence mode available in all screen formats  Hardware watchdog timer function  Programmable motion detection for each camera input using graphic user interface  Various image enhancement functions  Remote monitoring, playback and control by using a remote program  User-friendly interface  32-channel alarm input and 32-channel alarm output  Network camera alarm and audio association (32-channel each for input and output) (Hybrid model only) NOTE: This manual covers the 16- and 32-channel digital video recorders. For simplicity, the illustrations and descriptions in this manual refer to the 32-channel model. Refer to Appendix 6 — Specifications for the system specifications. SYSTEM DIAGRAM Non-Hybrid Model 1 User’s Manual Hybrid Model FRONT PANEL  Power Button: Turn the system on or off.  Power LED: Is lit when the unit is turned on.  HDD LED: Flickers when the unit accesses to the hard disk drive.  DVD RW: Use to export recorded data to the DVD RW media.  USB: Connect USB devices such as a mouse, keyboard, USB storage device or printer. REAR PANEL 16-Channel Model 2 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder 32-Channel Model ① Power In ② Video In (BNC) ③ Audio In ④ Alarm In ⑤ Alarm Out (Relay) ⑥ RS232 ⑦ RS485 ⑧ SD SPOT (BNC, Multi-Channel Display) ⑨ Alarm Out (TTL) ⑩ HD SPOT (Multi-Channel Display) ⑪ SD SPOT (D-Sub 8 BNC, Sequence Display) ⑫ Audio Out ⑬ VGA (D-Sub) ⑭ DVI ⑮ E-SATA USB HDMI Network (RJ-45)  Power In: Connect a power cord.  Video In (BNC): Connect BNC cameras.  Audio In: Connect audio sources (Line-in).  Alarm In: Connect external alarm-in devices.  Alarm Out (Relay): Connect external alarm-out devices such as buzzers or lights.  RS232: Connect a remote control device for RS232 communication.  RS485: Connect a remote control device for RS485 communication.  SD SPOT (BNC, Multi-Channel Display): Connect a spot monitor which supports a BNC interface for the multi-channel display. The multi-channel display settings are available at the SPOT – Multi Channel menu of SmartGuard.  Alarm Out (TTL): Connect external alarm-out devices such as buzzers or lights.  HD SPOT (Multi-Channel Display): Connect an HD (high-definition) PC monitor which supports an HDMI interface for the multi-channel display. The multi-channel display settings are available at the SPOT – Multi Channel menu of SmartGuard.  SD SPOT (BNC, Multi-Channel Display), Alarm Out (TTL) and HD SPOT (Multi-Channel Display) on the left are supported for Channel 1 to Channel 16 and SD SPOT (BNC, Multi-Channel Display), Alarm Out (TTL) and HD SPOT (Multi-Channel Display) on the right are supported for Channel 17 to Channel 32. (Only 32-Channel model)  SD SPOT (D-Sub 8 BNC, Sequence Display): Connect a spot monitor which supports a BNC interface for the sequence display. The sequence display settings are available at the SPOT – Sequence menu of SmartGuard.  Audio Out: Connect an amplifier (Line-out). The DVR does not have amplified audio output, so you will need a speaker with an amplifier.  VGA (D-Sub): Connect an HD (high-definition) PC monitor which supports a D-Sub interface. Connect a monitor before turning on the system. Video might not be displayed on the monitor when connecting a monitor after turning on the system.  DVI: Connect an HD (high-definition) PC monitor which supports a DVI interface.  E-SATA: Connect an external hard disk drive which supports an eSATA interface.  HDMI: Connect an HD (high-definition) PC monitor which supports an HDMI interface. 3 User’s Manual  USB: Connect USB devices such as a mouse, keyboard, USB storage device or printer.  Network (RJ-45): Connect a Cat5 cable with an RJ-45 connector. The network settings are available at the SYSTEM – Network menu of SmartGuard. NOTE: SPOT display is not supported for network cameras. NOTE: The location of ports in slots can be different from the image above. Refer to Appendix 4 — Connector Pin Outs for connection of the ports located in slots. NOTE: VGA, DVI and HDMI main out supports dual display (SmartGuard on the primary display and SmartSearch on the additional display) and not triple display. NOTE: Windows may not operate properly when using the USB connectors on the front panel of the DVR, depending on the model type of the USB device. In this case, connect the USB device after Windows boots properly or use the USB connectors located on the rear panel. NOTE: If the LAN 1 and LAN 2 is connected to the same network, the system may malfunction. NOTE: When mounting the DVR on a rack, comply with the following instructions. − Ensure that the rack inside is not sealed. − Ensure the air is circulated through the inlet/outlet. − If you pile up DVRs or other rack-mount devices, secure room for ventilation or install a vent. − For natural air convection, place the inlet at the bottom of the rack and the outlet on top. − It is strongly recommended that a fan motor is installed at the inlet and the outlet for air circulation and fit a filter at the inlet to screen dust or foreign substances. − Maintain the temperature inside the rack or surrounding areas between 41°F to 104°F (5°C to 40°C). TURNING ON THE DVR Press the power button located on the front panel to turn the system on. The system goes into the SmartGuard mode as soon as it finishes its boot process. NOTE: Connect a monitor before turning on the system. Video might not be displayed on the monitor when connecting a monitor after turning on the system. CAUTION: The 16, 32 -channel model requires at least 1280 x 1024 resolution. The SmartGuard program will not run if the monitor does not have the resolution that fits for each model. TURNING OFF THE DVR Click the (Menu) button and System Shutdown menu of SmartGuard or press the power button on the front panel to turn the system off. NOTE: When turning off the system, you must confirm that you want to turn off the unit. Turning off the system is allowed to only authorized users for the Shut down option during the at the USER menu of SmartGuard. CAUTION: The system can be shut down by force by pressing the power button on the front panel over 10 seconds. However, follow the normal shutdown procedures as mentioned above when the system is operating normally. Turning off the DVR without shutdown procedures can cause damage to the system. 4 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Chapter 2 — SmartGuard OVERVIEW SmartGuard is powerful surveillance software. It provides multiplexer functions, digital time-lapse recording and event-driven recording. SmartGuard also provides motion detection, PTZ control and various image enhancement functions. NOTE: The first time you turn on the system, it will immediately begin recording. If you have less than 32 cameras, you must disable cameras which are not connected (SYSTEM – Set up General menu of SmartGuard); otherwise, the recording speed might be decreased somewhat. FEATURES  Max. 32 channels  Max. 960 images/sec recording (Reference: BNC camera 704 x 480 resolution, network camera 1920 x1080 resolution)  User-friendly interface  Scheduling by camera and time  Time-lapse or event-driven recording  Panic recording  Motion detection and object detection function  Audio recording  PTZ control 5 User’s Manual MAIN GUI 16-Channel Model 32-Channel Model ① Monitoring Screen ② Menu Button ③ System Status ④ Utility Buttons ⑤ PTZ Control Panel ⑥ Alarm Control Panel ⑦ Screen Mode Buttons ⑧ Camera Buttons ⑨ Log Panel ⑩ POS Panel 6 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder  Monitoring Screen: Displays monitoring video. – OSD Display: Go to System – OSD menu of SmartGuard, and enable OSD display to display the OSD information.  / / : Recording schedule (time-lapse recording / event recording / time-lapse and event recording)  : A motion detection, object detection or video loss event has been detected.  / / : Recording status (time-lapse recording / pre-event recording / event recording)  : PTZ enabled. – Hover Menu: Controls each camera. Selecting a camera screen displays the button beside the camera title. Clicking the button displays the hover menu.  (Zoom): Zooms in the image.  (Color Control): Adjusts the brightness, contrast, saturation and hue of the current video. Clicking the button cancels the adjustment and reloads the original image.  / (Audio Out): Controls audio out.  / (Local Microphone): Transmits audio through microphone connected to DVR. This is supported for network cameras that support two-way audio function.  (Instant Play): Allows you to play back video on the camera screen. See the Instant Play section (p. 8) for details.  (PTZ Control): Controls PTZ.  / (Fit to screen / Original ratio): Changes the image aspect ratio.  Menu Button: Displays the SmartGuard menu. – Login/Logout: Logs in or logs out the system. When Use local login is disabled in the SmartGuard program (SYSTEM – System Authority menu), the DVR does not ask login procedure. When you forgot the password, ask your dealer or distributor. When Use password expire is enabled in the SmartGuard program (SYSTEM – System Authority menu), you will be asked whether or not to renew the password when you log in if the password has not been changed during the password expiration period. – SmartSearch: Runs the SmartSearch program. This function will be disabled during dual display. – Setup: Displays a SmartGuard Setup screen. It allows you to change the settings of SmartGuard program. – About: Displays the information of the installed cards, driver, software, hard disk drive, OS and MAC address on the system. – Help: Displays the electronic file of user’s manual. – Log: Displays system log list. – Record Storage Setup: Click the Recording Storage Setup to add the HDD or change or reset storage settings. Running the record storage setup displays the message that the SmartGuard program will exit. When record storage setup is complete, the SmartGuard program will run automatically. – Storage List: Displays a list of connected storage devices that is available for recording.  Drive: Displays a name of the device. NOTE: It supports Physical Drive that is not initialized. Physical Drive is displayed as “Physical[hdd(number)].” It is possible to either assign available storage entirely or not to assign. Physical Drive exists in storage device but the one that is already assigned as an archive is not displayed in recording setup.  Total Capacity: Displays the total capacity of the device.  Available Storage: Displays the number of storages that is available for recording. The storage is the basic unit of 256MB for the database used by the DVR.  New Available Storage: Displays the number of storages to be allocated for recording.  Assigned Storage Count: Displays the number of storages currently allocated for recording. 7 User’s Manual  Record Scope: Displays the date and time period of recorded video to be recorded.  iSCSI Management: Connects an iSCSI device to DVR to use local HDD together. Clicking iSCSI management displays iSCSI screen. When setting an iSCSI setup and registering HDD, the storage list will be updated.  Disk Management: Clicks the button to format local HDD or to change the settings. Clicking disk management displays disk related setup screen. When setting is complete, the storage list will be updated. – Storage Info: Displays a list of connected storage devices that is available for archiving.  Set up Storage for selected Drive: Set the number of storages to be used for recording in the selected device.  Storage in use: Displays the total number of storages allocated to all devices in Storage List.  Set up Storage: Displays the total number of storages to be allocated to all devices in Storage List.  Total Storage: Displays the total number of storages allocated and to be allocated to all devices in Storage List.  Create/Resize: Clicking the button creates or adds storage depending on the number of storages to be allocated in the selected device.  Format: Clicking the button deletes recorded video saved in the selected device.  Remove: Clicking the button deletes all storage folders allocated in the selected device. Recorded video will be deleted when the storage folders are deleted.  Exit: Clicking the button closes the setup screen. NOTE: The Recorded StorageSetup option can be activated only for the user who has a system authority. NOTE: It supports RAW Volume partition of GPT way. RAW Volume partition is displayed as “Raw[hdd:(number), p:(partition number)]” in the hard disk driver. It is possible to either assign available storage entirely or not to assign. RAW Volume partition exists in storage device but the one that is already assigned as an archive is not displayed in recording setup. – System shutdown: Shuts down the system.  System Status: Displays user ID, date and time, the remaining hard disk space and the type of hard disk usage. Clicking the right mouse button allows you to change the time. If you change the time, the SmartGuard program restarts and recording stops during the time.  Utility Buttons – (Secondary Live Screen On/Off): Clicking the button displays a camera screen to an additional connected monitor (secondary monitor). This is not supported for the primary monitor that has less than 1920 x 1080. Also it is not supported for secondary monitor that has less than 1024 x 768. – ( (Panic Recording): Starts recording video from all cameras\ regardless of the recording schedule. It may be used when you want to record manually during monitoring. Clicking the button again releases the panic recording. Recording speed for the panic recording is the same as that of the time-lapse recording. – (Manual Alarm Output): In general, the alarm out is activated automatically when any event is detected if the event is associated with alarm out. However, the user can activate all the alarm out manually by clicking this button while it is released or deactivate all the alarm out by clicking this button while it is pressed. – (Auto Sequencing): Starts sequencing the cameras in order. Clicking the button again releases the auto sequencing. Clicking the arrow button at the bottom-right allows you to change a sequence dwell time. – (SmartSearch): Runs the SmartSearch program. This function will be disabled during dual display.  PTZ Control Panel: Displays a PTZ control buttons. Refer to the PTZ section (p. 8) for details.  Alarm Control Panel: Displays alarm control buttons. You can check the alarm status and control the alarm out. The user can activate or inactivate alarm out manually by clicking the button when it is released or pressed. You can change the alarm out setting values at the ALERT – Alarm Out menu of SmartGuard.  Screen Mode Buttons: Click the desired screen mode. Double clicking the left mouse button over a camera screen displays video from the camera in the single-screen mode and double clicking the left mouse button again returns to the previous screen mode. You can change the camera arrangement manually for each screen mode. Refer to Screen Group Edit section (p. 8) for details.  Camera Buttons: Clicking a individual camera button displays video from the camera.  Log Panel: Displays system log list.  POS Panel: Displays text-in data from a text in device. 8 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Screen Group Edit You can change the camera arrangement manually for each screen mode. In case of secondary live screen, camera arrangement is maintained even if screen mode is changed. Changing the location of two channels on the monitoring screen: Clicking a camera screen and dragging it over another camera screen switches the location of the two camera screens. Changing the location of the channel hidden from the mongering screen: Clicking a camera button of the hidden channel and dragging it over a camera screen on the monitoring screen switches the location of the hidden channel and the previously displayed channel on the camera screen. This is not supported for the secondary live screen. Instant Play It allows you to play back video on the camera screen.  Instant Play: Allows you to play back recently recorded video if there are any video recorded.  Instant Remote Watch: Allows you to watch live video of another DVR.  Instant Remote Play: Allows you to play back recently recorded video of another DVR. PTZ The DVR provides transmission functions, and you can control popular PTZ devices and cameras. Clicking the PTZ panel button displays the PTZ control buttons as shown below.  (Auto Panning, Menu, Wiper, Pump, Light, Aux): Displays the On/Off status of each function. Hovering the mouse cursor over any button displays a setup screen and allows you to enable or disable each function and change the advanced settings of the PTZ camera.  (Direction Control): Controls the direction of the PTZ camera.  (Set Preset), (View Preset): Saves camera directions as a Preset so that you can move the camera directly to a saved direction.  (Zoom In/Out): Zooms the camera lens in or out.  (Iris Close/Open): Closes or opens the iris of the camera lens.  (Focus Near/Far): Focuses on near or far objects.  (One Push): Press this button to find the optimum focus automatically. It is recommended to get an approximate focus using the manual focusing button before pressing the one push button for fast and efficient focusing. This button is not supported in the Onvif protocol. NOTE: Presets can be set, depending on the specification of installed PTZ devices or PTZ cameras. Make sure available preset numbers first to make the PTZ preset function work properly. 9

User’s Manual SmartGuard SETUP  Load: Loads a saved setting and apply it to the DVR.  Save: Saves the current setting.  Default: Loads the factory default setting and apply it to the DVR. Setting Up the System 10

Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Set up General  Location: Enter a DVR name. If you do not have a keyboard connected to the unit, clicking the keyboard icon will display a virtual keyboard on which you can type by clicking the letters.  Camera On/Off: Enables or disables the camera by clicking each camera button.  Recording data usage – Auto deletion: Deletes the video recorded earlier than user-defined period. e.g. If you check the Auto deletion box, and set 30 days in the Period box, the DVR will automatically delete the video which is older than 30 days from the current day. – HDD usage: When Once is selected, the DVR stops recording when the hard disk drive is full. When Recycle is selected, the DVR continues recording when the hard disk drive is full by overwriting the oldest video.  Remote Control – Serial (RS485/RS232): Controls the SmartGuard program with the remote control device connected to the serial. COM port: Set the connected serial's COM port. Device ID: Set the remote control device's Device ID. Set up COM port: Set the the COM port's Set the baud rate, parity, data bit and stop bit. – Network: Controls the SmartGuard program with the remote control device connected to the network. Port: Set the port to allow connect the network remote control device.  Screen saver: Set the screen saver dwell time for the display image. The screen saver will be activated if there is no keyboard or mouse operation during the dwell time.  Display: Allows you to change the display setting of the connected monitors.  Printer: Allows you to add a printer.  Sound: Allows you to change the settings of audio out. 11 User’s Manual Network  Transmit Method – Frame Rate, Image resolution: Set the transmit speed and resolution of video to be transferred to remote system from the DVR. Transmit speed is the number of images transferred during one second. The higher the transmit speed is, the more images are transferred. For example, 30 means 30 images will be transferred during one second, and 5 m `eans 5 images will be transferred during one second. This is supported for analog cameras only. – SSL: Using the SSL function enhances the security of outgoing data from the DVR by using the SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) protocol when connecting to the DVR remotely. When using the SSL function, the DVR cannot be connected with a program or a system that does not support the SSL function. Selecting Standard does not use the SSL protocol for video and audio data, selecting High uses the SSL protocol for all data. NOTE: The remote setup to the DVR will be released when changing the SSL setting. NOTE: Using the SSL function might cause congestion in the system receiving data from the DVR depending on the security level. NOTE: This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit ( openssl.org/). 12

 Network Service Hybrid Digital Video Recorder

– FEN Server Info.: Clicking the Set up… button allows you to enter the FEN server information.  Server, Port: Enter the IP address (or domain name) and port number of the FEN server. – Use FEN: Enables the FEN function. Clicking the Set up… button allows you to register the DVR on the FEN server.  Name: Enter the DVR’s name to be registered on the FEN server. Click the Name Check button to check if the name you entered can be used. Clicking the OK button registers the name as a FEN name of the DVR. NOTE: The FEN function allows you to connect to the DVR from remote sites using either the dynamic IP addresses or the domain name. For the FEN function to work properly, the DVR’s FEN name should be registered on the FEN server, and the FEN server settings should match the settings registered on the FEN server. Any changes on the FEN server might cause improper operation. NOTE: The FEN registration is limited to only one FEN server. The DVR cannot be registered to multiple FEN servers. NOTE: When FEN function is enabled, it is not necessary to set up port forwarding manually. However, remote connection to the DVR might not be available depending on the network connection environment of the DVR or remote system when the FEN function is enabled. If it is the case, you should set up port forwarding for the DVR manually in the NAT (Network Address Translation) device to which the DVR is connected. – Use RTSP: Enables the RTSP service.  Set up network port: Click the button and set up network port number.  Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) properties: See Appendix 1 — Network Setup. System alert Clicking each tab of S.M.A.R.T., Stop recording and Login Fail (3 times) and enabling each function causes the system alert as follows:  S.M.A.R.T. tab – Set up alert, S.M.A.R.T. Log: Causes the system alert when S.M.A.R.T. log occurs. This is supported only when the installed hard disk drives support S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology) Monitoring program (Internal hard disk drives only) 13 User’s Manual – S.M.A.R.T. Log: Displays the list of S.M.A.R.T. log. – Delay time for the first inspection after system starts: Set the standby time until the system performs the first inspection after setting the function. – Inspection Interval: Set the inspection interval. – Threshold temperature for alert: Set the threshold temperature of hard disk drives. The DVR leaves S.M.A.R.T. log when the temperature of hard disk drives exceeds the defined threshold.  Stop recording tab – No recording during specified time: Causes the system alert when panic recording has been stopped by clicking the panic recording button or when recording has not been made during the predefined time.  Login Fail (3 times) tab: Causes the system alert when login fails 3 times.  S.M.A.R.T. / Stop recording / Login Fail (3 times) tab – Action association 14 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder – Email: Sends an email when system alert occurs. Select a sender and recipient from the drop-down menu below the Set up... button and enter the message. If any sender or recipient is not registered, click the Set up... button.  Sender address book: Enter the email address and SMTP server address and port number. Select a type if the SMTP server uses the type of encrypted connection. Check the Login box if you want to connect to the SMTP server that requires login procedure, and enter the ID and password for login. Clicking the Add button adds the sender to the sender address book.  Recipient address book: Enter the email address. Clicking the Add button adds the recipient to the recipient address book. – Callback: Sends a message to predefined callback servers when system alert occurs. Select a callback server from the drop-down menu below the Set up... button. If any callback server is not registered, click the Set up... button. Enter the IP address of the callback server and click the Add button. – Activate alarm: Sounds beep through the connected speaker when system alert occurs. – Display a message box: Displays a message box in SmartGuard when system alert occurs. 15 User’s Manual Time sync In general, each DVR system may have a different time because of the accuracy of its internal clock. The Time Synchronization function synchronizes the time between a DVR and any time server when they are networked. Any DVR can run as a time server. Also you can use a standard time server provided by each country. CAUTION: The time synchronization might not be done properly depending on the time server or network conditions. Check the time server and network conditions, first.  Run as a server: Runs the DVR as a time server.  As a client: Synchronizes the time between a DVR and a time server when they are networked. – Server: Enter the IP address (or domain name) of target time server. – Check Time Server: Tests the synchronization with the time server. – Automatic: Synchronizes the time automatically at the predefined interval. – Sync now!: Synchronizes the time when you click the button. NOTE: When setting up time synchronization for the first time, set the time between the DVR and the time server manually because the DVR and the time server might have wide time gap. 16 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder OSD You can set up to display OSD information on the image when monitoring video on a main monitor. OSD (On Screen Display) information includes camera title, time, event detection block, etc.  Enable all camera’s OSD: Enables OSD display for all cameras. If you disable it, you can enable or disable OSD display for each camera by clicking each camera button.  Camera OSD: Enables or disables camera OSD display. – Camera Description: Displays a camera name which is set at the Location setting of the CAMERA menu. – State: Displays the recording schedule, event detection, recording status, and PTZ on or off. – Hover Menu: Displays the hover menu. – Time: Displays the recorded time of playback video. – Text In: Displays text-in data from a POS. – Elevator Status: Displays the elevator status from the outside.  Event: Enables or disables event detection area display. – Show motion detection event block: Displays motion detection area when a motion detection event occurs. – Show object detection event block: Displays object detection area when an object detection event occurs. 17 User’s Manual Archive You can back up recorded video to a hard disk drive and eSATA. NOTE: Use a hard disk drive formatted beforehand when you back up data to hard disk drives.  Archive method: Manual and automatic archives are supported. – Archive status: Displays backup status. – Manual Archive: Set the date and time period of recorded video to back up. Clicking the Start button starts backup manually. – Automatic Archive: Starts backup automatically at the predefined time.  Set up Archive storage: Click the Set up... button and set up the storage for archiving. Enabling Overwrite makes the DVR continue recording when the hard disk drive is full by overwriting the oldest video. Disabling Overwrite makes the DVR stop recording when the hard disk drive is full. – Storage List: Displays a list of connected storage devices that is available for archiving.  Drive: Displays a name of the device. NOTE: It supports Physical Drive that is not initialized. Physical Drive is displayed as “Physical[hdd(number)].” It is possible to either assign available storage entirely or not to assign. Physical Drive exists in storage device but the one that is already assigned as an archive is not displayed in recording setup. 18 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder  Total Capacity: Displays the total capacity of the device.  Available Storage: Displays the number of storages that is available for archiving. The storage is the basic unit of 256MB for the database used by the DVR.  New Available Storage: Displays the number of storages to be allocated for archiving.  Assigned Storage Count: Displays the number of storages currently allocated for archiving.  Scope of Archive: Displays the date and time period of recorded video to be archived. – Storage Info: Displays a list of connected storage devices that is available for archiving.  Set up Storage for selected Drive: Set the number of storages to be used for archiving in the selected device.  Storage in use: Displays the total number of storages allocated to all devices in Storage List.  Set up Storage: Displays the total number of storages to be allocated to all devices in Storage List.  Total Storage: Displays the total number of storages allocated and to be allocated to all devices in Storage List.  Create/Resize: Clicking the button creates or adds storage depending on the number of storages to be allocated in the selected device.  Format: Clicking the button deletes archived video saved in the selected device.  Remove: Clicking the button deletes all storage folders allocated in the selected device. Archived video will be deleted when the storage folders are deleted.  Exit: Clicking the button closes the setup screen. NOTE: The user can archive recorded video when the user has an authority for Archive. The Archive option should be selected at the USER menu. NOTE: It supports RAW Volume partition of GPT way. RAW Volume partition is displayed as “Raw[hdd:(number), p:(partition number)]” in the hard disk driver. It is possible to either assign available storage entirely or not to assign. RAW Volume partition exists in storage device but the one that is already assigned as an archive is not displayed in recording setup. 19 User’s Manual System authority  Use local login: Login procedure is required to run SmartGuard program. – Monitoring Without Login: It is allowed to monitor video even while you are logged out. – Use password expiration: Set the password expiration period. If the password has not been changed during the password expiration period, you will be allowed to change the password after you log on. The changed password will be used from the next login. This function is supported only for the users under the authority level of Administrator (the default user ID is admin and password is 12345678 under the authority level of Administrator). – Auto logout: Logs out the DVR automatically when there is no keyboard or mouse operation during the predefined dwell time below.  Remote connection timeout: Clicking each authority level (Manager, User 1 to 3) displays the Remote connection timeout screen and then you can set the DVR's connection time settings from remote locales. – Timeout: It is allowed to connect during remote connection period you set. After time to keep connection, the remote connection is disabled automatically. – Reconnection acceptance interval: Set the waiting period after the auto expiration ends.  Remote service schedule: Set the service schedule. When the specific time or authority level is set, the remote a is allowed during the selected time or in designated authority level. NOTE: Remote connection timeout and remote service schedule function do not apply to the changed settings when the users is logged in as authority level of Administrator. 20 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Setting Up the Camera Non-Hybrid Model  Channel 1 to Channel 32: Indicates the camera number. or buttons are supported for 32-channel model only. − Description: Enter a camera name.  Hide Image: Hides the image of the selected camera on the monitor. The selected camera will not be displayed on the monitor, however, the images from the camera will be recorded while in the record mode.  PTZ Setup: Click the Set up... button if the camera is a PTZ camera. – Device ID: Set the device ID number using the slide bar. – COM port: Select the COM port to use. When using the RS232 port, select COM 1. When using the RS485 port, select the given COM port number. To check the given COM port number, please refer to the installed card information displayed on the About dialog box by clicking the (Menu) button of SmartGuard. – Baud rate, Parity, Data bit, Stop bit: Set the baud rate, parity, data bit and stop bit. 21 User’s Manual  Set Privacy Area: Set up the privacy area on the image. The selected area set as Privacy Area will NOT be displayed either in the live mode or playback mode. The DVR will display the selected areas in black, and also does NOT react to events detected within the area set as Privacy Area. Click the Set up... button and then set the privacy area zone. Enable Enable option. The setup screen is made up of a grid. First, click the Draw or Erase radio button and select a tool to use, and then set up the privacy area on the image. Use the tools as follows: – (Point): Place the cursor on the image and click the left mouse button. A single box appears where the cursor is. – (Line): This tool can be used to draw irregular shapes. Place the cursor where you want to start the line. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor to where you want the end of the line. Release the mouse button and a group of boxes appears along the line you drew. You can draw lines around shapes by repeating this process. – (Rectangle): Hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor in any direction. A rectangle appears. Once the rectangle is the size you want, release the mouse button and the rectangle fills with boxes. – (Fill): When using the fill tool, clicking the mouse will fill that area of the image with boxes. If a shape has been drawn with the line tool, clicking inside will fill the area with boxes. Clicking outside the area will fill the outer area with boxes. If no shapes have been drawn, the entire screen will fill with boxes. 22 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Hybrid Model Channel status It displays camera information such as IP address, video input type, etc. 23 User’s Manual  CH.: Displays a camera number.  Name: Displays a camera name set in the DVR.  IP address: Displays a camera’s IP address (supported for a network camera only).  MAC Address: Displays a camera’s MAC address (supported for a network camera only).  Device Name: Displays a camera name set in the camera (supported for a network camera only).  Video input type: Displays a camera’s video input type. Assign camera It allows you to register network cameras. This is supported for hybrid products only.  CH.: Displays a camera number.  Device Name: Displays a camera name set in the camera.  Model: Displays a camera model name.  IP address: Displays a camera’s IP address.  Max resolution: Displays the maximum resolution of a camera.  (Move): Allows you to change the camera number by selecting a camera from the list and clicking the button.  Remove, Remove All: Cancels the registration of the selected camera by selecting a camera from the list and clicking the Remove button. Clicking the Remove All button cancels the registration of all cameras in the list. NOTE: High resolution connection is limited to Full HD (1920x1080) at most. NOTE: 16-channel model is limited to 8 cameras and 32-channel model is limited to 12 cameras for registration. 24 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder  Scan network camera: Allows you to search for network cameras. – Protocol: Select the protocol or manufacturer of the device to scan. – Scan mode: Select the scan mode. Clicking the Start scan button displays the results in the list. If the IP address range of the camera is different from that of the DVR, the DVR considers the IP address invalid. In this case, you must change the camera’s IP address to register the camera.  Auto Scan (LAN): Lists cameras in a LAN environment. If the camera uses the ONVIFTM Conformance protocol, it is recommended that the camera not be networked via DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). If the camera is networked via DHCP, connection to the camera may not be made properly depending on changes in the external network environment.  IP Address: Searches for a camera with a camera’s IP address. Enter the IP address and port number in the IP address range and Port fields. It is possible to search more than one camera at a time by entering a range of IP addresses. It is recommended that the camera not be networked via DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). If the camera is networked via DHCP, connection to the camera may not be made properly depending on changes in the external network environment.  FEN: Searches for a camera with a FEN name. Enter the camera’s FEN name registered on a FEN server if the camera uses the FEN function. Ensure the FEN server information on which the camera is registered is correct (SYSTEM – Network menu → FEN Server info. settings). If the FEN server information is not correct, the camera will not be found. 25 User’s Manual – Add devices: Select the cameras to register by checking beside each camera name in the list. Click the Add devices button.  Device Name, IP Address: Displays the name and IP address of the selected camera. The name will be updated automatically depending on the settings of the camera.  ID, Password: Enter the user ID and password which you set in the camera in order to connect to that camera remotely. The connection to the camera is allowed only to the users under the Administrator group of the camera. Selecting Apply to all devices applies the same user ID and password to all selected cameras if you selected more than one camera and the selected cameras have the same user ID and password. Channel It allows you to set up cameras.  Channel 1 to Channel 32: Indicates the camera number. or buttons are supported for 32-Channel model only.  Description: Enter a camera name. Selecting Device Name Sync automatically applies the name set in the camera to the DVR (supported only for network cameras which use the iNEX Series protocol).  Network camera remote setup: Clicking the Set up… button allows you to change the device’s settings remotely (supported for network cameras only).  Onvif remote setup: Clicking the Set up... button allows you to change the device's settings remotely(It is supported only when ONVIFTM Conformance protocol camera is registered).  Force local elevator data: Uses the local elevator data instead of the elevator data sent from network cameras. 26

Hybrid Digital Video Recorder  Transmission resolution for network camera: Set up the transmission resolution. Checking the Highest resolution or Lowest resolution transmits a stream corresponding to the minimum or maximum resolution automatically. Checking the number transmits to the assigned stream automatically. This is supported for the network cameras only.  Network camera profile: Set up profiles. Assign streams from the camera to each profile. Selecting Automatic makes the DVR assign streams to each profile automatically depending on the resolution, frame rate, and quality of streams. This is supported for network cameras only. If a network camera uses more than one stream, the DVR automatically chooses the proper stream based on the screen mode to reduce system load. Setting Up the Alert Non-Hybrid Model 27 User’s Manual Hybrid Model 28

Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Alarm Out You can set up the DVR to activate alarm out of the device connected to the DVR’s alarm out port.  1 to 32: Displays alarm out number. See Appendix 4 — Connector Pin Outs for details about the alarm out number. or buttons are supported for 32-Channel model only.  From, To: Set alarm out activation period. Alarm out is activated during the period only. If the From time is later than the To time, the alarm out will be not activated From end time(to time) to start time(to).. If you set To: 08:00 and From: 18:00, this means the alarm will be not activated at the from 8 am to 6 pm and be activated at all other times.  Dwell time: Set the alarm out duration.  Use audible alert: The DVR sounds beep through the connected speaker during alarm output. 29 User’s Manual User Define Alarm Out You can set up the DVR to activate user define alarm out when an event occurs.  1 to 32: Displays alarm out number. or buttons are supported for 32-Channel model only.  Use Remote Port: Set the user define alarm out via remote port.  IP address, Port: Set the IP address and port number of the device connected to the DVR via TCP networking. Click the Test connections button to test the connection to the device.  From, To: Set user define alarm out activation period. Alarm out is activated during the period only. If the From time is later than the To time, the user define alarm out will be not activated From end time(to time) to start time(to).. If you set To: 08:00 and From: 18:00, this means the alarm will be not activated at the from 8 am to 6 pm and be activated at all other times.  Dwell Time: Set the user define alarm out activation duration. 30 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder NetCam Alarm Out You can associate alarm out of a network camera with events if the network camera supports alarm out. This is supported for the hybrid model only.  1 to 32: Displays the camera number. or buttons are supported for 32-Channel model only.  From, To: Set alarm out activation period. Alarm out is activated during the period only. If the From time is later than the To time, the alarm out will be not activated From end time(to time) to start time(to).. If you set To: 08:00 and From: 18:00, this means the alarm will be not activated at the from 8 am to 6 pm and be activated at all other times.  Dwell Time: Set the alarm out activation duration. Alarm out activation lasts during the dwell time when an associated event occurs. 31 User’s Manual Email You can set up email address book.  Sender address book: Enter the email address and SMTP server address and port number. Select a type if the SMTP server uses the type of encrypted connection. Check the Login box if you want to connect to the SMTP server that requires login procedure, and enter the ID and password for login. Clicking the Add button adds the sender to the sender address book.  Recipient address book: Enter the email address. Clicking the Add button adds the recipient to the recipient address book. 32 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Callback You can set up callback address book.  Server address: Enter the IP address of the callback server and click the Add button. 33

User’s Manual Setting Up the Event Non-Hybrid Model 34

Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Hybrid Model  Ignore time to event: Only the first detected event is notified by log, channel association or action association and the same type of other events detected during the dwell time will not be notified.  Channel association: Records video from multiple cameras when an event occurs at the selected camera or other device. 35 User’s Manual  Action association: Displays actions to be done when an event occurs. Clicking the Set up... button allows you to change the settings. Non-Hybrid Model Hybrid Model 36 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder – Email: Sends an email when an event occurs. Select a sender and recipient from the drop-down menu below the Set up... button and enter the message. Enabling Attach the event image file attaches an event detected image file (.JPG) to the email. Clicking the Set up... button loads the email address book set at the ALERT – Email menu. – Callback: Sends a message to predefined callback servers when an event occurs (not supported for network alarm in events). Select a callback server from the drop-down menu below the Set up... button. Clicking the Set up... button loads the callback address book set at the ALERT – Callback menu. – Event monitoring: Displays all the camera channels associated with the channels that an event occurs during the dwell time on the monitoring screen.. – Move to preset: Clicking the Set up... button displays the list of saved Preset and you can select a Preset. The PTZ camera moves to the position of the selected Preset when an event occurs. You can save Preset in the PTZ control panel of SmartGuard. This function is supported for the camera that supports the PTZ function. – Alarm association: Activates selected alarm out when an event occurs. – User define alarm out association: Activates selected user define alarm out when an event occurs. – NetCam alarm association: Activates selected network canera’s alarm out when an event occurs (supported for the hybrid model only). Motion You can set up motion detection event.  1 to 32: Displays camera number. Clicking each button allows you to change motion detection event settings for each camera. or buttons are supported for 32-Channel model only.  Enable: Enables motion detection event function. When the DVR detects a motion in a configured motion detection zone, it considers the motion as an event. 37 User’s Manual  Set up motion detection – Set up zone...: Set up the motion detection zone. This is not supported for network cameras and the DVR uses the settings of a network camera. The setup screen is made up of a grid. First, click the Draw or Erase radio button and select a tool to use, and then set up the motion detection area on the image. Using the tools is identical to that of Set Privacy Area at the CAMERA menu.  Sensitivity: Set the motion detection sensitivity. The higher the number is, the more sensitive it is.  Min. size: Adjust the minimum number of detection blocks that must be activated in order to be considered as a motion detection event. If you set to 10, the DVR will only react to the motion when it detects motion (activity) in at least 10 connected blocks within the selected detection zone. The minimum number of blocks (Min. size) should not exceed the selected block numbers for detection. When selecting multiple detection area groups, the minimum number of blocks (Min. size) should not exceed the block numbers of the smallest detection area.  Max. size: Set the maximum number of blocks (no less than the Min. size block). If you set the Max. size value to 100, the DVR will ignore the motion which is detected in more than 100 blocks. Object You can set up object detection event.  1 to 32: Displays camera number. Clicking each button allows you to change object detection event settings for each camera. or buttons are supported for 32-Channel model only.  Enable: Enables object detection event function. When the DVR detects the changes on the image compared to the reference image in a configured object detection zone, it considers the changes as an event. 38 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder  Set up object detection – Set up zone...: Set up the object detection zone. This is not supported for network cameras and the DVR uses the settings of a network camera. The setup screen is made up of a grid. First, click the Draw or Erase radio button and select a tool to use, and then set up the object detection area on the image. Using the tools is identical to that of Set Privacy Area at the CAMERA menu.  Sensitivity: Set the object detection sensitivity. The higher the number is, the more sensitive it is.  Min. size: Adjust the minimum number of detection blocks that must be activated in order to be considered as a object detection event. If you set to 10, the DVR will only react to the changes when it detects changes (activity) in at least 10 connected blocks within the selected detection zone. The minimum number of blocks (Min. size) should not exceed the selected block numbers for detection. When selecting multiple detection area groups, the minimum number of blocks (Min. size) should not exceed the block numbers of the smallest detection area.  Max. size: Set the maximum number of blocks (no less than the Min. size block). If you set the Max. size value to 100, the DVR will ignore the changes which are detected in more than 100 blocks.  Activation times: Set the dwell time to detect changes. The DVR will detect the change only when the change lasts over the preset dwell time.  Reference Image: Shows the reference image.  Current Image, Get Reference: Shows the current image. Clicking Get Reference button sets the current image as a reference image. Video Loss You can set up video loss event. This is not supported for network cameras and the DVR uses the settings of a network camera.  1 to 32: Displays camera number. Clicking each button allows you to change video loss event settings for each camera . or buttons are supported for 32-Channel model only.  Set up video loss detection – Detect Obscuration: The DVR checks the obscuration of the lens and considers the obscuration on the images as a video loss event (for example, the lens is sprayed, lens is blocked, etc). Set the obscuration level by holding down and dragging the pointer. The higher the percentage, the more sensitive it is. 39 User’s Manual – Detect Flare: The DVR checks the brightness of the lens and considers the flare on the images as a video loss event (for example, light is flashed at the lens). Set the flare level by holding down and dragging the pointer. The higher the percentage, the more sensitive it is. Alarm In You can set up alarm in event.  1 to 32: Displays alarm in device number. Clicking each button allows you to change alarm in event settings for each camera. or buttons are supported for 32-Channel model only.  Enable: Enables alarm in event function. When the DVR detects alarm in from the device connected to the DVR’s alarm in port, it considers it as an event.  Set up alarm in – Description: Enter an alarm in device name.  Alarm in type: Enter a signal type of the alarm in device. If the signal type of the alarm in device is NC (Normally Closed), select Normally open. If the signal type is NO (Normally Open), select Normally closed. User Define Alarm In You can set up user define alarm in event.  1 to 32: Displays network alarm in device number. Clicking each button allows you to change network alarm in event settings for each camera. or buttons are supported for 32-Channel model only.  Enable: Enables user define alarm in event function. When the DVR detects user define alarm in from external, it considers it as an event.  Set up user define alarm in – Description: Enter a user define alarm in device name.  Use Remote Port: Detects the user define alarm in via remote port.  Port: Enter the port number of the device connected to the DVR via TCP networking. 40 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Text In You can set up text in event.  1: Displays text-in device number. Up to 16 text-in channels are available when connecting the WIBU key (USB 2.0 port). Ask your dealer or distributor about purchasing the WIBU key and details about it. Clicking each button allows you to change text in event settings for each camera.  Enable: Enables text-in event function. When the DVR detects text-in data from a text in device, it considers it as an event.  For Each Text-in Controller: Click the Select Text-In System button and select the text-in product from the list.  Syntax – Case Sensitive: Text strings are case sensitive. Refer to the text-in product manufacturer’s user manual to determine if the text strings are case sensitive. If the text-in product distinguishes between upper and lower case letters, make certain this is enabled. – Transaction Start: Enter the transaction start text string. The DVR considers that a transaction starts when the start text string is entered. If Any character is enabled, you will not be able to enter a text string, and the DVR considers that a transaction starts when any text string is entered. – Transaction End: Enter the transaction end text string. The DVR considers that a transaction ends when the end text string is entered. Enter the number of additional text lines to be displayed after the end of the transaction in the More Lines option. – Line Delimiter: Enter the character(s) that the text-in product uses to indicate the end of a line. Special characters can be created using ^ and a capital letter;e.g., ^J for NL (New Line), ^M for CR (Carriage Return). Refer to the text-in product manufacturer’s user manual for Line Delimiter character(s). – Ignore String: Enter any text strings to be ignored. Refer to the text-in product manufacturer’s user manual for text strings that the text-in product sends during normal transactions so that those text strings will not be considered as text-in.  Dwell Time – Display Dwell: Set the dwell time to display the text-in information. – Transaction Timeout: Set the length of time to wait for a new text string. The DVR will consider a transaction complete if no new text is entered during the time-out period after the last text input even though the transaction end text string is not entered. 41 User’s Manual Audio Detection You can use the audio detection event of the network camera in the DVR if the network camera supports the audio detection event. This is supported for hybrid products only.  1 to 32: Displays the camera number. Clicking each button allows you to set up the audio detection event in the DVR for each network camera. or buttons are supported for 32-Channel model only.  Enable: Enables the audio detection event function. When the network camera detects an audio detection event, the DVR also considers it as an event. NetCam Alarm In You can use the alarm in event of the network camera in the DVR if the network camera supports the alarm in event. This is supported for hybrid products only.  1 to 32: Displays the camera number. Clicking each button allows you to set up the alarm in event in the DVR for each network camera. or buttons are supported for 32-Channel model only.  Enable: Enables the netcam alarm in event function. When the network camera detects an netcam alarm in event, the DVR also considers it as an event. Tampering You can use the tampering event of the network camera in the DVR if the network camera supports the tampering event. This is supported for hybrid products only.  1 to 32: Displays the camera number. Clicking each button allows you to set up the tampering event in the DVR for each network camera.  Enable: Enables the tampering event function. When the network camera detects a tampering event, the DVR also considers it as an event. Tripzone You can use the tripzone event of the network camera in the DVR if the network camera supports the tripzone event. This is supported for hybrid products only. 42 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder  1 to 32: Displays the camera number. Clicking each button allows you to set up the tripzone event in the DVR for each network camera. or buttons are supported for 32-Channel model only.  Enable: Enables the tripzone event function. When the network camera detects a tripzone event, the DVR also considers it as an event. Setting Up the Schedule If a BNC camera is selected, clicking Apply all applies the settings to all BNC cameras identically. If a network camera is selected, clicking Apply all applies the settings to all network cameras identically. 43

User’s Manual Recording Setup You can set up recording for each camera. BNC Cameras 44

Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Network Cameras  Record audio: Records audio while the DVR records video. The DVR provides two types of audio input, M icrophone and Line-in. Microphone is for an unamplified source while Line-in is for an amplified source.  Time-lapse recording: Records video in time-lapse recording mode. In time-lapse recording mode, DVR records continuously based on this setting for the scheduled time. – IPS: Sets recording speed (not supported for network cameras). When the recording speed is set to lower than 2 ips, recorded audio will NOT be played. Recording speed is the number of images recorded during one second. The higher the recording speed is, the more images are recorded. For example, 30 means 30 images will be recorded during one second, and 5 means 5 images will be recorded during one second. – Quality: Sets the record image quality (not supported for network cameras). Higher quality images require more storage space and will reduce the recording capacity of the hard disk drive. – Resolution: Sets the record image size (not supported for network cameras). Higher resolution images require more storage space and will reduce the recording capacity of the hard disk drive. – Profile: Select one of the preset profiles (supported for network cameras only). Higher resolution, frame rate, and quality of the stream assigned to the profile require more storage space and will reduce the recording capacity of the hard disk drive.  Pre-event recording: Records video prior to event detection when predefined events are detected. – Enable: Enables pre-event recording. – IPS: See the explanation of Time lapse recording (not supported for network cameras). – Dwell time: Sets the duration of recording. The DVR records video for the duration prior to event detection. – Quality: See the explanation of Time lapse recording (not supported for network cameras). – Resolution: See the explanation of Time lapse recording (not supported for network cameras). – Profile: Select one of the preset profiles (supported for network cameras only). Higher resolution, frame rate, and quality of the stream assigned to the profile require more storage space and will reduce the recording capacity of the hard disk drive. 45 User’s Manual  After hour: Sets the after hour recording schedule. The DVR records video with different settings during the hours. – Enable: Enables after hour recording. – IPS: See the explanation of Time lapse recording (not supported for network cameras). – Quality: See the explanation of Time lapse recording (not supported for network cameras). – Resolution: See the explanation of Time lapse recording (not supported for network cameras). – Profile: Select one of the preset profiles (supported for network cameras only). Higher resolution, frame rate, and quality of the stream assigned to the profile require more storage space and will reduce the recording capacity of the hard disk drive.  Event recording: Records video when predefined events are detected. – Event type: Displays the list of event types. The DVR detects events according to the each event setting at EVENT menu. – IPS: See the explanation of Time lapse recording (not supported for network cameras). – Resolution: See the explanation of Time lapse recording (not supported for network cameras). – Quality: See the explanation of Time lapse recording (not supported for network cameras). – Dwell time: Sets the duration of recording. The DVR records video for the duration from the time an event is detected. – Profile: Select one of the preset profiles (supported for network cameras only). Higher resolution, frame rate, and quality of the stream assigned to the profile require more storage space and will reduce the recording capacity of the hard disk drive. NOTE: Make certain you comply with all local and federal laws and regulations when recording audio. NOTE: Ma The recording speed of the network camera might decrease depending on the network condition. Schedule Setup You can set up recording schedule for each camera.  View only (), Time-lapse (R): Enables or disables recording by clicking the button. When the recording is enabled, the recording mode is displayed in the timetable below. 46

Hybrid Digital Video Recorder  Event recording: Enable or disable event recording. When the event recording is enabled, the event type is displayed in the timetable below (m: motion detection, o: object detection, v: video loss, a: alarm in, u: user define alarm in, n: network alarm in or NetCam alarm in, t: text in, d: audio detection, p: tampering, z: tripzone, E: all events). – (Motion Detection): Enables motion detection event recording. – (Object Detection): Enables object detection event recording. – (Video Loss): Enables video loss event recording. – (Alarm In): Enables alarm in event recording. – (User Define Alarm In); Enables user define alarm in event recording. – (Text In): Enables text in event recording. – (Audio Detection): Enables audio detection event recording. – ( NetCam Alarm In): EnablesNetCam alarm in event recording. – (Tampering): Enables tampering event recording. – (Tripzone): Enables tripzone event recording. – (All Events): Enables all events recording.  Work hour, After hour: Enable or disable after hour recording by clicking the button. When the after hour recording is enabled, the DVR records video according to the after hour recording setting.  Set up holiday: Set up holidays. The DVR records video according to the after hour recording setting. Setting Up the SPOT NOTE: This is not supported for network cameras. 47

User’s Manual Multi Channel You can set up the multi-channel SPOT display. The DVR displays video sequentially or displays monitoring video of SmartGuard.  Set up HD multi spot: Set the display on the monitor connected to the HD SPOT (Multi-Channel Display) port of the DVR rear panel.  Set up SD multi spot: Set the display on the monitor connected to the SD SPOT (Multi-Channel Display) port of the DVR rear panel. – Use spot OSD: Displays OSD. – Use S/W underscan: Reduces the image size to fit images within the monitor screen size when the image size is bigger than the monitor screen size and some parts of the image is cropped. – Monitoring Without Login: Displays video even while you are logged out. – Assign channel: Monitors the video by arranging cameras manually at the desired location of the monitoring screen. Click the camera button and drag the desired location on the screen. You can change screen mode system. The monitoring video of the selected screen is displayed in the single screen mode. In case of 9832 model, each channel within the 1- to 16- channel and the 17- to 32 channel can be selected in the camera. 48 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Sequence You can set up the sequence SPOT display. The DVR displays video sequentially.  1 ~8: Displays the number of monitors connected to the SD SPOT (Sequence Display) port of the DVR rear panel . Clicking each button allows you to change the settings of sequence display on the monitors.  Spot Sequence: Set the sequence order on each monitor.  Spot operation – Hold spot during single-screen mode: Video is not sequenced while the screen mode of SmartGuard is set to the single-screen mode. – Include event display: Displays event detected image in the single-screen mode when an event occurs. – Show video loss: Displays video of the camera that video loss event is detected. – Monitoring Without Login: Displays video even while you are logged out. – Spot sequence dwell: Set the sequence dwell. 49 User’s Manual Setting Up the User  Add user, Edit user: Allows you to add or edit user information. Only the administrator level user can edit the user’s information and their authority setup. – User ID, Password, Confirm password: Set the user ID and password. – Authority level: Select the authority level. Only the administrator level user can edit the user’s information and their authority setup. The authority setup of the Administrator cannot be edited.  Delete user: Deletes the selected user from the user list. Only the administrator level user can delete the user.  Authority: Set the authority of the selected user.  Apply all users in same level: Clicking the button applies the current authority settings to all users in the same authority level. 50 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Chapter 3 — SmartSearch OVERVIEW SmartSearch is a powerful tool for SmartGuard. It features playback and search functions for recorded data and consists of Playback Screen, Timetable, Status Window and Utility Buttons. Each area displays or controls recorded information. Click the (Menu) button and SmartSearch menu of SmartGuard to get into the SmartSearch mode. To return to the SmartGuard mode, click the (Menu) button and SmartGuard menu of SmartSearch. FEATURES  Searches by camera and time  Provides recording status table  Various search functions  Zoom in/out function  Print function  Remote playback function  Bookmark function  Saves to video file  Audio playback NOTE: The play speed is controlled by the system resource. The play speed can be slowed down for the efficient use of the system. 51 User’s Manual MAIN GUI 16-Channel Model 32-Channel Model ① Playback Screen ② Menu Button ③ System Status ④ Playback Panel ⑤ Panorama Playback Panel ⑥ Event Search Panel ⑦ Utility Buttons ⑧ Screen Mode Buttons ⑨ Data Source ⑩ Jog Shuttle ⑪ Playback Buttons ⑫ Camera Buttons ⑬ Calendar Panel ⑭ Bookmark Panel ⑮ Search Buttons Timetable 52 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder  Playback Screen: Displays the current playback image. Selecting a camera screen displays the button beside the camera title. Clicking the button displays the camera screen menu. – (Zoom): Zooms in the image. – (Audio Playback): Plays back audio. – (Aspect Ratio): Changes the image aspect ratio.  Menu Button: Displays the SmartSearch menu. – Login/Logout: Logs in or logs out the system. When Use local login is disabled in the SmartGuard program (SYSTEM – System Authority menu), the DVR does not ask login procedure. When you forgot the password, ask your dealer or distributor. – SmartGuard: Runs the SmartGuard program. This function will be disabled during dual display. – About: Displays the information of the days of recorded dates, software version, etc. – Help: Displays the electronic file of user’s manual. – Exit: Finishes the system.  System Status: Displays user ID and the recorded time of playback video.  Playback Panel: Displays the current playback image.  Panorama Playback Panel: Displays the panorama playback image. It displays images from one camera image by image in multi-screen mode.  Event Search Panel: Allows you to set up search condition for event search.  Utility Buttons – (Save Image): Saves the images currently displayed on the screen as an image file. The image can be saved only under the C:\IDR-Series\temp directory or on the USB storage. – (Print Image): Prints the images currently displayed on the screen. – (External Saving): Saves the recorded data on the CD or DVD using the CD/DVD burning program. Refer to the Saving of Recorded Video section (p. 57) for details. – (SmartGuard): Runs the SmartGuard program. This function will be disabled during dual display.  Data Source: Selects the data source to be searched. – Local: Searches video saved in the current DVR. – Remote: Searches video saved in the other DVR. – Archive: Searches video saved in the archive storage set up in the SmartGuard program (SYSTEM – Archive menu).  Jog Shuttle: You can adjust the playback direction and speed by using the jog shuttle. The icon in the jog shuttle indicates the current playback direction and speed. Video is played backward when the icon is to the left of center and video is played back forward when the icon is to the right of center. The farther the position is from the center, the faster video is played back. Clicking the icon and dragging it to the desired position on the jog shuttle and holding it plays video at a constant speed. Releasing the mouse button causes the icon to return to the center position. Clicking the (Play) button plays video at normal speed. Clicking the (Shuttle Lock) button and dragging and dropping the icon to a desired position fixes the icon in that position.  Playback Buttons: Controls playback of recorded video. Go to First Image Rewind One Image Play Forward One Image Go to Last Image  Screen Mode Buttons: Click the desired screen mode. Select a camera button and select a desired screen mode for multi-screen playback. Then click any playback-related button.  Camera Buttons: It indicates a camera number.  Calendar Panel: Goes to the specific dates and times by using the calendar. Select recorded data from the calendar. The calendar provides access to single day recorded data. Click the date you want to search. Scroll through the months by clicking and .  Bookmark Panel: You can review the specific image fast and easily by adding bookmarks for recorded images. Click the button to bookmark the currently displayed image. If you want to delete the bookmark, select the target information and then click the button. A bookmark lists the camera number, date and time, and bookmark description. The bookmark description will be shown automatically when the mouse cursor is not moving on a bookmark data for a while. 53 User’s Manual  Search Buttons – (Go To): Displays a time setup window. Entering a specific time moves to the image for that time. – (Export Video File): Saves recorded video as a clip file (.exe). Refer to the Saving of Recorded Video section (p. 57) for details. – (Partial Delete): Deletes recorded data for a specific period. – (Reload): Reloads data.  Timetable: The timetable window consists of a record timetable, camera label. Various functions of the timetable window enable fast searches. SEARCH AND PLAYBACK OF RECORDED VIDEO Condition Search Select the Event Search tab. The following setup screen appears. Designate the find range and set up the search condition in the Motion Detection, Event, Text-In, Alarm-In tab or User Define Alarm In.  Motion Detection / Event / Text-In / Alarm-In / User Define Alarm In: Set up the search condition. Refer to the Motion Detection, Event, Text-In, Alarm-In and User Define Alarm In sections for details.  Search Range: Set the time range for the search of motions for the Motion Detection search or event logs for the Event, Text-In, Alarm-In or User Define Alarm In search. – From, To: Searches motions or event logs between user-defined periods. Set the desired find beginning and ending date/time in the From and Until boxes. – From the first day of month: Searches motions or event logs from the first day of this month. – From the first day of week: Searches motions or event logs from the first day of this week. – From one day ago: Searches motions or event logs from one day ago. – One day: Searches motions or event logs for one day.  (Find): Searches all event results within established find conditions and then display them in the result list box below.  Result: Displays the search result. – Save Image: Saves the current image of the result as an image file such as bitmap. – Video Screen: Displays the searched video at the top left in the Event Search panel. The image of the result can be displayed by clicking the target event in the Result list. You can play back searched video on the Play panel. – Result List: Displays the search result list below the Search Range. – Clear All: Removes all results in the result list. – Clear all before apply find all: Removes the previously searched results when clicking the (Find) button. 54 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Motion Detection Select the Motion Detection tab and then a camera number in the Channel buttons below. Clicking the (Find) button after setting up the search condition displays the list of recorded video of the selected camera.  Channel: Select a camera number.  Motion Detection Zone: Set up the detection zone using the area setup icons. First, click the Draw or Erase radio button and select one of four tools to use, and then set up the detection area on the video screen. Use the tools as follows: – (Point): Place the cursor on the image and click the left mouse button. A single box appears where the cursor is. – (Line): This tool can be used to draw irregular shapes. Place the cursor where you want to start the line. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor to where you want the end of the line. Release the mouse button and a group of boxes appears along the line you drew. You can draw lines around shapes by repeating this process. – (Rectangle): Hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor in any direction. A rectangle appears. Once the rectangle is the size you want, release the mouse button and the rectangle fills with boxes. – (Fill): When using the fill tool, clicking the mouse will fill that area of the image with boxes. If a shape has been drawn with the line tool, clicking inside will fill the area with boxes. Clicking outside the area will fill the outer area with boxes. If no shapes have been drawn, the entire screen will fill with boxes.  Find Method: Select either Change or Object. – Change: Detects changes at the user-defined motion detection zone between two consecutive images which are usually motion. For example, if you want to detect if anyone passes through a door, you can draw a Change detection around the door. The system will search through recorded data for any motion in the doorway. – Object: Detects changes at the user-defined motion detection zone as compared with the image displayed currently on the Video Screen when an object is removed or moved in an area where there is normally motion. For example, you can draw a box around a painting hanging in a hallway. People walking by the painting will not be listed as an event. However, if the painting is removed, this will be listed as an event.  Sensitivity: Set the sensitivity of the motion detection by holding down and dragging the pointer.  Min. Blocks: Set the minimum number of blocks. NOTE: The number of minimum blocks should be set less than the number of blocks within the motion detection zone. If the user draws a rectangle with 25 blocks and sets the minimum blocks to 30, nothing will be detected even though there is motion. 55 User’s Manual Event Select the Event tab and then a camera number in the Channel buttons below. Clicking the (Find) button after setting up the search condition displays the list of event recorded video of the selected camera. Netcam alarm in, audio detection, tampering and tripzone is supported for hybrid products only.  Channel: Select a camera number.  Target Event: Select a desired event type. Text-In Select the Text-In tab and then a device number in the Channel buttons below. Clicking the (Find) button after setting up the search condition displays the list of recorded video which are associated with the selected text-in device.  Channel: Select a text-in device number.  Case Sensitive: Distinguishes between capital letter and small letters entered in the Name box.  Name: Enter the text to find.  Comp: Enter the comparison operator.  Value: Enter the comparison value. NOTE: The tab and line can be used for more specific search of the text-in data. Use a symbol ‘^’ indicating the location of each individual category, and ‘]’ indicating the line where the category is located. Refer to Appendix 3 — Text-In Query for details.  Tab size: Enter the tab size. Up to eight tabs can be set.  Save Config: Saves the current text-in related settings.  Load Config: Loads the saved text-in related settings. 56 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Alarm-In Select the Alarm-In tab and then a device number in the Channel buttons below. Clicking the (Find) button after setting up the search condition displays the list of recorded video which are associated with the selected alarm-in device.  Channel: Select an alarm-in device number. User Define Alarm In Select the User Define Alarm In tab and then a device number in the Channel buttons below. Clicking the (Find) button after setting up the search condition displays the list of recorded video which are associated with the selected user define alarm in device.  Channel: Select a user define alarm in device number. Time-Lapse Search The timetable, (Go To) button, calendar and bookmark allows you to search for recorded video on the time basis. Timetable Search The timetable displays the recording information for each camera. Clicking the (Reload) in the right of the timetable button reloads data. 57 User’s Manual ① Current Playback Date/Time: Indicates the video time for the current playback location on the timetable. ② Recorded Period: Displays the date and time period of the recorded data. Clicking anywhere in the empty space and dragging it to the left or right moves to the earlier or later date or time. Every clicking the right mouse button on the timetable zooms the record timetable in with three levels; one time in the first level, four times in the second level, and eight times in the third level. ③ Camera Title: Displays the camera title. ④ Recorded Data: Displays the recorded data by time in one minute segments.  Red vertical line: Indicates the current playback location of video on the timetable. Clicking the mouse on the desired time displays the first image recorded within the time.  Yellow separation line: Separates segments when time overlap occurs. In this case, the recorded data in the time range located after the separation line is the latest. 58 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder  The color of the bar: Indicates different recording modes (sky blue (R,G,B: 41,144,229) for time-lapse, violet (R,G,B: 203,41,229) for Pre-event, black (R,G,B: 0,0,0) for audio detection, red (R,G,B: 255,0,0) for alarm-in, dark violet (R,G,B: 129,0,229) for motion, limegreen (R,G,B: 49,183,42) for object detection, lime (R,G,B: 0,255,0) for video analytics, dark gray (R,G,B: 50,67,89) for text-in, blue (R,G,B: 0,0,255) for network alarm in or NetCam alarm in, maroon (R,G,B: 171,24,0) for video loss on, brown (R,G,B: 146,79,21) for video loss off, dim gray (R,G,B: 105,99,93) for video blind, crimson (R,G,B: 218,26,75) for panic recording, orange red (R,G,B: 255,96,0) for tampering, light gray (R,G,B: 209,209,209) for trip zone, and forest green (R,G,B: 19,91,0) for audio detect). Go To Search Clicking the (Go To) button displays the following screen. Enter the date and time of video to search for and click the OK button. The video of the date and time will be displayed on the playback screen. Calendar Search Clicking a date in the Calendar panel displays video of the date on the playback screen. Clicking the or button moves to the previous or next month. The date with recorded video will be displayed in black color, and the date currently displayed on the timetable will be displayed in orange color. Bookmark Search Bookmarking a specific time in the Bookmark panel makes it easier to search for video of the specific time in the future. Clicking the button allows you to bookmark the current playback time and clicking the button deletes the bookmark. Clicking a bookmark and hovering the mouse cursor over the bookmark displays the bookmark information (camera number, time, etc.). Clicking the or button moves to the previous or next list. 59 User’s Manual SAVING OF RECORDED VIDEO NOTE: The user can save recorded video when the user has an authority with External Save. The External Save option should be selected during the SmartGuard – USER menu. Refer to Chapter 2 — SmartGuard, Setting Up the User for details. Clicking the (Export Video File) button in the right of the timetable displays the following menu.  A-B Export Clip File: Sets up the section of video to be exported by using the timetable. Select A-B Export Video File from the export menu. Click the starting point in the timetable and drag to the ending point. The Export Video File window appears and allows you to export video of the selected period as a clip file (.exe). The user can save recorded video when the user has an authority for External Save. The External Save option should be selected at the USER menu.  Export Clip File: Saves recorded video as a clip file (.exe). The user can save recorded video when the user has an authority for External Save. The External Save option should be selected at the USER menu. NOTE: The video file can be saved only under the “C:\IDR-Series\temp” directory or on the removable disk including CD-RW, DVD RW and USB storage. NOTE: If you save video in C:, it must have 5GB or more free space excluding the video file size. For example, it must have 8GB or more free space when you save a 3GB video file. NOTE: When the total file size reaches 4GB, you will be asked to continue saving by creating multiple files in 4GB units. If you click the OK button, the system will continue saving by creating multiple files in 4GB units. Save As Clip File  Camera: Select the camera number to save. Audio will be saved together.  Text-In: Saves text-in data with video.  Save Password, Password: Asks the password when you try to play back the saved video. Set up the password.  Write to CD/DVD: Saves the video on the CD or DVD directly.  Save Range: Set the period of video to save.  Save path: Designate the folder path to save the video.  Calc Size: Calculates and preview the size of file to save. 60 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Clicking the Start button starts saving. NOTE: Refer to the Clip Player section (p. 58) for playing back the saved video. Clip Player You do not need to install any special software on your personal computer to play back saved video. The file contains a Player program. Double-clicking the target file starts the Player program. NOTE: It is suggested that the computer used for the Player program has at least an 800MHz Pentium III (Intel Pentium Dual Core 2.2GHz recommended). If your CPU is slower than this, saved video recorded at maximum speed with very high image quality will be played back slowly. NOTE: You will be asked to enter the password to initiate the Clip Player program if you select Save Password option when saving recorded video. NOTE: Proper image display depends on the display settings of your PC. If you are experiencing display problems, click the right mouse button on the background screen and select Properties → Settings then set the Color quality to “32 bit”. Then select Advanced → Troubleshoot, and then set the Hardware Acceleration to “Full”. Please make sure that DirectX version 9.0 or higher has been installed if the display problem continues. To check the version of DirectX, click Start → RUN and type “dxdiag” then hit the enter key which will display DirectX Diagnostic Tool dialog box. Then move to the Display tab and make sure DirectDraw Acceleration is set to “Enabled”. Test DirectDraw by selecting the DirectDraw Test button. Please check the driver version of the video card and update it to the latest version available. If you still have display problems after changing all display settings as described above, try replacing the video card. Video cards with an ATI chipset are recommended. Clicking exits the Player program.  Playback Buttons: Plays back the current video on the screen. Goes to the beginning of the video clip. Plays the video clip in fast reverse. Goes back one frame of the video clip. Plays the video clip. Goes forward one frame of the video clip. Plays the video clip in fast forward. Goes to the end of the video clip.  : Shows the previous camera group if there is recorded video in the previous camera group in the current screen mode.  : Cycles through the screen modes. It cycles through 2x2, 1+7, 3x3, 4x4, 4x5, 5x5 and 1+32. NOTE: 4x5, 5x5 and 1+32 screen modes might not be supported depending on the number of saved camera channels.  : Shows the next camera group if there is recorded video in the next camera group in the current screen mode. 61 User’s Manual  : Sets up the Clip Player properties. − Print: Prints the current image. − Frame Info: Displays Channel, Title, Time, Type, Size and Resolution information about the image. − Image Processing: Controls brightness, blur and sharpness of playback images. (Single Screen Mode and Pause Mode Only) − Play Speed Control: Changes the playback speed (Play) or fast forward/backward playback speed (FF/RW). − Drawing Mode: Selects the draw mode level. If you are not sure about the best draw mode level for your system, try each level until the image displays properly. − Screen Size: Changes the Clip Player screen size. − Aspect Ratio: Changes the image aspect ratio displayed on each camera screen. − OSD Setup…: Selects options to display on the screen. − Enable Audio: Plays audio while playing back recorded video that has recorded audio. (Single Screen Mode Only) − Anti-Aliasing Screen: Enhances image display quality on the screen by smoothing stair stepping (aliasing) effects in the enlarged image. If video plays slow because of your CPU’s slow speed, releasing the Anti-Aliasing Screen option might improve playback speed. − Show Text-In: Displays video with text-in data if the video was recorded with text-in data. (Single Screen Mode Only)  : Saves images. − Save as Image: Saves the current image as a bitmap or JPEG file. − Save as Image (Actual Size): Saves the current video frame as a bitmap or JPEG file in its actual size. (Single Screen Mode Only) − Save as Clip-Copy: Saves video of desired time range as an executable file. − Save as Video: Saves video of desired time range as an AVI file. − Clip-Copy Log: Saves the clip copy log information as a text file. The user information about Save As Clip Copy will be logged as “Internal-Copy.”  : Select from Normal and Double screen views (Single Screen Mode Only). You can move the enlarged image by clicking the left mouse button and dragging.  : Displays the image full screen. Encryption icons display in the bottom-right corner. displays when the clip file has not been tampered with, and displays and playback stops when the system has detected tampering. NOTE: If the VGA card or monitor does not support 800x600 video resolution, Full Screen might not display properly. If this happens, press the ESC key on your PC keyboard to return to the normal screen mode. Click the slider bar and move it left or right to move through the video clip. Placing the mouse cursor on an image and clicking will cause that image to display full frame. 62 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder AUDIO PLAYBACK Checking Audio Recording Configuration 1. Click the SCHEDULE menu on the main GUI of SmartGuard. 2. Click Recording Setup tab. 3. Check that Record Audio is enabled for each camera. Playing Recorded Audio 1. Selecting a camera screen in the playback screen displays the button beside the camera title. 2. Clicking the button displays the camera screen menu. 3. Click the (Audio Playback) button. NOTE: Audio of one camera at a time is played back. NOTE: Audio will NOT be played when the target camera was recorded less than 2 ips of recording speed. 63 User’s Manual External Saving Click the (External Saving) button at the top right of the SmartSearch.  Eject, Close: Ejects the disk from the drive or closes the drive door.  Add File, Add Folder: Adds a file or folder to burn on the CD/DVD.  Option: Sets options. − Session Close: Completes the burning on the CD/DVD. − Rewrite: Deletes previously saved files and burns newly added files only. Enabling Quick Erase deletes previously saved files more quickly. − Eject When Finished: Ejects the CD/DVD automatically after completing burning or erasing.  Erase Disc: Deletes all data on the CD/DVD.  Burn: Starts burning the selected files and folders on the CD/DVD. NOTE: The burning might not be successful if the remaining space of the disk is not enough when saving the new data subsequently after adding files and folders. NOTE: Starting CD/DVD burning during recording might interrupt the recording. NOTE: Add File and Add Folder functions are not supported for the DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) media. 64 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Appendix 1 — Network Setup (LAN) Run the SmartGuard program and click the (Menu) button → Setup menu → SYSTEM – Network menu on the main GUI. Setting Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties  Select Obtain an IP address automatically or Use the following IP address depending on your network environment. – When selecting Obtain an IP address automatically, the DNS server address is set up automatically. – When selecting Use the following IP address, enter the IP address, Subnet mask, Default gateway and DNS server address acquired from your network administrator. 65 User’s Manual Setting FEN Function When FEN function is enabled, it is not necessary to set up port forwarding manually. However, remote connection to the DVR might not be available depending on the network connection environment of the DVR or remote system when the FEN function is enabled. If it is the case, you should set up port forwarding for the DVR manually in the NAT (Network Address Translation) device to which the DVR is connected.  Enter the FEN server information.  Server, Port: Enter the IP address (or domain name) and port number of the FEN server.  Enable Use FEN function in the Network Service setting and click the Set up… button.  Name: Enter the DVR’s name to be registered on the FEN server. Click the Name Check button to check if the name you entered can be used. Clicking the OK button registers the name as a FEN name of the DVR. NOTE: The FEN function allows you to connect to the DVR from remote sites using either the dynamic IP addresses or the domain name. For the FEN function to work properly, the DVR’s FEN name should be registered on the FEN server, and the FEN server settings should match the settings registered on the FEN server. Any changes on the FEN server might cause improper operation. NOTE: The FEN registration is limited to only one FEN server. The DVR cannot be registered to multiple FEN servers. 66 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Appendix 2 — WebGuard WebGuard allows you to access a remote DVR, monitor live video images and search recorded video using Internet Explorer web browser anytime from virtually anywhere. Computer system requirements for using the WebGuard program are:  Operating System: Microsoft® Windows® XP (Service Pack 3), Microsoft® Windows® Vista (Service Pack 1), Microsoft® Windows® 7 (Home Premium, Professional, Ultimate) or Microsoft® Windows® 8 (Pro, Enterprise)  CPU: Intel Pentium III (Celeron) 600MHz or faster  RAM: 128MB or higher  VGA: 8MB or higher (1024x768, 24bpp or higher)  Internet Explorer: Version 6.0 or later 32-bit Start Internet Explorer on your local PC. You can run the WebGuard program by entering the following information in the address field. – “ IP address” (The DVR IP address) – Or, “ DVRNS server address/DVR name” (The DVRNS server address and the DVR name registered on the DVRNS server) – Or, “ dvronline.net” (Entering the DVR IP address or the DVR name will be required when logging in) NOTE: You will need to get the appropriate IP address for the DVR you want to connect from your network administrator. NOTE: WebGuard only works with Microsoft Internet Explorer and will NOT work with Netscape or other web browsers. NOTE: WebGuard does not work with Microsoft® Windows® 8 metro UI. Select between the WEBWATCH (Web monitoring) and WEBSEARCH (Web search) modes. Enter ID and PASSWORD and click the [LOGIN] button. You will need to enter the DVR IP address in the DVR ADDRESS field when running the WebGuard program by entering dvronline.net. Selecting the Use DVRNS option allows you to enter the DVR name registered on the DVRNS server instead of the IP address. It is required to enter the DVRNS server address and port number during the SETUP setting when selecting the Use DVRNS option. NOTE: When running the updated WebGuard for the first time, Internet Explorer might occasionally load the information from the previous version. In this case, delete the temporary Internet files by selecting Tools → Internet Options → General tab, and then run WebGuard again. NOTE: Do NOT close the LOGIN window during the WebGuard operation, otherwise, it will cause a script error when switching between Web monitoring and Web search modes, and you will need to restart the WebGuard program. NOTE: There might be a problem with the bottom of WebGuard page being cropped caused by the address or status bars. In this situation, it is recommended that websites open windows without address or status bars by changing Internet setting. (Go to Tools and Internet Options, and then the Security tab → Click the Custom level… button → Select Enable for the Allow websites to open windows without address or status bars option). 67 User’s Manual NOTE: When running WebGuard in the Microsoft Windows Vista or later operating system, it is recommended to start Internet Explorer with elevated administrator permissions. Click the right mouse button on the Internet Explorer icon and select the Run as administrator option from the context menu. Otherwise, some functions of the WebGuard might be limited to use. NOTE: There might be a problem with screen display or screen update due to low image transmission speed when using the Microsoft Windows Vista or later operating system. In this situation, it is recommended that you disable the Auto Tuning capability of your computer. Run the Command Prompt with elevated administrator permissions (Go to the Start Menu and Accessories, and then Command Prompt → Click the right mouse button and select the Run as administrator option). Then enter “netsh int tcp set global autotuninglevel=disable” and press the enter key. Restart your computer to apply the changes. If you want to enable the Auto Tuning capability again, enter “netsh int tcp set global autotuninglevel=normal” after running the Command Prompt with elevated administrator permissions. Restart your computer to apply the changes. Web Monitoring Mode WebWatch is a remote web monitoring program that allows you to monitor live video transmitted in real-time from the remote DVR. ① : Click to log out the WebGuard program. ② : Click to access to the web search mode. ③ Position the mouse pointer on the WebWatch logo to see the version of the WebGuard program. ④ The DVR information window displays the login information of WebGuard. ⑤ Click the screen format to select the desired display mode. When changing the screen format, the selected camera on the current screen will locate at the first cell of the layout to be changed. ⑥ Click the camera button to select the camera to be viewed. ⑦ : Click to adjust the brightness, contrast, saturation and hue of monitoring image. ⑧ : Click to control pan, tilt and zoom of the camera from a remote site. ⑨ : Click to control alarm out devices at the remote site. 68 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder ⑩ : Click to set up the image drawing mode and OSD display. You can adjust the display speed by changing the image drawing mode, and select OSD information to be displayed on the screen. ⑪ : Click to save the current image as a bitmap or JPEG file format. ⑫ The event status window at the bottom displays a list of events that were detected from the remote site. ⑬ Selecting a camera on the screen and clicking the right mouse button displays the text menu screen.  Change Camera Title: Changes the camera name.  Enable Audio: Enables audio communication with the remote site. When the audio control panel displays, click the button to send audio to the connected remote site and click the button again to stop sending audio. Click the button to monitor live audio from the connected remote site through the attached speaker and click the button again stop monitoring live audio. Clicking both button and button allows two-way communication. Clicking the button disables audio communication.  Aspect Ratio: Changes the image aspect ratio.  Anti-Aliasing Screen: Enhances image display quality by eliminating stair stepping (aliasing) effects in the enlarged image. NOTE: A camera name change in the Web Watch mode does not affect the camera name set up on the remote site. Leaving the Camera Title blank causes the camera name set up on the remote site to display. Web Search Mode WebSearch is a remote web search program that allows you to search recorded video on the remote DVR. NOTE: The remote site connection on the Web Search screen will automatically be disconnected if there is no activity for 30 minutes. ① : Click to log out the WebGuard program. 69 User’s Manual ② : Click to access to the web monitoring mode. ③ Position the mouse pointer on the WebSearch logo to see the version of the WebGuard program. ④ The DVR Info. window displays the time information of recorded data on the remote DVR and login information of WebGuard. ⑤ : Click to blur, sharpen, equalize and interpolate playback images. : Click to zoom out or zooms in the recorded image. : Click to adjust the brightness of the recorded images. NOTE: Image processing works only in the pause mode. ⑥ The playback function buttons include fast backward, pause, play, fast forward, go to the first image, go to the previous image, go to the next image, and got to the last image. ⑦ Click the screen format to select the desired display mode. ⑧ : Click to enter the time-lapse search mode which allows you to search for recorded data by time and then play back images found within the time parameters. The Timetable window located at the bottom displays the time information for the image of the date selected on the calendar. Clicking a specific time displays the image recorded at that time on the screen. Selecting allows you to display an image from a specific time. ⑨ : Click to enter the event search mode which allows you to search for event log entries using specific conditions and play back the images associated with those event entries. ⑩ : Click to set up the image drawing mode and OSD display. You can adjust the display speed by changing the image drawing mode, and select OSD information to be displayed on the screen. ⑪ : Click to save any video clip of recorded data as an executable file. ⑫ : Click to save the current image in a bitmap or JPEG file format. ⑬ : Click to print the current image on a printer connected to your computer. ⑭ : Click to reload the recording data. ⑮ The Timetable displays recorded data of the selected camera by time (in hour segments). Selecting a camera on the screen and clicking the right mouse button displays the text menu screen.  Change Camera Title: Changes the camera name.  Aspect Ratio: Changes the image aspect ratio.  Anti-Aliasing Screen: Enhances image display quality by eliminating stair stepping (aliasing) effects in the enlarged image. NOTE: A camera name change in the Web Search mode does not affect the camera name set up on the remote site. Leaving the Camera Title blank causes the camera name set up on the remote site to display. 70 Hybrid Digital Video Recorder Appendix 3 — Text-In Query Set up the find condition of text-in.  Case Sensitive: Distinguishes between capital letter and small letters entered in the Name box.  Name: Enter the text to find.  Comp: Enter the comparison operator.  Value: Enter the comparison value. NOTE: The tab and line can be used for more specific search of the text-in data. Use a symbol ‘^’ indicating the location of each individual category, and ‘]’ indicating the line where the category is located. See the following examples for details.  Tab size: Enter the tab size. Up to eight tabs can be set. Query Example I 1 2 3 4 5 6 123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 Item Unit price Qty amount ================================================== Coke | $ 2.20 | 1(s) | $ 2.20 Fanta | $ 2.20 | 1(s) | $ 2.20 Hotdog | $ 3.50 | 3(s) | $ 10.50 Pepsi | $ 1.95 | 1(s) | $ 1.95 ================================================== total : $ 16.85 Thank you~~ In the above text-in data, you can find that the comparison value is located at 17th (Unit price, $ mark will be ignored automatically), 28th (Qty) and 40th (amount) characters (including spaces) from the left. In this case, you can enter “17”, “28” and “40” in each Tab size box, and enter the tab symbol “^” in the Value box (^ for Unit price, ^^ for Qty, and ^^^ for amount). For example, if you want to search for Coke with a Qty(Quantity) of more than 1 and Hotdog with an amount totaling over $8, the following find condition can be set. Coke > ^^1 and Hotdog > ^^^8 71 User’s Manual Query Example II 1 2 3 4 5 6 123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 Item Unit price Qty amount ================================================== Coke | $ 2.20 | 1(s) $ 2.20 Fanta | $ 2.20 | 1(s) $ 2.20 Hotdog | $ 3.50 | 3(s) $ 10.50 Pepsi | $ 1.95 | 1(s) $ 1.95 ================================================== total : $ 16.85 Thank you~~ In the above text-in data, you can find that the comparison value is located at 17th (Unit price, $ mark will be ignored automatically), 28th (Qty) and 40th (amount) characters (including spaces) from the left, but the value of amount category is located at the different line from Item. In this case, you can enter “17”, “28” and “40” in each Tab size box, and enter the tab symbol “^” and line symbol “]” in the Value box (^ for Unit price, ^^ for Qty, and ^^^ for amount / ] for the next line). For example, if you want to search for Coke with a Qty(Quantity) of more than 1 and Hotdog with an amount totaling over $8, the following find condition can be set. Coke > ^^1 and Hotdog > ]^^^8 72


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL

KENWOOD NX-P1302AU (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or page errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD KENWOOD NX-P1302AU (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary: VHF TRANSCEIVER NX-P1200NV NX-P1200AV NX-P1202AV UHF TRANSCEIVER NX-P1300NU NX-P1300AU NX-P1302AU USER GUIDE This User guide covers only the basic operations of your radio. For using the detailed instruction manual, refer to the following URL or QR code. manual.kenwood.com/files/B5K-0787-00.pdf B5A-3571-00 (K) NOTICES TO THE USER ◆ Refer service to qualifi ed technicians only. Safety: It is important that the operator is aware of, and understands, hazards common to the operation of any transceiver. Firmware Copyrights The title to and ownership of copyrights for firmware embedded in KENWOOD product memories are reserved for JVCKENWOOD Corporation. One or more of the following statements may be applicable: FCC WARNING This equipment generates or uses radio frequency energy. Changes or modifications to this equipment may cause harmful interference unless the modifications are expressly approved by the party responsible/ JVCKENWOOD. The user could lose the authority to operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or modification is made. INFORMATION TO THE DIGITAL DEVICE USER REQUIRED BY THE FCC This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can generate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer for technical assistance. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES FCC LICENSE INFORMATION Your KENWOOD transceiver operates on communications frequencies which are subject to FCC (Federal Communications Commission) Rules & Regulations. FCC Rules require that all operators using Private Land Mobile radio frequencies obtain a radio license before operating their equipment. Application for license must be made on FCC form 601, schedules D and H, and Remittance form 159. FAX: Forms can be obtained by fax from the FCC Fax-On-Demand system. Call 1-202-418-0177 from your fax machine and request document number 000601 for the form, schedules, and instructions. MAIL: Forms can be ordered by telephone, and will be sent to you by first class mail. Call the FCC Forms Hotline at 1-800-418-FORM (1- 800-418-3676). INTERNET: Form 601 and instructions can be downloaded from the FCC Forms website at fcc.gov/formpage.html Before filling out your Form 601 application Technical Data section, you must decide on which frequencies you will operate. See the frequency charts on the detailed instruction manual. QUESTIONS? Call the FCC for license application questions at 1-888-CALL-FCC (1-888-225-5322). SUPPLIER'S DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 47 CFR § 2.1077 Compliance Information Trade name: KENWOOD Model(s): NX-P1200NV/ NX-P1200AV/ NX-P1202AV/ NX-P1300NU/ NX-P1300AU/ NX-P1302AU Responsible party: JVCKENWOOD USA Corporation 1440 Corporate Drive, Irving, TX 75038 Telephone number: 972-819-0700 The RBRC Recycle seal found on KENWOOD lithium-ion (Li-ion) battery packs indicates KENWOOD’s voluntary participation in an industry program to collect and recycle Li-ion batteries after their operating life has expired. The RBRC program is an alternative to disposing Li-ion batteries with your regular refuse or in municipal waste streams, which is illegal in some areas. For information on Li-ion battery recycling in your area, call (toll free) 1-800-8-BATTERY (1-800-822-8837). KENWOOD’s involvement in this program is part of our commitment to preserve our environment and conserve our natural resources. The AMBE+2TM voice coding Technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use within this Communications Equipment. The user of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to extract, remove, decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a human-readable form. U.S. Patent Nos. #8,315,860, #8,595,002, #6,912,495, #8,200,497, #7,970,606, and #8,359,197. PRECAUTIONS Observe the following precautions to prevent fire, personal injury, and transceiver damage. • Do not charge the transceiver and battery pack when they are wet. • Ensure that there are no metallic items located between the transceiver and the battery pack. • Do not use options not specifi ed by KENWOOD. • If the chassis or other transceiver part is damaged, do not touch the damaged parts. • If a headset or earphone is connected to the transceiver, reduce the transceiver volume. • Do not place the optional speaker/ microphone, clip mic. with earphone, or headset around your neck while near machinery that may catch the cable. • Do not place the transceiver on unstable surfaces. • Ensure that the end of the antenna does not touch your eyes. • When the transceiver is used for transmission for many hours, the radiator and chassis will become hot. Do not touch these locations when replacing the battery pack. • Always switch the transceiver power off before installing optional accessories. • When water gets into the microphone opening or the speaker grill, the voice level may become low or distorted. Lightly shake the transceiver to remove the water from the speaker and/or microphone before operating the transceiver. • The charger is the device that disconnects the unit from the AC mains line. The AC plug should be readily accessible. • To dispose of batteries, be sure to comply with the laws and regulations in your country or region. Note: WARNING Turn the transceiver power off before entering the following locations: • Near explosives or blasting sites. • In aircraft. (Any use of the transceiver must follow the instructions and regulations provided by the airline crew.) • Where restrictions or warnings are posted regarding the use of radio devices, including but not limited to medical facilities. • Near persons wearing pacemakers. • In explosive atmospheres (infl ammable gas, dust particles, metallic powders, grain powders, etc.). • While pumping fuel or while parked at gasoline service stations. CAUTION • Do not disassemble or modify the transceiver for any reason. • Do not place the transceiver on or near airbag equipment while the vehicle is running. When the airbag infl ates, the transceiver may be ejected and strike the driver or passengers. • Do not transmit while touching the antenna terminal or if any metallic parts are exposed from the antenna covering. Transmitting at such a time may result in a high-frequency burn. • If an abnormal odor or smoke is detected coming from the transceiver, switch the transceiver power off immediately, remove the battery pack from the transceiver, and contact your KENWOOD dealer. • Use of the transceiver while you are driving may be against traffi c laws. Please check and observe the vehicle regulations in your area. • Do not expose the transceiver to extremely hot or cold conditions. • Do not carry the battery pack (or battery case) with metal objects, as they may short the battery terminals. • Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced; replace only with the same type. • When attaching a commercial strap to the transceiver, ensure that the strap is durable. In addition, do not swing the transceiver around by the strap; you may inadvertently strike and injure another person with the transceiver. • If a commercially available neck strap is used, take care not to let the strap get caught on nearby machine. • When operating the transceiver in areas where the air is dry, it is easy to build up an electric charge (static electricity). When using an earphone accessory in such conditions, it is possible for the transceiver to send an electric shock through the earphone and to your ear. We recommend you use only a speaker/microphone in these conditions, to avoid electric shocks. • Do not expose the transceiver to long periods of direct sunlight, nor place it near heating appliances. Information concerning the battery pack The battery pack includes flammable objects such as organic solvent. Mishandling may cause the battery to rupture producing flames or extreme heat, deteriorate, or cause other forms of damage to the battery. Please observe the following prohibitive matters. DANGER • Do not disassemble or reconstruct battery. • Do not short-circuit the battery. • Do not incinerate or apply heat to the battery. • Do not leave the battery near fi res, stoves, or other heat generators (areas reaching over 80°C/ 176°F). • Do not immerse the battery in water or get it wet by other means. • Do not charge the battery near fi res or under direct sunlight. • Use only the specifi ed charger and observe charging requirements. • Do not pierce the battery with any object, strike it with an instrument, or step on it. • Do not jar or throw the battery. • Do not use the battery pack if it is damaged in any way. • Do not solder directly onto the battery. • Do not reverse the battery polarity (and terminals). • Do not reverse-charge or reverse-connect the battery. • Do not touch a ruptured and leaking battery. If the electrolyte liquid from the battery gets into your eyes, wash your eyes out with fresh water as soon as possible, without rubbing your eyes. Go to the hospital immediately. If left untreated, it may cause eye problems. WARNING • Do not charge the battery for longer than the specifi ed time. • Do not place the battery pack into a microwave or high pressure container. • Keep ruptured and leaking battery packs away from fi re. • Do not use an abnormal battery. • Do not change or charge the battery in hazardous locations. DEFAULT CHANNEL SETTINGS RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY SAFETY INFORMATION This KENWOOD transceiver has been tested and complies with the standards listed below, in regards to Radio Frequency (RF) energy and electromagnetic energy (EME) generated by the transceiver. • FCC RF exposure limits for Occupational Use Only. RF Exposure limits adopted by the FCC are generally based on recommendations from the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements, & the American National Standards Institute. • FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition 97-01 Supplement C • American National Standards Institute (C95.1 – 1992) • American National Standards Institute (C95.3 – 1992) WARNING This KENWOOD transceiver generates RF EME while transmitting. RF EME (Radio Frequency Electric & Magnetic Energy) has the potential to cause slight thermal, or heating effects to any part of your body less than the recommended distance from this radio transmitter’s antenna. RF energy exposure is determined primarily by the distance to and the power of the transmitting device. In general, RF exposure is minimized when the lowest possible power is used or transmission time is kept to the minimum required for consistent communications, and the greatest distance possible from the antenna to the body is maintained. The transceiver has been designed for and is classified for Occupational Use Only. Occupational/ controlled exposure limits are applicable to situations in which persons are exposed to RF energy as a consequence of their employment, and such persons have been made aware of the potential for exposure and can exercise control over their exposure. This means you can use the transceiver only if you are aware of the potential hazards of operating a transceiver and are familiar in ways to minimize these hazards. This transceiver is not intended for use by the general public in uncontrolled environments. Uncontrolled environment exposure limits are applicable to situations in which the general public may be exposed to RF energy, or in which the persons who are exposed as a consequence of their employment may not be fully aware of the potential for exposure or cannot exercise control over their exposure. The following list provides you with the information required to ensure that you are aware of RF exposure and of how to operate this transceiver so that the FCC RF exposure limitations are not exceeded. • While transmitting (holding the PTT switch or speaking with VOX enabled), always keep the antenna and the radio at least 3 cm (1.18 inches) from your body or face, as well as from any bystanders. A LED on the top of the radio shows red when the transmitter is operating in both PTT and VOX modes. • Do not transmit for more than 50% of the total transceiver use time; transmitting over 50% of the total use time may exceed the limits in accordance to the FCC RF exposure requirements. Nominal transceiver operation is 5% transmission time, 5% reception time, and 90% stand-by time. • Use only the specifi ed antenna for this transceiver; this may be either the antenna provided with the transceiver or another antenna authorized by KENWOOD. Use only KENWOOD authorized accessories (antennas, battery packs, belt clips, Speaker/ Mics or headsets etc.): When worn on the body, always place the radio in a KENWOOD recommended clip or carrying case meant for this product. The use of other than recommended or approved body worn accessories may result in RF exposure levels which exceed the FCC’s occupational/ controlled environment RF exposure limits. CAUTION To ensure that your exposure to RF EME is within the FCC limits for occupational use, you must observe and adhere to the above points. Electromagnetic Interference Compatibility Electronic devices are susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if they are not adequately shielded or designed for electromagnetic compatibility. Because this transceiver generates RF energy, it can cause interference to such equipment. • Turn OFF your transceiver where signs are posted to do so. Hospitals and health care facilities use equipment that is sensitive to electromagnetic radiation. • Turn OFF your transceiver while on board an aircraft when so instructed. Use of the transceiver must be in accordance with airline regulations and/ or crew instructions. NX-P1300NU (NXDN/ Analog Transceiver)

Carefully unpack the transceiver. We recommend that you identify ◆ When the indicator blinks red, the battery pack is either defective or the battery pack contacts are not properly mated with those of the charger. These transceivers allows you to reprogram each of the channels with different frequencies and QT/DQT (Analog)/ RAN (NXDN Channel Zone 1/ Zone 2 (Analog) Zone 3 (Digital) Zone 4 (Digital) the items listed in the following list before discarding the packing material. If any items are missing or have been damaged during ◆ When the indicator fl ashes green and orange, the battery pack has not satisfi ed the charging start temperature. Remove the battery pack Digital) settings. The table below lists the default channel settings. Number Frequency (MHz) QT (Hz) Frequency (MHz) RAN Frequency (MHz) RAN

shipment, fi le a claim with the carrier immediately. Item Quantity Antenna 1 Battery charger/ AC adapter (KSC-35S) 1 from the charger and wait until it reaches a normal temperature before charging it again. ◆ The ambient temperature should be between 5°C and 40°C (41°F and 104°F) while charging is in progress. Charging outside this range may not fully charge the battery. ◆ The battery pack life is over when its operating time decreases even Note: ◆ The default setting of the zone differs depending on each model. For compatible KENWOOD models of each zone, refer to the detailed instruction manual. NX-P1200NV (NXDN/ Analog Transceiver) 1 464.5000 67.0 464.5000 1 464.5500 1 2 464.5000 77.0 464.5000 2 467.9250 1 3 464.5000 88.5 464.5000 3 461.0375 1 4 464.5000 179.9 464.5000 4 461.0625 1 5 464.5000 100.0 464.5000 5 461.0875 1

Li-ion battery pack (KNB-45L) 1 though it is fully and correctly charged. Replace the battery pack. Channel Zone 1/ Zone 2 (Analog) Zone 3/ Zone 4 (Digital) 6 464.5500 67.0 464.5500 1 461.1125 1 7 464.5500 82.5 464.5500 2 461.1375 1

Speaker/ microphone jack cap 1 Speaker/ microphone locking bracket 1 Number BASIC OPERATION Frequency (MHz) QT (Hz) Frequency (MHz) RAN 8 464.5500 94.8 464.5500 3 461.1625 1

Belt clip (KBH-10) 1 Screw (M3 x 8 mm) 2 Warranty card 1 User guide 1 Note: Power switch/ Volume control Selector Antenna Speaker 1 151.6250 67.0 151.6250 1 2 151.6250 77.0 151.6250 2 3 151.6250 88.5 151.6250 3 4 151.6250 179.9 151.6250 4 5 151.6250 100.0 151.6250 5 6 151.9550 67.0 151.9550 1 7 151.9550 82.5 151.9550 2 9 464.5500 179.9 464.5500 4 464.5000 1 10 464.5500 100.0 464.5500 5 467.7625 1 11 461.3625 74.4 461.3625 1 467.8125 1 12 464.4875 79.7 464.4875 1 467.8500 1 13 464.5375 85.4 464.5375 1 467.8750 1 14 466.0375 91.5 466.0375 1 467.9000 1 15 466.0875 97.4 466.0875 1 461.1875 1

◆ For the speaker/ microphone jack, waterproof performance is guaranteed by securing the supplied cap. Waterproof performance will not be guaranteed by connecting an optional speaker/ microphone, etc. PTT switch Side 1 button Side 2 button Microphone 8 151.9550 94.8 151.9550 3 9 151.9550 179.9 151.9550 4 10 151.9550 100.0 151.9550 5 16 466.1375 103.5 466.1375 1 461.2125 1 NX-P1300AU (Analog Transceiver)

Battery pack 11 154.4900 67.0 154.4900 1 Channel Zone 1 ~ Zone 4

INSTALLING/ REMOVING THE BATTERY PACK 12 154.5150 67.0 154.5150 1 Number Frequency (MHz) QT (Hz)

1 Align the battery pack with the back of the transceiver, then press the battery pack and transceiver fi rmly together until the release latch on the base of the transceiver locks. SWITCHING POWER ON/OFF Turn the Power switch/ Volume control clockwise to switch the transceiver ON. 13 151.5125 67.0 151.5125 1 14 151.6850 67.0 151.6850 1 15 151.7000 67.0 151.7000 1 16 151.7600 67.0 151.7600 1 NX-P1200AV (Analog Transceiver) 1 464.5000 67.0 2 464.5000 77.0 3 464.5000 88.5 4 464.5000 179.9 5 464.5000 100.0 6 464.5500 67.0

Turn the Power switch/ Volume control counterclockwise fully to Channel Zone 1 ~ Zone 4 7 464.5500 82.5

2 To remove the battery pack, lift the safety catch on the base of the transceiver, then switch the transceiver OFF. Number Frequency (MHz) QT (Hz) 8 464.5500 94.8

press the release latch underneath the safety catch. 3 While pressing the release latch, pull the battery pack away from the transceiver. ADJUSTING THE VOLUME Rotate the Power switch/ Volume control to adjust the volume. Clockwise increases the volume and counterclockwise decreases it. SELECTING A ZONE Press and hold the Side 1 button (Zone Up) or Side 2 button (Zone Down) for 1 second to change the Zone (1 ~ 4). SELECTING A CHANNEL Rotate the Selector to select your desired channel. TRANSMITTING 1 151.6250 67.0 2 151.6250 77.0 3 151.6250 88.5 4 151.6250 179.9 5 151.6250 100.0 6 151.9550 67.0 7 151.9550 82.5 8 151.9550 94.8 9 151.9550 179.9 10 151.9550 100.0 9 464.5500 179.9 10 464.5500 100.0 11 461.3625 74.4 12 464.4875 79.7 13 464.5375 85.4 14 466.0375 91.5 15 466.0875 97.4 16 466.1375 103.5 NX-P1302AU (Analog Transceiver) Zone 1 Zone 2 ~ Zone 4

1 Select the desired channel. 2 Press the PTT switch and speak to the microphone. Release the 11 154.4900 67.0 12 154.5150 67.0 Channel Number Frequency (MHz) QT (Hz) Frequency (MHz) QT (Hz)

CHARGING THE BATTERY PACK ATTENTION: ◆ Always switch OFF a transceiver equipped with a battery pack before inserting the transceiver into the charger. PTT switch to receive. • For best sound quality, hold the transceiver approximately 1.5 inches (3 ~ 4 cm) from your mouth. RECEIVING Select the desired channel. If signaling is confi gured on the selected channel, you will hear a call only if the received signal 13 151.5125 67.0 14 151.6850 67.0 15 151.7000 67.0 16 151.7600 67.0 NX-P1202AV (Analog Transceiver) 1 464.5500 67.0 464.5000 67.0 2 467.9250 67.0 464.5000 77.0 3 461.0375 67.0 464.5000 88.5 4 461.0625 67.0 464.5000 179.9 5 461.0875 67.0 464.5000 100.0 6 461.1125 67.0 464.5500 67.0

1 Plug the AC adapter cable into the jack located on the rear of the matches your transceiver settings. Channel Zone 1 Zone 2 ~ Zone 4 7 461.1375 67.0 464.5500 82.5

charger. 2 Plug the AC adapter into an AC outlet. Number Frequency (MHz) QT (Hz) Frequency (MHz) QT (Hz) 8 461.1625 67.0 464.5500 94.8 9 464.5000 67.0 464.5500 179.9

3 Slide a battery pack or a transceiver equipped with a battery pack into the charging slot of the charger. • Make sure the metal contacts of the battery pack mate securely with the charger terminals. • The indicator lights red and charging begins. Indicator 4 When charging is completed, the indicator fl ashing green. Remove the battery pack or the transceiver from the charging slot of the charger. • It takes approximately 3 hours to charge the battery pack. • When the charger will not be used for a long time, unplug the AC adapter from the AC outlet. 1 154.4900 67.0 151.6250 67.0 2 154.5150 67.0 151.6250 77.0 3 151.6250 67.0 151.6250 88.5 4 151.9550 67.0 151.6250 179.9 5 151.5125 67.0 151.6250 100.0 6 151.6850 67.0 151.9550 67.0 7 151.7750 67.0 151.9550 82.5 8 158.4000 67.0 151.9550 94.8 9 151.6250 77.0 151.9550 179.9 10 151.6250 88.5 151.9550 100.0 11 151.6250 179.9 154.4900 67.0 12 151.9550 82.5 154.5150 67.0 13 151.9550 94.8 151.5125 67.0 14 151.9550 179.9 151.6850 67.0 15 151.7000 67.0 151.7000 67.0 16 151.7600 67.0 151.7600 67.0 10 467.7625 67.0 464.5500 100.0 11 467.8125 67.0 461.3625 74.4 12 467.8500 67.0 464.4875 79.7 13 467.8750 67.0 464.5375 85.4 14 467.9000 67.0 466.0375 91.5 15 461.1875 67.0 466.0875 97.4 16 461.2125 67.0 466.1375 103.5 © 2020

TRANSCEPTOR VHF NX-P1200NV NX-P1200AV NX-P1202AV TRANSCEPTOR UHF NX-P1300NU NX-P1300AU NX-P1302AU GUÍA DEL USUARIO Este Guía del usuario sólo cubre las operaciones básicas de su radio. Para ver el manual de instrucciones detallado, consulte el siguiente URL o código QR. manual.kenwood.com/files/B5K-0787-00.pdf ACCESORIOS SUMINISTRADOS AVISOS AL USUARIO ◆ Solicite la reparación solamente a un técnico cualifi cado. Seguridad: Es importante que el operador conozca y entienda los peligros comunes derivados del uso de cualquier transceptor. Derechos de autor del firmware El título y la propiedad de los derechos de autor del firmware incorporado en memorias de productos KENWOOD están reservados para JVCKENWOOD Corporation. La tecnología de codificación de voz AMBE+2™ integrada en este producto está protegida por derechos de propiedad intelectual incluyendo los derechos de patente, los derechos de autor y secretos comerciales de Digital Voice Systems, Inc. Esta tecnología de codificación de voz otorga licencia para su uso únicamente dentro de este equipo de comunicaciones. Está explícitamente prohibido que el usuario de esta tecnología intente extraer, retirar, descompilar, realizer ingeniería inversa, o desmontar el código objeto, o convertir de cualquier otra manera el código objeto a una forma legible para el ser humano. Los números de patente de los EE.UU. #8,315,860, #8,595,002, #6,912,495, #8,200,497, #7,970,606 y #8,359,197. INFORMACIÓN SOBRE CONCESIÓN DE LICENCIA DE LA FCC Su transceptor KENWOOD funciona en frecuencias de comunicación sujetas a la Normativa y Reglamento de la FCC (Federal Communications Commission). El Reglamento de la FCC exige que todos los operadores que utilizan radiofrecuencias móviles terrestres privadas deben solicitar una licencia de radio antes de utilizar su equipo. La solicitud de dicha licencia debe realizarse a través del modelo 601 de la FCC, anexos D y H, y el modelo de Pago (Remittance) 159. FAX: Los modelos se pueden solicitar por fax al sistema de Fax On Demand de la FCC. Marque el 1-202-418-0177 desde su aparato de fax y solicite el número de documento 000601 para recibir el modelo, anexos e instrucciones. CORREO: Los modelos se pueden solicitar por teléfono y se le remitirá por correo preferente. Llame a la Línea Directa de solicitud Modelos de la FCC al 1-800-418-FORM (1-800-418-3676). INTERNET: El Modelo 601 y las instrucciones se pueden descargar del sitio Web de la FCC en la siguiente dirección: fcc.gov/formpage.html Antes de rellenar la sección de datos técnicos del Modelo de solicitud 601, debe decidir en qué frecuencias desea comunicarse. Consulte los cuadros de frecuencias del manual de instrucciones detallado. ¿PREGUNTAS? Si tiene alguna duda sobre la solicitud de la licencia, llame a la FCC al 1-888-CALL-FCC (1-888-225-5322). Nota: PRECAUCIONES Respete las siguientes precauciones para evitar incendios, lesiones personales y daños en el transceptor. • No cargue el transceptor ni la batería si están mojados. • Compruebe que no haya ningún objeto metálico interpuesto entre el transceptor y la batería. • No utilice opciones no indicadas por KENWOOD. • Si el chasis de fundición u otra pieza del transceptor resulta dañada, no toque ninguna de dichas piezas. • Si conecta un casco o auricular al transceptor, reduzca el volumen del aparato. Tenga cuidado con al nivel cuando desactive el silenciador. • No líe el cable del micrófono alrededor del cuello cuando esté cerca de máquinas que pudieran atrapar el cable. • No coloque el transceptor sobre superfi cies inestables. • Asegúrese de que el extremo de la antena no le roce los ojos. • Cuando utilice el transceptor para transmisiones prolongadas, el radiador y el chasis se recalentarán. No toque estos puntos al cambiar la batería. • Apague el transceptor antes de instalar los accesorios opcionales. • Si penetra agua en la apertura del micrófono o por la parilla del altavoz, el nivel de voz podría quedar distorsionado o reducido. Agite suavemente el transceptor para eliminar el agua del altavoz y/o del micrófono antes de utilizar el transceptor. • El cargador es el dispositivo que desconecta la unidad de la red eléctrica de CA. El enchufe de CA debe estar fácilmente accesible. • A la hora de desechar las pilas, asegúrese de cumplir con las normas y regulaciones de su país o región. ADVERTENCIA Apague el transceptor antes de entrar en las siguientes ubicaciones: • Apague el transceptor en los siguientes lugares: • En aeronaves. (El uso que se haga del transceptor deberá ajustarse en todo momento a las instrucciones y normativa que indique la tripulación de la aeronave.) • Cuando existan carteles de restricción o de advertencia sobre el uso de aparatos de radio, como pudiera ser en centros hospitalarios, entre otros. • Cerca de personas con marcapasos. • En atmósferas explosivas (gas infl amable, partículas de polvo, polvos metálicos, polvos de grano, etc.). • Mientras reposta combustible o está aparcado en estaciones de servicio. PRECAUCIÓN • No desmonte ni modifi que el transceptor bajo ningún concepto. • No coloque el transceptor encima o cerca de un sistema de bolsa de aire (airbag) con el vehículo en marcha. Al infl arse la bolsa de aire, el transceptor puede salir expulsado y golpear al conductor o a los pasajeros. • No transmita tocando el terminal de la antena o si sobresale alguna pieza metálica del recubrimiento de la antena. Si transmite en ese momento, podría sufrir una quemadura por alta frecuencia. • Si detecta un olor anormal o humo procedente del transceptor, apáguelo, retire la batería y póngase en contacto con su proveedor KENWOOD. • El uso del transceptor mientras conduce puede infringir las leyes de tráfi co. Consulte y respete el reglamento de tráfi co de su país. • No someta el transceptor a temperaturas extremadamente altas o bajas. • No transporte la batería (o el porta pilas) con objetos metálicos, ya que estos podrían producir un cortocircuito con los terminales de la batería. • Peligro de explosión si la batería se cambia incorrectamente; cámbiela únicamente por otra del mismo tipo. • Al instalar una correa comercial al transceptor, asegúrese de que la correa sea duradera. Además, no balancee el transceptor por la correa; podría golpear accidentalmente y lesionar a otra persona con el transceptor. • Si se usa una correa para el cuello disponible comercialmente, tenga cuidado de no dejar que la correa quede atrapada en una máquina cercana. • Cuando utilice el transceptor en zonas donde el aire sea seco, es fácil que se acumule carga eléctrica (electricidad estática). Cuando utilice un auricular accesorio en estas condiciones, es posible que reciba una descarga eléctrica en el oído, a través del auricular, procedente del transceptor. Para evitar descargas eléctricas, le recomendamos que en estas circunstancias utilice exclusivamente un micrófono/ altavoz. • No exponga el transceptor a la luz directa del sol durante periodos de tiempo prolongados, ni lo coloque cerca de calefactores. AJUSTES DE CANAL PREDETERMINADOS Información sobre la batería La batería contiene objetos inflamables, como disolvente orgánico. Su uso inapropiado puede hacer que la batería se rompa y se incendie o genere calor extremo, que se deteriore o se produzcan otros tipos de daños a la batería. Observe las siguientes prohibiciones. PELIGRO • ¡No desmonte o reconstruya la batería! • ¡No cortocircuite la batería! • ¡No arroje la batería al fuego ni le aplique calor! • ¡No deje la batería cerca del fuego, estufas, u otros generadores de calor (zonas por encima de 80°C/ 176°F)! • ¡No sumerja la batería en agua o deje que se moje de ningún otro modo! • ¡No cargue la batería cerca del fuego o bajo la luz directa del sol! • ¡Utilice únicamente el cargador especificado y observe los requisitos de carga! • ¡No perfore o golpee la batería con ningún objeto, ni tampoco la pise! • ¡No golpee ni tire la batería! • ¡No utilice la batería si presenta algún tipo de daño! • ¡No suelde nada directamente a la batería! • ¡No invierta la polaridad de la batería (ni los terminales)! • ¡No cargue o conecte la batería de forma invertida! • ¡No toque la batería si está rota y tiene fugas! Si el líquido electrolito de la batería llegara a entrarle en los ojos, láveselos con agua fresca lo antes posible, sin frotarlos. Vaya al hospital inmediatamente. Si no se trata, podría causar problemas a la vista. ADVERTENCIA • ¡No cargue la batería durante más tiempo del indicado! • ¡No coloque la batería dentro de un horno microondas o un recipiente de alta presión! • ¡Mantenga las baterías perforadas y con fugas lejos del fuego! • ¡No utilice una batería que presente anomalías! • ¡No cambie o cargue la batería en ambientes peligrosos! NX-P1300NU (Transceptor NXDN/ analógico)

Desembale el transceptor con cuidado. Recomendamos que ◆ Cuando el indicador parpadea de color rojo, la batería está defectuosa o los contactos no están bien acoplados a los del cargador. Estos transceptores le permiten reprogramar cada uno de los canales con distintes frecuencias y ajustes de QT/DQT (Analógico)/ Número Zona 1/ Zona 2 (Analógica) Zona 3 (Digital) Zona 4 (Digital) identifi que los artículos enumerados en la lista siguiente antes de desechar el material de embalaje Si falta o ha resultado dañado ◆ Cuando el indicador parpadea en vede y naranja, la temperatura de la batería no se ajusta a la temperatura de inicio de carga. Retire la RAN (NXDN digital). En la siguiente tabla se recogen los ajustes de canal predeterminados. de canal Frecuencia (MHz) QT (Hz) Frecuencia (MHz) RAN Frecuencia (MHz) RAN

algún artículo, presente inmediatamente una reclamación a la empresa de transporte. Artículo Cantidad Antena 1 Cargador de la batería/ Adaptador de CA (KSC-35S) 1 batería del cargador y espere hasta que se alcance una temperatura normal antes de cargarla de nuevo. ◆ Durante el proceso de carga, la temperatura ambiente debe ser de 5°C a 40°C (de 41°F a 104°F). Si la carga se realiza fuera de este rango de temperaturas, es posible que la batería no se cargue por completo. ◆ La vida útil de la batería termina cuando disminuye el tiempo de Nota: ◆ La confi guración predeterminada de la zona difi ere según cada modelo. Para los modelos KENWOOD compatibles de cada zona, consulte el manual de instrucciones detallado. NX-P1200NV (Transceptor NXDN/ analógico) 1 464,5000 67,0 464,5000 1 464,5500 1 2 464,5000 77,0 464,5000 2 467,9250 1 3 464,5000 88,5 464,5000 3 461,0375 1 4 464,5000 179,9 464,5000 4 461,0625 1 5 464,5000 100,0 464,5000 5 461,0875 1 6 464,5500 67,0 464,5500 1 461,1125 1

Batería de iones de litio (KNB-45L) 1 funcionamiento aunque se haya cargado de forma correcta y completa. Reemplace la batería. Número Zona 1/ Zona 2 (Analógica) Zona 3/ Zona 4 (Digital) 7 464,5500 82,5 464,5500 2 461,1375 1 Tapa del conector del altavoz/ micrófono 1 Soporte del bloqueo del altavoz/ micrófono 1 de canal OPERACIONES BÁSICAS Frecuencia (MHz) QT (Hz) Frecuencia (MHz) RAN 8 464,5500 94,8 464,5500 3 461,1625 1 9 464,5500 179,9 464,5500 4 464,5000 1

Gancho para cinturón (KBH-10) 1 Tornillo (M3 x 8 mm) 2 Tarjeta de garantía 1 Guía del usuario 1 Nota: Interruptor de encendido/ Control de volumen Selector Antena Altavoz 1 151,6250 67,0 151,6250 1 2 151,6250 77,0 151,6250 2 3 151,6250 88,5 151,6250 3 4 151,6250 179,9 151,6250 4 5 151,6250 100,0 151,6250 5 6 151,9550 67,0 151,9550 1 7 151,9550 82,5 151,9550 2 10 464,5500 100,0 464,5500 5 467,7625 1 11 461,3625 74,4 461,3625 1 467,8125 1 12 464,4875 79,7 464,4875 1 467,8500 1 13 464,5375 85,4 464,5375 1 467,8750 1 14 466,0375 91,5 466,0375 1 467,9000 1 15 466,0875 97,4 466,0875 1 461,1875 1 16 466,1375 103,5 466,1375 1 461,2125 1

◆ Para el conector del altavoz/ micrófono, el rendimiento de la impermeabilidad está garantizado mediante la fi jación de la tapa suministrada. El rendimiento de la impermeabilidad no estará Conmutador PTT Botón lateral 1 Micrófono 8 151,9550 94,8 151,9550 3 9 151,9550 179,9 151,9550 4 NX-P1300AU (Transceptor analógico) garantizado si conecta un altavoz/ micrófono opcional, etc. Botón lateral 2 10 151,9550 100,0 151,9550 5 Número Zona 1 ~ Zona 4

Batería 11 154,4900 67,0 154,4900 1 12 154,5150 67,0 154,5150 1 de canal Frecuencia (MHz) QT (Hz)

INSTALACIÓN/ EXTRACCIÓN DE LA BATERÍA 1 Alinee la batería con la parte posterior del transceptor, y luego apriete la batería y el transceptor fuertemente hasta que la pestaña de liberación situada en la parte inferior del transceptor chasquee. ENCENDIDO Y APAGADO Gire el Interruptor de encendido/ Control de volumen hacia la derecha para encender el transceptor. Gire el Interruptor de encendido/ Control de volumen 13 151,5125 67,0 151,5125 1 14 151,6850 67,0 151,6850 1 15 151,7000 67,0 151,7000 1 16 151,7600 67,0 151,7600 1 NX-P1200AV (Transceptor analógico) Zona 1 ~ Zona 4 1 464,5000 67,0 2 464,5000 77,0 3 464,5000 88,5 4 464,5000 179,9 5 464,5000 100,0 6 464,5500 67,0 7 464,5500 82,5

2 Para extraer la batería, suba el cierre completamente hacia la izquierda para apagar el transceptor. Número de canal Frecuencia (MHz) QT (Hz) 8 464,5500 94,8 9 464,5500 179,9

de seguridad situado en la base del transceptor y luego presione la pestaña de liberación situada debajo de dicho cierre. 3 Mientras presiona la pestaña de liberación, separe la batería del transceptor. AJUSTE DEL VOLUMEN Gire el Interruptor de encendido/ Control de volumen para ajustar el volumen. Hacia la derecha aumenta el nivel de volumen y hacia la izquierda, lo reduce. SELECCIONAR UNA ZONA Mantenga pulsado el Botón lateral 1 (Zona arriba) o Botón lateral 2 (Zona abajo) durante 1 segundo para cambiar la zona (1 ~ 4). 1 151,6250 67,0 2 151,6250 77,0 3 151,6250 88,5 4 151,6250 179,9 5 151,6250 100,0 6 151,9550 67,0 7 151,9550 82,5 8 151,9550 94,8 9 151,9550 179,9 10 464,5500 100,0 11 461,3625 74,4 12 464,4875 79,7 13 464,5375 85,4 14 466,0375 91,5 15 466,0875 97,4 16 466,1375 103,5 NX-P1302AU (Transceptor analógico)

SELECCIÓN DE UN CANAL Rote el Selector para seleccionar el canal deseado. 10 151,9550 100,0 11 154,4900 67,0 12 154,5150 67,0 Número de canal Zona 1 Zona 2 ~ Zona 4 Frecuencia (MHz) QT (Hz) Frecuencia (MHz) QT (Hz)

CARGA DE LA BATERÍA ATENCIÓN: ◆ Desconecte siempre el transceptor equipado con batería antes de insertarlo en el cargador. TRANSMISIÓN 1 Seleccione la zona y el canal deseados. 2 Presione el Conmutador PTT y hable al micrófono. Suelte el Conmutador PTT para recibir. • Para obtener una calidad de sonido optima, sujete el transceptor a 3 ó 4 cm de la boca. RECEPCIÓN 13 151,5125 67,0 14 151,6850 67,0 15 151,7000 67,0 16 151,7600 67,0 NX-P1202AV (Transceptor analógico) Zona 1 Zona 2 ~ Zona 4 1 464,5500 67,0 464,5000 67,0 2 467,9250 67,0 464,5000 77,0 3 461,0375 67,0 464,5000 88,5 4 461,0625 67,0 464,5000 179,9 5 461,0875 67,0 464,5000 100,0 6 461,1125 67,0 464,5500 67,0 7 461,1375 67,0 464,5500 82,5

1 Enchufe el cable del adaptador de CA en el jack situado en la parte Seleccione la zona y el canal deseados. Si se ha programado la función de señalización en el canal seleccionado, sólo oirá las Número de canal Frecuencia (MHz) QT (Hz) Frecuencia (MHz) QT (Hz) 8 461,1625 67,0 464,5500 94,8 9 464,5000 67,0 464,5500 179,9

posterior del cargador. 2 Enchufe el adaptador de CA en la toma de CA. 3 Introduzca en la ranura de carga la batería o un transceptor equipado con una batería. • Asegúrese de que los contactos metálicos de la batería se acoplen firmemente con los terminales del cargador. • El indicador se ilumina de color rojo y comienza la carga. Indicador 4 Una vez fi nalizada la carga, el indicador parpadea en verde. Retire la batería o el transceptor de la ranura de carga del cargador. • La batería tarda 3 horas aproximadamente en cargarse. • Cuando no se vaya a utilizar el cargador durante un tiempo prolongado, desenchufe el adaptador de CA de la toma de CA. llamadas en las que la señal recibida coincida con la confi guración del transceptor. 1 154,4900 67,0 151,6250 67,0 2 154,5150 67,0 151,6250 77,0 3 151,6250 67,0 151,6250 88,5 4 151,9550 67,0 151,6250 179,9 5 151,5125 67,0 151,6250 100,0 6 151,6850 67,0 151,9550 67,0 7 151,7750 67,0 151,9550 82,5 8 158,4000 67,0 151,9550 94,8 9 151,6250 77,0 151,9550 179,9 10 151,6250 88,5 151,9550 100,0 11 151,6250 179,9 154,4900 67,0 12 151,9550 82,5 154,5150 67,0 13 151,9550 94,8 151,5125 67,0 14 151,9550 179,9 151,6850 67,0 15 151,7000 67,0 151,7000 67,0 16 151,7600 67,0 151,7600 67,0 10 467,7625 67,0 464,5500 100,0 11 467,8125 67,0 461,3625 74,4 12 467,8500 67,0 464,4875 79,7 13 467,8750 67,0 464,5375 85,4 14 467,9000 67,0 466,0375 91,5 15 461,1875 67,0 466,0875 97,4 16 461,2125 67,0 466,1375 103,5


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL

BRANDMOTION SMTV-2211V2 (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or page errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD BRANDMOTION SMTV-2211V2 (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary: INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Jeep Wrangler JK 2 Front and Rear Camera System SMTV-2211V2

Items Included in the Kit Camera Chassis Harness Power Harness Zip lock bag with 15 Wire Ties & 3 Push Nuts Camera Extension Bracket 22--pin white connector w/ video RCA 9002-2782 v2 interface module USB cable (for updates) Power Plug & Play T-harness AV harness Underhood power/video harness 1 Bottle of Z-tech templates for front camera Required Tools & Supplies T15 & T20 Torx Bits 7mm & 10mm Sockets Phillips Screwdriver 3/8” Wrench or Socket Drive Plastic Trim Removal Tool Soldering Iron, Solder, & Heat Shrink Tubing (RECOMMENDED) Electrical Tape 1 3/8 “ Hole Saw

SMTV-2211V2 Instructions 7/1/20 Page 1 of 8 KB INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Rear View Camera Install Install Camera Step 1:​ Loosen lug nuts to remove spare tire. Step 2:​ Slide Camera on studs placing harness end inside of tire carrier. Step 3:​ Adjust Camera head to fit your specific wheel. Bracket is shipped in factory wheel configuration. Note:​ Short Bracket has been designed for Factory offset wheels. Use the Long Bracket for wheels with larger offsets. Step 4:​ Remove spare tire and slide (3) supplied Push Nuts on the studs. Adjustment Bracket for Camera Clearance using Phillips Screwdriver and 3/8” Wrench or Socket Drive Step 5:​ Reinstall spare tire. SMTV-2211V2 Instructions 7/1/20 Page 2 of 8 KB INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Install Chassis Harness Step 6:​ Insert connector from Camera connector through the rear gate vent behind tire carrier. Step 10:​ Use supplied Wire Ties to secure Chassis Harness to existing harness. Step 7:​ Using a plastic trim removal tool, remove interior panels on inside of rear gate. Step 11:​ Use supplied Wire Ties to secure Chassis Harness to fabric factory wire cover. CAUTION: Leave enough slack to allow gate to open fully. Step 12:​ Use a T20 Torx bit to remove subwoofer box. Step 8:​ Pull harness through the rear gate openings. SMTV-2211V2 Instructions 7/1/20 Page 3 of 8 KB INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Step 13:​ Using a plastic trim removal tool, pry off rear

seat belt closeout. Step 14:​ Using a plastic trim removal tool, remove rear access panel to expose 10mm bolt, and remove bolt. Step 15:​ Pull out subwoofer box slightly to gain access to run Chassis Harness along existing harness Step 16:​ Pull back carpet and continue running Chassis Harness forward. Step 17:​ Run Chassis Harness under B-pillar cover to passenger door sill. Use a plastic trim removal tool to remove the (2) plastic push pins and remove passenger sill plate/kick panel. Step 18: ​Remove rubber bin insert from top of dash. Step 19: ​Remove 7mm bolt .

SMTV-2211V2 Instructions 07/1/20 Page 4 of 8 KB

Step 20:​ Using a plastic trim removal tool, remove window switch panel. Step 21: ​Disconnect harness from window switches. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Step 23:​ Remove driver knee bolster cover. Step 24:​ Remove (2) 7mm bolts on both sides of the steering column.

Step 22:​ Remove 7mm bolt. Step 25: ​Remove center stack/cluster surround. Step 26: ​Remove glove box for access and run Chassis Harness toward center of dash.

SMTV-2211V2 Instructions 7/1/20 Page 5 of 8 KB

Rockcrawler Installation 1. Determine the best location for the camera to be mounted to the vehicle. 2. Use the template to see if there is clearance to mount the camera flat to the bumper. (Located on the last page of these instructions.) 3. Make the center hole and drill a 1⅜” hole to mount the camera. 4. Apply Z-tech to the exposed metal that was just drilled. (It is advised to paint the bare metal where the hole was just drilled.) 5. Insert the camera mount into the hole with the camera top-side up. (The top/up of the camera has a white sticker on the camera inside the mount.) 6. From the back side of the camera mount attach the mounting bracket with the (2) 2.5mm Allen screws. Do not tighten the screws all the way until the view can be checked. 7. Plug in the water proof camera connector into the power harness. Make sure the connector is going the proper way and that it plugs in all the way. 8. Route the harness away from any moving parts so the harness will not get cut. Enter the underhood area and secure to the harness running along the driver’s side fender with zip ties. 9. Route the camera harness into the vehicle's INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS interior through the factory grommet in the firewall on the driver’s side. 10. Route the harness to the back of the radio where the display interface will be. Connecting Power Harness ​Using a plastic trim removal tool, remove HVAC panel. Splice Red power wire from front and rear camera harnesses to Blue/Red wire on back of power point and Splice Black Ground to Black/White wire. RECOMMENDED: Use solder and cover with heat shrink tubing or use T-taps as an alternate connection method. Connect Chassis Harness to Power Harness of rear camera. Leave the RCA from the chassis harness where the interface will later be installed

SMTV-2211V2 Instructions 7/1/20 Page 6 of 8 KB INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Interface Installation 9002-2782 v2 pin out: 9002-2782 v2 INSTALLATION (VIM ​ONLY​): 1. Remove the radio from the dash and set to the side. 2. Plug the module T- Harness into the main power harness. (If the vehicle has an external UConnect or iPod module, make sure that the external module is plugged into the radio first, then the T-Harness.) 3. Plug in the black module and find a location to solidly mount behind the dash. SMTV-2211V2 Instructions 7/1/20 Page 7 of 8 KB INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 9002-2782 v2 INSTALLATION (camera/video input): Rear Camera Installation: * 1. The RCA from the rear camera plugs into the female RCA of the 9002-2782 v2 module harness labeled “BACKUP CAM”. Front Camera connection:** 1. Once the front camera is mounted connect the video to the female RCA labeled “Video In” on the 9002-2782 v2 module. Interface Connection to Radio 1. The ​male​ RCA from the 9002-2782 v2 module connects to the “CAMERA INPUT” of the AV harness. 2. Reinstall the radio. Before putting the vehicle together, verify the operation of the unit. 9002-2782 v2 OPERATION: Force camera mode Forced camera will work in multiple ways, depending on hardware installed and programming of the module. To force the camera, press the radio power button 2 times in 1 second. (RBZ & RHB radios require a second pause between presses) Backup camera only-​ Whenever the vehicle is in reverse, the screen will switch to the backup camera input. If forced camera is desired, as to see behind the vehicle when driving (viewing of rear traffic or a trailer in tow), press the radio power button twice. Backup camera with Front view (second) camera-​ When both front and rear cameras are installed and programmed, the radio will cycle through the 2 cameras in the following sequence: radio, rear view camera, radio, front view camera, radio… ● Start with radio on, regardless of source. ● Press radio power 2 times to force rear view camera. ● Press radio power 2 more times to return to radio. ● Press radio power 2 times again to force front camera. ● Press radio power 2 times once more to return to radio. If forced front camera is active and the vehicle is placed into reverse, the rear camera will be displayed, then the front camera image will return when shifted out of reverse. The screen will stay in this state until the power button is pressed 2 times or the key has been cycled. *Note – The current audio source will not change when forced camera is activated. SMTV-2211V2 Instructions 7/1/20 Page 8 of 8 KB


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL

KEITHLEY 2000 (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or page errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD KEITHLEY 2000 (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary: Model 2000 Multimeter User’s Manual A GREATER MEASURE OF CONFIDENCE WARRANTY Keithley Instruments, Inc. warrants this product to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of 3 years from date of shipment. Keithley Instruments, Inc. warrants the following items for 90 days from the date of shipment: probes, cables, rechargeable batteries, diskettes, and documentation. During the warranty period, we will, at our option, either repair or replace any product that proves to be defective. To exercise this warranty, write or call your local Keithley representative, or contact Keithley headquarters in Cleveland, Ohio. You will be given prompt assistance and return instructions. Send the product, transportation prepaid, to the indicated service facility. Repairs will be made and the product returned, transportation prepaid. Repaired or replaced products are warranted for the balance of the original warranty period, or at least 90 days. LIMITATION OF WARRANTY This warranty does not apply to defects resulting from product modification without Keithley’s express written consent, or misuse of any product or part. This warranty also does not apply to fuses, software, non-rechargeable batteries, damage from battery leakage, or problems arising from normal wear or failure to follow instructions. THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR USE. THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. NEITHER KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS, INC. NOR ANY OF ITS EMPLOYEES SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF ITS INSTRUMENTS AND SOFTWARE EVEN IF KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS, INC., HAS BEEN ADVISED IN ADVANCE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SUCH EXCLUDED DAM AGES SHALL INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO: COSTS OF REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, LOSSES SUSTAINED AS THE RESULT OF INJURY TO ANY PERSON, OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY. Keithley Instruments, Inc. 28775 Aurora Road • Cleveland, Ohio 44139 • 440-248-0400 • Fax: 440-248-6168 1-888-KEITHLEY (534-8453) • keithley.com Sales Offices: BELGIUM: Bergensesteenweg 709 • B-1600 Sint-Pieters-Leeuw • 02-363 00 40 • Fax: 02/363 00 64 CHINA: Yuan Chen Xin Building, Room 705 • 12 Yumin Road, Dewai, Madian • Beijing 100029 • 8610-6202-2886 • Fax: 8610-6202-2892 FINLAND: Tietäjäntie 2 • 02130 Espoo • Phone: 09-54 75 08 10 • Fax: 09-25 10 51 00 FRANCE: 3, allée des Garays • 91127 Palaiseau Cédex • 01-64 53 20 20 • Fax: 01-60 11 77 26 GERMANY: Landsberger Strasse 65 • 82110 Germering • 089/84 93 07-40 • Fax: 089/84 93 07-34 GREAT BRITAIN: Unit 2 Commerce Park, Brunel Road • Theale • Berkshire RG7 4AB • 0118 929 7500 • Fax: 0118 929 7519 INDIA: Flat 2B, Willocrissa • 14, Rest House Crescent • Bangalore 560 001 • 91-80-509-1320/21 • Fax: 91-80-509-1322 ITALY: Viale San Gimignano, 38 • 20146 Milano • 02-48 39 16 01 • Fax: 02-48 30 22 74 KOREA: FL., URI Building • 2-14 Yangjae-Dong • Seocho-Gu, Seoul 137-130 • 82-2-574-7778 • Fax: 82-2-574-7838 NETHERLANDS: Postbus 559 • 4200 AN Gorinchem • 0183-635333 • Fax: 0183-630821 SWEDEN: c/o Regus Business Centre • Frosundaviks Allé 15, 4tr • 169 70 Solna • 08-509 04 679 • Fax: 08-655 26 10 SWITZERLAND: Kriesbachstrasse 4 • 8600 Dübendorf • 01-821 94 44 • Fax: 01-820 30 81 TAIWAN: 1FL., 85 Po Ai Street • Hsinchu, Taiwan, R.O.C. • 886-3-572-9077• Fax: 886-3-572-9031 © Copyright 2001 Keithley Instruments, Inc. Printed in the U.S.A. 11/01 Model 2000 Multimeter User’s Manual ©1994, Keithley Instruments, Inc. All rights reserved. Cleveland, Ohio, U.S.A. Seventh Printing, December 2001 Document Number: 2000-900-01 Rev. G Manual Print History The print history shown below lists the printing dates of all Revisions and Addenda created for this manual. The Revision Level letter increases alphabetically as the manual undergoes subsequent updates. Addenda, which are released between Revisions, contain important change information that the user should incorporate immediately into the manual. Addenda are numbered sequentially. When a new Revision is created, all Addenda associated with the previous Revision of the manual are incorporated into the new Revision of the manual. Each new Revision includes a revised copy of this print history page. Revision A (Document Number 2000-900-01).............................................................. November 1994 Revision B (Document Number 2000-900-01)................................................................ February 1995 Revision C (Document Number 2000-900-01).................................................................... March 1995 Addendum C (Document Number 2000-900-02) .................................................................. April 1995 Revision D (Document Number 2000-900-01)................................................................... August 1995 Addendum D (Document Number 2000-900-02)..............................................................October 1995 Addendum D (Document Number 2000-900-03)..........................................................September 1996 Revision E (Document Number 2000-900-01) .................................................................... March 1997 Revision F (Document Number 2000-900-01) ...................................................................... April 1999 Revision G (Document Number 2000-900-01).............................................................. December 2001 All Keithley product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of Keithley Instruments, Inc. Other brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Safety Precautions The following safety precautions should be observed before using this product and any associated instrumentation. Although some instruments and accessories would normally be used with non-hazardous voltages, there are situations where hazardous conditions may be present. This product is intended for use by qualified personnel who recognize shock hazards and are familiar with the safety precautions required to avoid possible injury. Read and follow all installation, operation, and maintenance information carefully before us ing the product. Refer to the manual for complete product specifications. If the product is used in a manner not specified, the protection provided by the product may be impaired. The types of product users are: Responsible body is the individual or group responsible for the use and maintenance of equipment, for ensuring that the equip ment is operated within its specifications and operating limits, and for ensuring that operators are adequately trained. Operators use the product for its intended function. They must be trained in electrical safety procedures and proper use of the instrument. They must be protected from electric shock and contact with hazardous live circuits. Maintenance personnel perform routine procedures on the product to keep it operating properly, for example, setting the line voltage or replacing consumable materials. Maintenance procedures are described in the manual. The procedures explicitly state if the operator may perform them. Otherwise, they should be performed only by service personnel. Service personnel are trained to work on live circuits, and perform safe installations and repairs of products. Only properly trained service personnel may perform installation and service procedures. Keithley products are designed for use with electrical signals that are rated Installation Category I and Installation Category II, as described in the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Standard IEC 60664. Most measurement, control, and data I/O signals are Installation Category I and must not be directly connected to mains voltage or to voltage sources with high tran sient over-voltages. Installation Category II connections require protection for high transient over-voltages often associated with local AC mains connections. Assume all measurement, control, and data I/O connections are for connection to Category I sourc es unless otherwise marked or described in the Manual. Exercise extreme caution when a shock hazard is present. Lethal voltage may be present on cable connector jacks or test fixtures. The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) states that a shock hazard exists when voltage levels greater than 30V RMS, 42.4V peak, or 60VDC are present. A good safety practice is to expect that hazardous voltage is present in any unknown circuit before measuring. Operators of this product must be protected from electric shock at all times. The responsible body must ensure that operators are prevented access and/or insulated from every connection point. In some cases, connections must be exposed to potential human contact. Product operators in these circumstances must be trained to protect themselves from the risk of electric shock. If the circuit is capable of operating at or above 1000 volts, no conductive part of the circuit may be exposed. Do not connect switching cards directly to unlimited power circuits. They are intended to be used with impedance limited sourc es. NEVER connect switching cards directly to AC mains. When connecting sources to switching cards, install protective de vices to limit fault current and voltage to the card. Before operating an instrument, make sure the line cord is connected to a properly grounded power receptacle. Inspect the con necting cables, test leads, and jumpers for possible wear, cracks, or breaks before each use. When installing equipment where access to the main power cord is restricted, such as rack mounting, a separate main input pow er disconnect device must be provided, in close proximity to the equipment and within easy reach of the operator. For maximum safety, do not touch the product, test cables, or any other instruments while power is applied to the circuit under test. ALWAYS remove power from the entire test system and discharge any capacitors before: connecting or disconnecting ca bles or jumpers, installing or removing switching cards, or making internal changes, such as installing or removing jumpers. Do not touch any object that could provide a current path to the common side of the circuit under test or power line (earth) ground. Al ways make measurements with dry hands while standing on a dry, insulated surface capable of withstanding the voltage being measured. The instrument and accessories must be used in accordance with its specifications and operating instructions or the safety of the equipment may be impaired. Do not exceed the maximum signal levels of the instruments and accessories, as defined in the specifications and operating in formation, and as shown on the instrument or test fixture panels, or switching card. When fuses are used in a product, replace with same type and rating for continued protection against fire hazard. Chassis connections must only be used as shield connections for measuring circuits, NOT as safety earth ground connections. If you are using a test fixture, keep the lid closed while power is applied to the device under test. Safe operation requires the use of a lid interlock. If a screw is present, connect it to safety earth ground using the wire recommended in the user documentation. ! The symbol on an instrument indicates that the user should refer to the operating instructions located in the manual. The symbol on an instrument shows that it can source or measure 1000 volts or more, including the combined effect of normal and common mode voltages. Use standard safety precautions to avoid personal contact with these voltages. The WARNING heading in a manual explains dangers that might result in personal injury or death. Always read the associated information very carefully before performing the indicated procedure. The CAUTION heading in a manual explains hazards that could damage the instrument. Such damage may invalidate the war ranty. Instrumentation and accessories shall not be connected to humans. Before performing any maintenance, disconnect the line cord and all test cables. To maintain protection from electric shock and fire, replacement components in mains circuits, including the power transformer, test leads, and input jacks, must be purchased from Keithley Instruments. Standard fuses, with applicable national safety ap provals, may be used if the rating and type are the same. Other components that are not safety related may be purchased from other suppliers as long as they are equivalent to the original component. (Note that selected parts should be purchased only through Keithley Instruments to maintain accuracy and functionality of the product.) If you are unsure about the applicability of a replacement component, call a Keithley Instruments office for information. To clean an instrument, use a damp cloth or mild, water based cleaner. Clean the exterior of the instrument only. Do not apply cleaner directly to the instrument or allow liquids to enter or spill on the instrument. Products that consist of a circuit board with no case or chassis (e.g., data acquisition board for installation into a computer) should never require cleaning if handled accord ing to instructions. If the board becomes contaminated and operation is affected, the board should be returned to the factory for proper cleaning/servicing. 11/01 Table of Contents 1 General Information Introduction..........................................................................................1-2 Feature overview..................................................................................1-2 Warranty information...........................................................................1-3 Manual addenda...................................................................................1-3 Safety symbols and terms ....................................................................1-3 Specifications.......................................................................................1-3 Inspections ...........................................................................................1-4 Options and accessories.......................................................................1-5 2 Basic Measurements Introduction..........................................................................................2-2 Front panel summary ...........................................................................2-3 Rear panel summary ............................................................................2-6 Power-up..............................................................................................2-8 Display...............................................................................................2-17 Measuring voltage..............................................................................2-18 Measuring current..............................................................................2-22 Measuring resistance .........................................................................2-24 Measuring frequency and period .......................................................2-26 Measuring temperature ......................................................................2-28 Math...................................................................................................2-30 Measuring continuity.........................................................................2-34 Testing diodes ....................................................................................2-35 3 Measurement Options Introduction..........................................................................................3-2 Measurement configuration .................................................................3-3 Trigger operations................................................................................3-8 Buffer operations ...............................................................................3-17 Limit operations.................................................................................3-20 Scan operations..................................................................................3-22 System operations..............................................................................3-32 4 Remote Operation Introduction..........................................................................................4-2 Selecting a language ............................................................................4-4 RS-232 operation.................................................................................4-6 GPIB bus operation and reference.......................................................4-9 Status structure...................................................................................4-19 Trigger model (GPIB operation) .......................................................4-29 Programming syntax .........................................................................4-32 Common commands..........................................................................4-39 5 SCPI Command Reference SCPI Signal oriented measurement commands ..................................5-3 SCPI command subsystems reference tables ......................................5-7 Calculate subsystem ..........................................................................5-20 DISPlay subsystem............................................................................5-26 :FORMat subsystem..........................................................................5-28 ROUTe subsystem .............................................................................5-32 [SENSe[1]] subsystem ......................................................................5-37 STATus subsystem.............................................................................5-52 :SYSTem subsystem..........................................................................5-61 :TRACe subsystem............................................................................5-68 Trigger subsystem .............................................................................5-70 :UNIT subsystem...............................................................................5-74 A Specifications Accuracy calculations......................................................................... A-7 Optimizing measurement accuracy .................................................. A-10 Optimizing measurement speed ....................................................... A-11 B Status and Error Messages C Example Programs Program examples .............................................................................. C-2 D Models 196/199 and 8840A/8842A Commands E IEEE-488 Bus Overview Introduction .........................................................................................E-2 Bus description....................................................................................E-4 Bus lines ..............................................................................................E-6 Bus commands ....................................................................................E-8 Interface function codes ....................................................................E-15 F IEEE-488 and SCPI Conformance Information Introduction .........................................................................................F-2 List of Illustrations 2 Basic Measurements Model 2000 front panel .......................................................................2-3 Model 2000 rear panel.........................................................................2-6 Power module ......................................................................................2-8 DC and AC voltage measurements ....................................................2-19 DC and AC current measurements.....................................................2-22 Two- and four-wire resistance measurements....................................2-25 Frequency and period measurements.................................................2-27 Thermocouple temperature measurements ........................................2-28 Continuity measurements ..................................................................2-34 Diode testing......................................................................................2-35 3 Measurement Options Moving average and repeating filters...................................................3-4 Front panel triggering without stepping/scanning ...............................3-8 Rear panel pinout...............................................................................3-11 Trigger link input pulse specifications (EXT TRIG) .........................3-12 Trigger link output pulse specifications (VMC) ................................3-12 DUT test system ................................................................................3-13 Trigger link connections ....................................................................3-13 Operation model for triggering example ...........................................3-14 DIN to BNC trigger cable..................................................................3-16 Buffer locations..................................................................................3-18 Using limit test to sort 100Ω, 10% resistors......................................3-21 Front panel triggering with stepping..................................................3-24 Front panel triggering with scanning.................................................3-25 Internal scanning example with reading count option.......................3-27 Internal scanning example with timer and delay options ..................3-29 External scanning example with Model 7001 ...................................3-31 4 Remote Operation RS-232 interface connector .................................................................4-8 IEEE-488 connector...........................................................................4-10 IEEE-488 connections .......................................................................4-10 IEEE-488 connector location.............................................................4-11 Model 2000 status register structure..................................................4-19 Standard event status .........................................................................4-22 Operation event status........................................................................4-22 Measurement event status..................................................................4-23 Questionable event status...................................................................4-23 Status byte and Service Request (SRQ).............................................4-25 Trigger model (GPIB operation)........................................................4-29 Device action (trigger model)............................................................4-31 Standard event enable register...........................................................4-41 Standard event status register ............................................................4-43 Service request enable register..........................................................4-49 Status byte register ............................................................................4-51 5 SCPI Command Reference ASCII data format .............................................................................5-28 IEEE754 single precision data format (32 data bits).........................5-29 IEEE754 double precision data format (64 data bits) .......................5-29 Measurement event register...............................................................5-53 Questionable event register ...............................................................5-54 Operation event register ....................................................................5-55 Measurement event enable register ...................................................5-57 Questionable event enable register....................................................5-57 Operation event enable register .........................................................5-57 Key-press codes.................................................................................5-66 E IEEE-488 Bus Overview IEEE-488 bus configuration ................................................................E-5 IEEE-488 handshake sequence ...........................................................E-7 Command codes ................................................................................E-12 List of Tables 2 Basic Measurements Fuse ratings..........................................................................................2-9 Factory defaults..................................................................................2-13 Crest factor limitations ......................................................................2-18 3 Measurement Options Rate settings for the measurement functions.......................................3-7 Auto delay settings ..............................................................................3-9 Bus commands parameters for stepping and scanning counters .......3-28 4 Remote Operation Language supported.............................................................................4-4 RS-232 connector pinout .....................................................................4-8 General bus commands and associated statements............................4-14 IEEE-488.2 common commands and queries....................................4-39 5 SCPI Command Reference Signal oriented measurement command summary..............................5-3 CALCulate command summary ..........................................................5-8 DISPlay command summary ...............................................................5-9 FORMat command summary ..............................................................5-9 ROUTe command summary ..............................................................5-10 SENSe command summary ...............................................................5-10 STATus command summary ..............................................................5-16 SYSTem command summary ............................................................5-17 TRACe command summary ..............................................................5-17 Trigger command summary...............................................................5-18 UNIT command summary .................................................................5-19 B Status and Error Messages Status and error messages...................................................................B-2 D Models 196/199 and 8840A/8842A Commands Models 196/199 device-dependent command summary ....................D-2 Models 8840A/8842A device-dependent command Summary..........................................................................................D-6 E IEEE-488 Bus Overview IEEE-488 bus command summary ..................................................... E-8 Hexadecimal and decimal command codes...................................... E-11 Typical addressed command sequence ............................................. E-13 Typical addressed command sequence ............................................. E-13 IEEE command groups..................................................................... E-14 Model 2000 interface function codes ............................................... E-15 F IEEE-488 and SCPI Conformance Information IEEE-488 documentation requirements.............................................. F-2 Coupled commands ............................................................................ F-4 1 General Information 1-2 General Information Introduction This section contains general information about the Model 2000 Multimeter. The information is organized as follows: • Feature overview • Warranty information • Manual addenda • Safety symbols and terms • Specifications • Inspection • Options and accessories If you have any questions after reviewing this information, please contact your local Keithley representative or call one of our Applications Engineers at 1-800-348-3735 (U.S. and Canada only). Worldwide phone numbers are listed at the front of this manual. Feature overview The Model 2000 is a 6½-digit high-performance digital multimeter. It has 0.002% 90-day basic DC voltage accuracy and 0.008% 90-day basic resistance accuracy. At 6½ digits, the mul timeter delivers 50 triggered readings/sec over the IEEE-488 bus. At 4½ digits, it can read up to 2000 readings/sec into its internal buffer. The Model 2000 has broad measurement ranges: • DC voltage from 0.1∝V to 1000V. • AC (RMS) voltage from 0.1∝V to 750V, 1000V peak. • DC current from 10nA to 3A. • AC (RMS) current from 1∝A to 3A. • Two and four-wire resistance from 100µΩ to 120MΩ. • Frequency from 3Hz to 500kHz. • Thermocouple temperature from -200°C to +1372°C. Some additional capabilities of the Model 2000 include: • Full range of functions — In addition to those listed above, the Model 2000 functions include period, dB, dBm, continuity, diode testing, mX+b, and percent. • Optional scanning — For internal scanning, options include the Model 2000-SCAN, a 10-channel, general-purpose card, and the Model 2001-TCSCAN, a 9-channel, thermo couple card with a built-in cold junction. For external scanning, the Model 2000 is com patible with Keithley's Model 7001 and 7002 switch matrices and cards. • Programming languages and remote interfaces — The Model 2000 offers three program ming language choices (SCPI, Keithley Models 196/199, and Fluke 8840A/8842A) and two remote interface ports (IEEE-488/GPIB and RS-232C). • Reading and setup storage — Up to 1024 readings and two setups (user and factory de faults) can be stored and recalled. • Closed-cover calibration — The instrument can be calibrated either from the front panel or remote interface.

Warranty information General Information 1-3

Warranty information is located at the front of this instruction manual. Should your Model 2000 require warranty service, contact the Keithley representative or authorized re pair facility in your area for further information. When returning the instrument for repair, be sure to fill out and include the service form at the back of this manual to provide the re pair facility with the necessary information. Manual addenda Any improvements or changes concerning the instrument or manual will be explained in an addendum included with the manual. Be sure to note these changes and incorporate them into the manual. Safety symbols and terms The following symbols and terms may be found on the instrument or used in this manual. ! The symbol on the instrument indicates that the user should refer to the operating in structions located in the manual. The symbol on the instrument shows that high voltage may be present on the terminal(s). Use standard safety precautions to avoid personal contact with these voltages. The WARNING heading used in this manual explains dangers that might result in personal injury or death. Always read the associated information very carefully before performing the indicated procedure. The CAUTION heading used in this manual explains hazards that could damage the in strument. Such damage may invalidate the warranty. Specifications Full Model 2000 specifications are included in Appendix A. 1-4 General Information Inspection The Model 2000 was carefully inspected electrically and mechanically before shipment. After unpacking all items from the shipping carton, check for any obvious signs of physical damage that may have occurred during transit. (Note: There may be a protective film over the display lens, which can be removed.) Report any damage to the shipping agent immediately. Save the original packing carton for possible future reshipment. The following items are included with every Model 2000 order: • Model 2000 Multimeter with line cord. • Safety test leads (Model 1751). • Accessories as ordered. • Certificate of calibration. • Model 2000 User's Manual (P/N 2000-900-00). • Model 2000 Calibration Manual (P/N 2000-905-00). • Model 2000 Support Software Disk including TestPoint run-time applications, TestPoint instrument libraries for GPIB and RS-232, and QuickBASIC examples. If an additional manual is required, order the appropriate manual package. The manual pack ages include a manual and any pertinent addenda.

Options and accessories General Information 1-5

The following options and accessories are available from Keithley for use with the Model 2000. Scanner cards Model 2000-SCAN: This is a 10-channel scanner card that installs in the option slot of the Model 2000. Channels can be configured for 2-pole or 4-pole operation. Included are two pairs of leads for connection to Model 2000 rear panel inputs (Keithley P/N CA-109). Model 2001-TCSCAN: This is a thermocouple scanner card that installs in the option slot of the Model 2000. The card has nine analog input channels that can be used for high-accuracy, high-speed scanning. A built-in temperature reference allows multi-channel, cold-junction com pensated temperature measurements using thermocouples. General purpose probes Model 1754 Universal Test Lead Kit: Consists of one set of test leads (0.9m), two spade lugs, two banana plugs, two hooks, and two alligator clips. Model 8605 High Performance Modular Test Leads: Consists of two high voltage (1000V) test probes and leads. The test leads are terminated with a banana plug with retractable sheath on each end. Model 8606 High Performance Probe Tip Kit: Consists of two spade lugs, two alligator clips, and two spring hook test probes. (The spade lugs and alligator clips are rated at 30V RMS, 42.4V peak; the test probes are rated at 1000V.) These components are for use with high perfor mance test leads terminated with banana plugs, such as the Model 8605. The following test leads and probes are rated at 30V RMS, 42.4V peak: Models 5805 and 5805-12 Kelvin Probes: Consists of two spring-loaded Kelvin test probes with banana plug termination. Designed for instruments that measure 4-terminal resistance. The Model 5805 is 0.9m long; the Model 5805-12 is 3.6m long. Model 5806 Kelvin Clip Lead Set: Includes two Kelvin clip test leads (0.9m) with banana plug termination. Designed for instruments that measure 4-terminal resistance. A set of eight replacement rubber bands is available as Keithley P/N GA-22. Model 8604 SMD Probe Set: Consists of two test leads (0.9m), each terminated with a sur face mount device “grabber” clip on one end and a banana plug with a retractable sheath on the other end. 1-6 General Information Low thermal probes Model 8610 Low Thermal Shorting Plug: Consists of four banana plugs mounted to a 1- inch square circuit board, interconnected to provide a short circuit among all plugs. Model 8611 Low Thermal Patch Leads: Consists of two test leads (0.9m), each with a banana plug with a retractable sheath at each end. These leads minimize the thermally-induced offsets that can be created by test leads. Model 8612 Low Thermal Spade Leads: Consists of two test leads (0.9m), each terminated with a spade lug on one end and a banana plug with a retractable sheath on the other end. These leads minimize the thermally-induced offsets that can be created by test leads. Cables and adapters Models 7007-1 and 7007-2 Shielded GPIB Cables: Connect the Model 2000 to the GPIB bus using shielded cables and connectors to reduce electromagnetic interference (EMI). The Model 7007-1 is 1m long; the Model 7007-2 is 2m long. Models 8501-1 and 8501-2 Trigger Link Cables: Connect the Model 2000 to other instru ments with Trigger Link connectors (e.g., Model 7001 Switch System). The Model 8501-1 is 1m long; the Model 8501-2 is 2m long. Model 8502 Trigger Link Adapter: Allows you to connect any of the six Trigger Link lines of the Model 2000 to instruments that use the standard BNC trigger connectors. Model 8504 DIN to BNC Trigger Cable: Allows you to connect Trigger Link lines one (Voltmeter Complete) and two (External Trigger) of the Model 2000 to instruments that use BNC trigger connectors. The Model 8504 is 1m long. Rack mount kits Model 4288-1 Single Fixed Rack Mount Kit: Mounts a single Model 2000 in a standard 19- inch rack. Model 4288-2 Side-by-Side Rack Mount Kit: Mounts two instruments (Models 182, 428, 486, 487, 2000, 2001, 2002, 6517, 7001) side-by-side in a standard 19-inch rack. Model 4288-3 Side-by-Side Rack Mount Kit: Mounts a Model 2000 and a Model 199 side by-side in a standard 19-inch rack. Model 4288-4 Side-by-Side Rack Mount Kit: Mounts a Model 2000 and a 5.25-inch instru ment (Models 195A, 196, 220, 224, 230, 263, 595, 614, 617, 705, 740, 775, etc.) side-by-side in a standard 19-inch rack. Carrying case Model 1050 Padded Carrying Case: A carrying case for a Model 2000. Includes handles and shoulder strap. 2 Basic Measurements 2-2 Basic Measurements Introduction This section summarizes front panel operation of the Model 2000. It is organized as follows: • Front panel summary — Includes an illustration and summarizes keys, display, and connections. • Rear panel summary — Includes an illustration and summarizes connections. • Power-up — Describes connecting the instrument to line power, the power-up sequence, the warm-up time, and default conditions. • Display — Discusses the display format and messages that may appear while using the instrument. • Measuring voltage — Covers DC and AC voltage measurement connections and low level voltage considerations. • Measuring current — Covers DC and AC current measurement connections and current fuse replacement. • Measuring resistance — Details two and four-wire measurement connections and shielding considerations. • Measuring frequency and period — Covers frequency and period measurement con nections. • Measuring temperature — Describes the use of thermocouples for temperature mea surements. • Math — Covers the mX+b, percent, dBm, and dB math functions performed on single readings. • Measuring continuity — Explains setting up and measuring continuity of a circuit. • Testing diodes — Describes testing general-purpose and zener diodes.

Front panel summary Basic Measurements 2-3 Figure 2-1 Model 2000 front panel The front panel of the Model 2000 is shown in Figure 2-1. This figure includes important ab breviated information that should be reviewed before operating the instrument. 6 INPUT SENSE Ω 4 WIRE HI

MATH SCAN REM CH1 STEP CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 REAR TALK 5 LSTN SRQ

SHIFT TIMER 350V 1000V REL FILT STAT 4W BUFFER ! HOLD TRIG FAST MED SLOW AUTO ERR PEAK PEAK 2000 MULTIMETER

MX+B % dBm 1 DCV DCI dB CONT PERIOD TCOUPL LO INPUTS 500V PEAK

SHIFT 3 ACV ACI Ω2 Ω4 FREQ TEMP RANGE R F

DELAY HOLD LIMITS ON/OFF TEST CAL AUTO

LOCAL POWER EX TRIG TRIG STORE RECALL FILTER REL RANGE FRONT/REAR 3A 250V AMPS

SAVE SETUP CONFIG HALT GPIB RS232

OPEN CLOSE STEP SCAN 2 DIGITS RATE EXIT ENTER 8 4 7

1 Function keys (shifted and unshifted) Select measurement function (DC and AC voltage, DC and AC current, 2-wire and 4-wire re sistance, frequency, period, temperature with thermocouples), math function (mX+b, %, dBm, dB), or special function (continuity, diode test). 2 Operation keys EXTRIG Selects external triggers (front panel, bus, trigger link) as the trigger source. TRIG Triggers a measurement from the front panel. STORE Enables reading storage. RECALL Displays stored readings and buffer statistics (maximum, minimum, average, standard deviation). Use ▲ and ▼ to scroll through buffer; use and to toggle between reading number and reading. FILTER Displays digital filter status for present function and toggles filter on/off. REL Enables/disables relative reading on present function. and Moves through selections within functions and operations. If scanner card in stalled, manually scans channels. OPEN Opens all channels on internal scanner card; stops scanning. CLOSE Closes selected internal channel. STEP Steps through channels; sends a trigger after each channel. SCAN Scans through channels; sends a trigger after last channel. DIGITS Changes number of digits of resolution. RATE Changes reading rate: fast, medium, slow. EXIT Cancels selection, moves back to measurement display. ENTER Accepts selection, moves to next choice or back to measurement display. SHIFT Used to access shifted keys. LOCAL Cancels GPIB remote mode. 2-4 Basic Measurements 3 Shifted operation keys DELAY Sets user delay between trigger and measurement. HOLD Holds reading when the selected number of samples is within the selected tol erance. LIMITS Sets upper and lower limit values for readings. ON/OFF Enables/disables limits; selects beeper operation for limit testing. TEST Selects built-in tests, diagnostics, display test. CAL Accesses calibration. SAVE Saves present configuration for power-on user default. SETUP Restores factory or user default configuration. CONFIG Selects minimum/maximum channels, timer, and reading count for step/scan. HALT Turns off step/scan. GPIB Enables/disables GPIB interface; selects address and language. RS232 Enables/disables RS-232 interface; selects baud rate, flow control, terminator. 4 Range keys ▲ Moves to higher range; increments digit; moves to next selection. ▼ Moves to lower range; decrements digit; moves to previous selection. AUTO Enables/disables autorange. 5 Annunciators *(asterisk) Reading being stored. (diode) Instrument is in diode testing function. ))) (speaker) Beeper on for continuity or limits testing. (more) Indicates additional selections are available. 4W 4-wire resistance reading displayed. AUTO Autoranging enabled. BUFFER Recalling stored readings. CH 1-10 Displayed internal channel is closed. ERR Questionable reading; invalid cal step. FAST Fast reading rate. FILT Digital filter enabled. HOLD Instrument is in hold mode. LSTN Instrument addressed to listen over GPIB. MATH Math function (mX+b, %, dB, dBm) enabled. MED Medium reading rate. REAR Reading acquired from rear inputs. REL Relative reading displayed. REM Instrument is in GPIB remote mode. SCAN Instrument is in scan mode. SHIFT Accessing shifted keys. SLOW Slow reading rate. SRQ Service request over GPIB. STAT Displaying buffer statistics. STEP Instrument is in step mode. TALK Instrument addressed to talk over GPIB. TIMER Timed scans in use. TRIG Indicates external trigger (front panel, bus, trigger link) selected.

6 Input connections Basic Measurements 2-5

INPUT HI and LO Used for making DC volts, AC volts, 2-wire resistance measurements. AMPS Used in conjunction with INPUT LO to make DC current and AC cur rent measurements. Also holds current input fuse (3A, 250V, fast blow, 5⋅20mm). SENSE Ω4 WIRE Used with INPUT HI and LO to make 4-wire resistance measure HI and LO ments. 7 INPUTS Selects input connections on front or rear panel. 8 Handle Pull out and rotate to desired position. 2-6 Basic Measurements Rear panel summary The rear panel of the Model 2000 is shown in Figure 2-2. This figure includes important ab breviated information that should be reviewed before operating the instrument.

Figure 2-2 Model 2000 rear panel HI 2 34 5 WARNING: WARNING:NO INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICABLE PARTS,SERVICE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY. NO INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICABLE PARTS,SERVICE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY. MADE IN U.S.A. IEEE-488 (CHANGE IEEE ADDRESS

350V PEAK 1000V PEAK TRIGGER ! LINK FROM FRONT PANEL) ! RS232 LO SENSE Ω 4W INPUT 500V PEAK 1 3 5 2 4 6 VMC EXT TRIG !

1 ! FUSE LINE 250mAT (SB)100 VAC 120 VAC 120 LINE RATING 50, 60 400HZ 6

125mAT (SB) 220 VAC 240 VAC 17 VA MAX

CAUTION: CAUTION:FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,REPLACE FUSE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING. FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,REPLACE FUSE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

#2 EXTERNAL TRIGGER INPUT Trigger Reading #1 VOLT METER COMPLETE OUTPUT Reading

>72∝sec TTL HI TTL LO Complete >10∝sec TTL HI TTL LO

Basic Measurements 2-7 1 Option slot An optional scanner card (Model 2000-SCAN, 2001-SCAN, or 2001-TCSCAN) installs in this slot. 2 Input connections INPUT HI and LO Used for making DC volts, AC volts, 2-wire resistance measurements and for connecting scanner card. SENSE Ω4 WIRE Used with INPUT HI and LO to make 4-wire resistance measurements HI and LO and also for connecting scanner card. 3 TRIGGER LINK One 8-pin micro-DIN connector for sending and receiving trigger pulses among other instru ments. Use a trigger link cable or adapter, such as Models 8501-1, 8501-2, 8502, 8504. 4 RS-232 Connector for RS-232 operation. Use a straight-through (not null modem) DB-9 cable. 5 IEEE-488 Connector for IEEE-488 (GPIB) operation. Use a shielded cable, such as Models 7007-1 and 7007-2. 6 Power module Contains the AC line receptacle, power line fuse, and line voltage setting. The Model 2000 can be configured for line voltages of 100V/120V/220V/240VAC at line frequencies of 45Hz to 66Hz or 360Hz to 440Hz. 2-8 Basic Measurements Power-up Line power connection Follow the procedure below to connect the Model 2000 to line power and turn on the instrument. 1. Check to see that the line voltage selected on the rear panel (see Figure 2-3) is correct for the operating voltage in your area. If not, refer to the next procedure, “Setting line voltage and replacing fuse.” CAUTION Operating the instrument on an incorrect line voltage may cause damage to the instrument, possibly voiding the warranty. 2. Before plugging in the power cord, make sure that the front panel power switch is in the off (0) position. 3. Connect the female end of the supplied power cord to the AC receptacle on the rear panel. Connect the other end of the power cord to a grounded AC outlet. WARNING The power cord supplied with the Model 2000 contains a separate ground wire for use with grounded outlets. When proper connections are made, instrument chassis is connected to power line ground through the ground wire in the power cord. Failure to use a grounded outlet may result in per sonal injury or death due to electric shock. 4. Turn on the instrument by pressing the front panel power switch to the on (1) position.

Figure 2-3 Power module HI Model 2000 WARNING:NO INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICABLE PARTS,SERVICE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY. MADE IN U.S.A. IEEE-488 (CHANGE IEEE ADDRESS

350V PEAK 1000V PEAK TRIGGER ! LINK FROM FRONT PANEL) ! RS232 LO SENSE Ω 4W INPUT 500V PEAK 1 3 5 2 4 6 VMC EXT TRIG !

FUSE LINE LINE RATING

250mAT (SB) ! 125mAT (SB) 100 VAC 120 VAC 220 VAC 240 VAC 120 50, 60 400HZ 17 VA MAX Line Voltage Selector

CAUTION:FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,REPLACE FUSE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING. Fuse 2402 2

0 0 01 120

Spring Window Fuse Holder Assembly

Setting line voltage and replacing fuse Basic Measurements 2-9

A rear panel fuse located next to the AC receptacle protects the power line input of the instru ment. If the line voltage setting needs to be changed or the line fuse needs to be replaced, per form the following steps. WARNING Make sure the instrument is disconnected from the AC line and other equip ment before changing the line voltage setting or replacing the line fuse. 1. Place the tip of a flat-blade screwdriver into the power module by the fuse holder assem bly (see Figure 2-3). Gently push in and to the left. Release pressure on the assembly and its internal spring will push it out of the power module. 2. Remove the fuse and replace it with the type listed in Table 2-1. CAUTION For continued protection against fire or instrument damage, only replace fuse with the type and rating listed. If the instrument repeatedly blows fuses, locate and correct the cause of the trouble before replacing the fuse. See the optional Model 2000 Repair Manual for troubleshooting information. 3. If configuring the instrument for a different line voltage, remove the line voltage selector from the assembly and rotate it to the proper position. When the selector is installed into the fuse holder assembly, the correct line voltage appears inverted in the window. 4. Install the fuse holder assembly into the power module by pushing it in until it locks in place. Table 2-1 Fuse ratings Line voltage Fuse rating Keithley P/N

100/120V 220/240V 0.25A slow-blow 5⋅20mm 0.125A slow-blow 5⋅20mm FU-96-4 FU-91

2-10 Basic Measurements Power-up sequence On power-up, the Model 2000 performs self-tests on its EPROM and RAM and momentarily lights all segments and annunciators. If a failure is detected, the instrument momentarily dis plays an error message and the ERR annunciator turns on. (Error messages are listed in Appen dix B.) NOTE If a problem develops while the instrument is under warranty, return it to Keithley Instruments, Inc., for repair. If the instrument passes the self-tests, the firmware revision levels are displayed. An example of this display is: REV: A01 A02 where: A01 is the main board ROM revision. A02 is the display board ROM revision. After the power-up sequence, the instrument begins its normal display of readings.

High energy circuit safety precautions Basic Measurements 2-11

To optimize safety when measuring voltage in high energy distribution circuits, read and use the directions in the following warning. WARNING Dangerous arcs of an explosive nature in a high energy circuit can cause severe personal injury or death. If the multimeter is connected to a high energy circuit when set to a current range, low resistance range, or any other low impedance range, the circuit is virtually shorted. Dangerous arcing can result even when the multimeter is set to a voltage range if the minimum volt age spacing is reduced in the external connections. When making measurements in high energy circuits, use test leads that meet the following requirements: • Test leads should be fully insulated. • Only use test leads that can be connected to the circuit (e.g., alligator clips, spade lugs, etc.) for hands-off measurements. • Do not use test leads that decrease voltage spacing. These diminishes arc protection and create a hazardous condition. Use the following sequence when testing power circuits: 1. De-energize the circuit using the regular installed connect-disconnect device, such as a circuit breaker, main switch, etc. 2. Attach the test leads to the circuit under test. Use appropriate safety rated test leads for this application. 3. Set the multimeter to the proper function and range. 4. Energize the circuit using the installed connect-disconnect device and make measure ments without disconnecting the multimeter. 5. De-energize the circuit using the installed connect-disconnect device. 6. Disconnect the test leads from the circuit under test. WARNING The maximum common-mode voltage (voltage between INPUT LO and the chassis ground) is 500V peak. Exceeding this value may cause a breakdown in insulation, creating a shock hazard. 2-12 Basic Measurements Power-on defaults Power-on defaults are the settings the instrument assumes when it is turned on. The Model 2000 offers two choices for the settings: factory and user. The power-on default will be the last configuration you saved. The SAVE and SETUP keys select the two choices of power-on defaults. To save present configuration as user settings: 1. Configure the instrument as desired for USER default. 2. Press SHIFT then SAVE. 3. Use the ▲ and ▼ keys to select YES or NO. 4. Press ENTER. To restore factory or user settings: 1. Press SHIFT then SETUP. 2. Use the ▲ and ▼ keys to select FACTory or USER. 3. Press ENTER. Since the basic measurement procedures in this manual assume the factory defaults, reset the instrument to the factory settings when following step-by-step procedures. Table 2-2 lists the factory default settings. Basic Measurements 2-13 Table 2-2 Factory defaults Setting Factory default

Autozero Buffer Continuity Beeper Digits Rate Threshold Current (AC and DC) Digits (AC) Digits (DC) Filter Count Mode Range Relative Value Rate (AC) Rate (DC) Diode test Digits Range Rate Frequency and Period Digits Range Relative Value Rate Function GPIB Address Language Limits Beeper High limit Low limit mX+b Scale factor Offset Percent References On No effect On 4½ Fast (0.1 PLC) 10Ω 5½ 6½ On 10 Moving average Auto Off 0.0 Medium* Medium (1 PLC) 6½ 1mA Medium (1 PLC) 6½ 10V Off 0.0 Slow (1 sec) DCV No effect (16 at factory) (SCPI at factory) Off Never +1 -1 Off 1.0 0.0 Off 1.0

2-14 Basic Measurements Table 2-2 (cont.) Factory defaults Setting Factory default Resistance (2-wire and 4-wire)

Digits Filter Count Mode Range Relative Value Rate RS-232 Baud Flow Tx term Scanning Channels Mode Temperature Digits Filter Count Mode Junction Temperature Relative Value Rate Thermocouple Units Triggers Continuous Delay Source ½ On 10 Moving average Auto Off 0.0 Medium (1 PLC) Off No effect No effect No effect Off 1-10 Internal 5½ On 10 Moving average Simulated 23°C Off 0.0 Medium (1 PLC) J °C On Auto Immediate

Basic Measurements 2-15 Table 2-2 (cont.) Factory defaults Setting Factory default Voltage (AC and DC)

dB reference dBm reference Digits (AC) Digits (DC) Filter Count Mode Range Relative Value Rate (AC) Rate (DC) *DETector:BANDwidth 30 No effect 75Ω 5½ ½ On 10 Moving average Auto Off 0.0 Medium* Medium (1 PLC)

2-16 Basic Measurements GPIB primary address The GPIB primary address of the instrument must be the same as the primary address you specify in the controller’s programming language. The default primary address of the instru ment is 16, but you can set the address to any value from 0 to 30 by using the following step by step instructions. 1. Press SHIFT then GPIB. 2. Use the ▲ and ▼ keys to select ADDRess. Or, press ENTER. Once you have pressed ENTER, the unit automatically displays the address selection. 3. Use the and keys to toggle from ADDRess to the numeric entry. Notice the val ues are blinking. 4. Use the ▲ and ▼ keys to change the numeric entries to the desired address. 5. Press ENTER. See Section Four — Remote Operation for more GPIB information. Warm-up time The Model 2000 is ready for use as soon as the power-up sequence has completed. However, to achieve rated accuracy, allow the instrument to warm up for one hour. If the instrument has been subjected to extreme temperatures, allow additional time for internal temperatures to stabilize.

Display Basic Measurements 2-17 The display of the Model 2000 is primarily used to display readings, along with the units and type of measurement. Annunciators are located on the top, bottom, right, and left of the reading or message display. The annunciators indicate various states of operation. See Figure 2-1 for a complete listing of annunciators.

Status and error messages Status and error messages are displayed momentarily. During Model 2000 operation and pro gramming, you will encounter a number of front panel messages. Typical messages are either of status or error variety, as listed in Appendix B. 2-18 Basic Measurements Measuring voltage The Model 2000 can make DCV measurements from 0.1µV to 1000V and ACV measure ments from 0.1µV to 750V RMS, 1000V peak. Connections Assuming factory default conditions, the basic procedure is as follows: 1. Connect test leads to the INPUT HI and LO terminals. Either the front or rear inputs can be used; place the INPUTS button in the appropriate position. 2. Select the measurement function by pressing DCV or ACV. 3. Pressing AUTO toggles autoranging. Notice the AUTO annunciator is displayed with autoranging. If you want manual ranging, use the RANGE ▲ and ▼ keys to select a measurement range consistent with the expected voltage. 4. Connect test leads to the source as shown in Figure 2-4. CAUTION Do not apply more than 1000V peak to the input or instrument damage may occur. The voltage limit is subject to the 8 ⋅ 107V•Hz product. 5. Observe the display. If the “OVERFLOW” message is displayed, select a higher range until an o normal reading is displayed (or press AUTO for autoranging). Use the lowest possible range for the best resolution. 6. Take readings from the display. Crest factor AC voltage and current accuracies are affected by the crest factor of the waveform, the ratio of the peak value to the RMS value. Table 2-3 lists the fundamental frequencies at which the cor responding crest factor must be taken into account for accuracy calculations. Table 2-3 Crest factor limitations Crest factor Fundamental frequency

2 3 4-5 50kHz 3kHz 1kHz

Basic Measurements 2-19 Figure 2-4 DC and AC voltage Model 2000

measurements REM CH1 STEP CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 SCAN TALK LSTN SRQ MATH REAR DC Voltage

SHIFT TIMER REL FILT STAT 4W BUFFER HOLD TRIG FAST MED SLOW AUTO ERR 2001 MULTIMETER Source

Input Resistance = 10MΩ on 1000V and 100V ranges ; > 10GΩ on 10V, 1V and 100mV ranges. Caution : Maximum Input = 1010V peak Model 2000

REM CH1 STEP CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH SCAN CH9 CH1 MATH AC Voltage

TALK LSTN SRQ 8 0 REAR

SHIFT TIMER REL FILT STAT 4W BUFFER HOLD TRIG FAST MED SLOW AUTO ERR 2001 MULTIMETER Source

Input Impedence = 1MΩ and 100pF Caution: Maximum Input = 750V RMS, 1000V peak, 8 x 107 V•Hz Low level considerations For sensitive measurements, external considerations beyond the Model 2000 affect the accu racy. Effects not noticeable when working with higher voltages are significant in microvolt sig nals. The Model 2000 reads only the signal received at its input; therefore, it is important that this signal be properly transmitted from the source. The following paragraphs indicate factors that affect accuracy, including stray signal pick-up and thermal offsets. Shielding AC voltages that are extremely large compared with the DC signal to be measured may pro duce an erroneous output. Therefore, to minimize AC interference, the circuit should be shield ed with the shield connected to the Model 2000 INPUT LO (particularly for low level sources). Improper shielding can cause the Model 2000 to behave in one or more of the following ways: • Unexpected offset voltages. • Inconsistent readings between ranges. • Sudden shifts in reading. To minimize pick-up, keep the voltage source and the Model 2000 away from strong AC mag netic sources. The voltage induced due to magnetic flux is proportional to the area of the loop formed by the input leads. Therefore, minimize the loop area of the input leads and connect each signal at only one point. NOTE Shielded cables should be used for input circuits to avoid interference caused by conducting RF. 2-20 Basic Measurements Thermal EMFs Thermal EMFs (thermoelectric potentials) are generated by thermal differences between the junctions of dissimilar metals. These can be large compared to the signal that the Model 2000 can measure. Thermal EMFs can cause the following conditions: • Instability or zero offset is much higher than expected. • The reading is sensitive to (and responds to) temperature changes. This effect can be demonstrated by touching the circuit, by placing a heat source near the circuit, or by a regular pattern of instability (corresponding to changes in sunlight or the activation of heating and air conditioning systems). To minimize the drift caused by thermal EMFs, use copper leads to connect the circuit to the Model 2000. A banana plug generates a few microvolts. A clean copper conductor such as #10 bus wire is ideal for this application. The leads to the input may be shielded or unshielded, as necessary. Refer to “Shielding”. Widely varying temperatures within the circuit can also create thermal EMFs. Therefore, maintain constant temperatures to minimize these thermal EMFs. A shielded enclosure around the circuit under test also helps by minimizing air currents. The REL control can be used to null out constant offset voltages. NOTE Additional thermals may be generated by the optional scanner cards.

AC voltage offset Basic Measurements 2-21

The Model 2000, at 5½ digits resolution, will typically display 100 counts of offset on AC volts with the input shorted. This offset is caused by the offset of the TRMS converter. This offset will not affect reading accuracy and should not be zeroed out using the REL feature. The following equation expresses how this offset (VOFFSET) is added to the signal input (VIN): Displayed reading VIN ( )2 VOFFSET ( )2 = + Example: Range = 1VAC Offset = 100 counts (1.0mV) Input = 100mV RMS Displayed reading 100mV ( )2 ( ) 1.0mV 2 = + Displayed reading 0.01V ( ) 1 10–6 = + ( ) ⋅ V Displayed reading 0.100005 = The offset is seen as the last digit, which is not displayed. Therefore, the offset is negligible. If the REL feature were used to zero the display, the 100 counts of offset would be subtracted from VIN, resulting in an error of 100 counts in the displayed reading. See Section 3 — Measurement Options for information that explain the configuration options for DC and AC voltage measurements. 2-22 Basic Measurements Measuring current The Model 2000 can make DCI measurements from 10nA to 3A and ACI measurements from 1µAm to 3A RMS. NOTE See the previous discussion about crest factor in “Measuring voltage” in this section. Connections Assuming factory default conditions, the basic procedure is as follows: 1. Connect test leads to the AMPS and INPUT LO terminals. The front inputs must be used; place the INPUTS button in the FRONT position. 2. Select the measurement function by pressing DCI or ACI. 3. Pressing AUTO toggles autoranging. Notice the AUTO annunciator is displayed with autoranging. If you want manual ranging, use the RANGE ▲ and ▼ keys to select a measurement range consistent with the expected current. 4. Connect test leads to the source as shown in Figure 2-5. CAUTION Do not apply more than 3A, 250V to the input or the AMPS fuse will open circuit. 5. Observe the display. If the “OVERFLOW” message is displayed, select a higher range until a normal reading is displayed (or press AUTO for autoranging). Use the lowest pos sible range for the best resolution. 6. Take readings from the display.

Figure 2-5 DC and AC cur rent measure ments Model 2000 STEP CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH

SCAN REM CH1 TALK LSTN SRQ 8 CH9 CH1 0 MATH REAR

SHIFT TIMER REL FILT STAT 4W BUFFER HOLD TRIG FAST MED SLOW AUTO ERR 2001 MULTIMETER Current Source

Caution: Maximum Input = 3A DC or RMS

AMPS fuse replacement Basic Measurements 2-23

WARNING Make sure the instrument is disconnected from the power line and other equipment before replacing the AMPS fuse. 1. Turn off the power and disconnect the power line and test leads. 2. From the front panel, gently push in the AMPS jack with your thumb and rotate the fuse carrier one-quarter turn counter-clockwise. Release pressure on the jack and its internal spring will push the jack out of the socket. 3. Remove the fuse and replace it with the same type (3A, 250V, fast blow, 5 ⋅ 20mm). The Keithley part number is FU-99-1. CAUTION Do not use a fuse with a higher current rating than specified or instrument damage may occur. If the instrument repeatedly blows fuses, locate and cor rect the cause of the trouble before replacing the fuse. See the optional Model 2000 Repair Manual for troubleshooting information. 4. Install the new fuse by reversing the procedure above. See Section 3 — Measurement Options for information that explains the configuration op tions for DC and AC current measurements. 2-24 Basic Measurements Measuring resistance The Model 2000 can make 2-wire and 4-wire resistance measurements from 100µΩ to 120MΩ. Connections Assuming factory default conditions, the basic procedure is as follows: 1. Connect test leads to the Model 2000 as follows: A. For Ω2-wire, connect the test leads to INPUT HI and LO. B. For Ω4-wire, connect the test leads to INPUT HI and LO, and SENSE Ω4 WIRE HI and LO. Recommended Kelvin test probes include the Keithley Models 5805 and 5806. Either the front or rear inputs can be used; place the INPUTS button in the appropriate position. 2. Select the measurement function by pressing Ω2 or Ω4. 3. Pressing AUTO toggles autoranging. Notice the AUTO annunciator is displayed with autoranging. If you want manual ranging, use the RANGE ▲ and ▼ keys to select a measurement range consistent with the expected resistance. 4. Connect test leads to the resistance as shown in Figure 2-6. CAUTION Do not apply more than 1000V peak between INPUT HI and LO or instru ment damage may occur. 5. Observe the display. If the “OVERFLOW” message is displayed, select a higher range until a normal reading is displayed. Use the lowest possible range for the best resolution. 6. Take a reading from the display.

Figure 2-6 Two- and four wire resistance measurements Model 2000 REM CH1 Shielded Cable Basic Measurements 2-25 Optional shield

TALK LSTN SRQ STEP CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH SCAN 8 CH9 CH1 0 MATH REAR

SHIFT TIMER REL FILT STAT 4W BUFFER HOLD TRIG FAST MED SLOW AUTO ERR 2001 MULTIMETER Resistance Under Test

Note: Source current flows from the INPUT HI to INPUT LO terminals.

Model 2000 STEP CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH Shielded Cable Optional shield

SCAN REM CH1 TALK LSTN SRQ 8 CH9 CH1 0 MATH REAR

SHIFT TIMER REL FILT STAT 4W BUFFER HOLD TRIG FAST MED SLOW AUTO ERR 2001 MULTIMETER Resistance Under Test

Note: Source current flows from the INPUT HI to INPUT LO terminals. Shielding To achieve a stable reading, it helps to shield resistances greater than 100kΩ. Place the resis tance in a shielded enclosure and connect the shield to the INPUT LO terminal of the instrument electrically. See Section 3—Measurement Options for information that explains the configuration options for 2-wire and 4-wire resistance measurements. 2-26 Basic Measurements Measuring frequency and period The Model 2000 can make frequency measurements from 3Hz to 500kHz on voltage ranges of 100mV, 1V, 10V, 100V, and 750V. Period measurements can be taken from 2µs to 333ms on the same voltage ranges as the frequency. The instrument uses the volts input terminals to measure frequency. The AC voltage range can be changed with the RANGE ▲ and ▼ keys. The signal voltage must be greater than 10% of the full-scale range. CAUTION The voltage limit is subject to the 8 ⋅ 107V•Hz product. Trigger level Frequency and Period use a zero-crossing trigger, meaning that a count is taken when the fre quency crosses the zero level. The Model 2000 uses a reciprocal counting technique to measure frequency and period. This method generates constant measurement resolution for any input fre quency. The multimeter’s AC voltage measurement section performs input signal conditioning. Gate time The gate time is the amount of time the Model 2000 uses to sample frequency or period read ings. All settings of the RATE key (FAST, MEDium, SLOW) yield a gate time of one second. The Model 2000 completes a reading when it receives its first zero-crossing after the gate time expires. In other words, the reading is completed 1/2 cycle after the gate time has expired. For example, with a 1sec gate time to sample a 3Hz frequency, you may wait up to 3 seconds before the Model 2000 returns a reading. Basic Measurements 2-27 Connections

Figure 2-7 Frequency and Assuming factory default conditions, the basic procedure is as follows: 1. Connect test leads to the INPUT HI and LO terminals of the Model 2000. Either the front or rear inputs can be used; place the INPUTS button in the appropriate position. 2. Select the FREQ or PERIOD function. 3. Connect test leads to the source as shown in Figure 2-7. CAUTION Do not exceed 1000V peak between INPUT HI and INPUT LO or instru ment damage may occur. 4. Take a reading from the display. See Section 3—Measurement Options for information that explains the configuration options for frequency and period measurements. Model 2000

period measure ments REM CH1 STEP CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH SCAN CH9 CH1 MATH AC Voltage

TALK LSTN SRQ 8 0 REAR

SHIFT TIMER REL FILT STAT 4W BUFFER HOLD TRIG FAST MED SLOW AUTO ERR 2001 MULTIMETER Source

Input Impedance = 1MΩ in parallel with <100pF Caution: Maximum Input = 1000V peak, 8 x 107 V•Hz 2-28 Basic Measurements Measuring temperature The Model 2000 measures temperature with thermocouples. The temperature measurement ranges available depend on the type of thermocouple chosen. Thermocouples can be connected to the Model 2001-TCSCAN card, which plugs into the op tion slot of the Model 2000, or to an external thermocouple card, such as a Model 7057A, 7402, or 7014 installed in a Model 7001 or 7002 Switch System. Connections Figure 2-8 Thermocouple temperature

measurements 2001-TCSCAN +

Note: This thermocouple card must be inserted into a Keithley Model 2000. Note: Front or rear inputs can be used. Input HI Model 2000 REM CH1 STEP CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH - CH 2 Input

TALK LSTN SRQ SCAN 8 CH9 CH1 0 MATH REAR LO

SHIFT REL FILT STAT 4W BUFFER HOLD TRIG FAST MED SLOW AUTO ERR TIMER 2001 MULTIMETER OUT A HI OUT A LO

Configuration Basic Measurements 2-29

The following information explains the various configuration options for temperature mea surements. To select and configure the thermocouple measurement: Press SHIFT then TCOUPL. Three choices are available using the ▲ and ▼ keys: • UNITS — C, K, F (Centigrade, Kelvin, Fahrenheit). This parameter selects the displayed units for temperature measurements. • TYPE — J, K, T (thermocouple type). • JUNC — SIM, CH1 (simulated or referenced at Channel 1). Typically, a thermocouple card uses a single reference junction. The Model 2000 can simulate a reference junction temperature or use the reference junction on a switching card. Typical reference junction temperatures are 0°C and 23°C. A simulated reference temperature is the temperature of the junction where the thermocouple voltage is sensed. It is room temperature if the thermocouple wire is terminated to banana jacks and corrected directly to the multimeter. The accuracy of a temperature measurement depends on the accuracy of the reference junction. 2-30 Basic Measurements Math Model 2000 math operations are divided into four categories: • mX+b and percent • dBm and dB calculations • Statistics of buffered readings • Limit testing The first two categories are discussed here; buffered reading statistics and reading limit test ing are described in Section 3 — Measurement Options. The procedure to select and configure a math operation is summarized as follows: 1. Press SHIFT then the appropriate math key. 2. Configure the parameters for the math operation. Press ENTER when done. (Press SHIFT then the related math function to end the calculation.) NOTES Once enabled for a function, the mX+b and percentage calculations are in effect across function changes. The Model 2000 uses IEEE-754 floating point format for math calculations. MX + B This math operation lets you manipulate normal display readings (X) mathematically accord ing to the following calculation: Y= mX + b where: X is the normal display reading m and b are user-entered constants for scale factor and offset Y is the displayed result Basic Measurements 2-31 Configuration To configure the mX+b calculation, perform the following steps: 1. Press SHIFT then MX+B to display the present scale factor: M: +1.000000 ^ 2. Enter a value and units prefix. Use the and keys to choose a numerical place and use the ▲ and ▼ keys to increment or decrement the digits. 3. Press ENTER to confirm the M value and display the B value: B: +00.00000 m 4. Enter a value and units prefix. 5. Press ENTER to confirm the B value and display the UNITS designation: MXB 6. Scroll through the letters to change and press ENTER when done. The Model 2000 then displays the result of the calculation. Percent This item selects the percentage calculation and lets you specify a reference value. The dis played reading will be expressed as a percent deviation from the reference value. The percentage calculation is performed as follows: Percent Input - Reference Reference = ----------------------------------------- ⋅ 100% where: Input is the normal display reading. Reference is the user entered constant. Percent is the displayed result. Configuration To configure the percent calculation, perform the following steps: 1. Press SHIFT then % to display the present value: REF:+1.000000^ 2. Enter a reference sign, value, and units prefix. Use the and keys to choose a nu merical place and use the ▲ and ▼ keys to increment or decrement the digits. 3. Press ENTER when done. The Model 2000 will display the result of the calculation. The result is positive when the input exceeds the reference and negative when the input is less than the reference. Engineering units are used to show values in the range 1 nano to 1000G. Exponential notation is used above that range. 2-32 Basic Measurements dBm calculation dBm is defined as decibels above or below a 1mW reference. With a user-programmable ref erence impedance, the Model 2000 reads 0dBm when the voltage needed to dissipate 1mW through the reference impedance is applied. The relationship between dBm, a reference imped ance, and the voltage is defined by the following equation: V2IN /Z   REF  

dBm = 10 log 1mW --------------------------------

Where: VIN is the DC or AC input signal. ZREF is the specified reference impedance. NOTE Do not confuse reference impedance with input impedance. The input impedance of the instrument is not modified by the dBm parameter. If a relative value is in effect when dBm is selected, the value is converted to dBm then REL is applied to dBm. If REL is applied after dBm has been selected, dBm math has REL applied to it. Configuration To set the reference impedance, perform the following steps: 1. After selecting dBm, the present reference impedance is displayed (1-9999Ω): REF: 0000 2. To change the reference impedance, use the and keys to select the numeric po sition. Then use the ▲ and ▼ keys to select the desired value. Be sure to press ENTER after changing the reference impedance. NOTES dBm is valid for positive and negative values of DC volts. The mX+b and percent math operations are applied after the dBm or dB math. For example, if mX+b is selected with m=10 and b=0, the display will read 10.000 MXB for a 1VDC signal. If dBm is selected with ZREF = 50Ω, the display will read 130MXB.

dB calculation Basic Measurements 2-33

Expressing DC or AC voltage in dB makes it possible to compress a large range of measure ments into a much smaller scope. The relationship between dB and voltage is defined by the following equation: dB= 20 log VIN ----------------- VREF where: VIN is the DC or AC input signal. VREF is the specified voltage reference level. The instrument will read 0dB when the reference voltage level is applied to the input. If a relative value is in effect when dB is selected, the value is converted to dB then REL is applied to dB. If REL is applied after dB has been selected, dB has REL applied to it. Configuration To set the reference voltage, perform the following steps: 1. After selecting dB, the present reference voltage level is displayed: REF: +0.000000 2. To change the reference level, use the and keys to select the numeric position. Then use the ▲ and ▼ keys to select the desired value. Be sure to press ENTER after changing the reference voltage. NOTES The dB calculation takes the absolute value of the ratio VIN / VREF The largest negative value of dB is -160dB. This will accommodate a ratio of VIN = 1µV and VREF = 1000V. 2-34 Basic Measurements Measuring continuity The Model 2000 uses the 1kΩ range to measure circuit continuity. After selecting continuity, the unit prompts you for a threshold resistance level (1Ω-1000Ω). The Model 2000 alerts you with a beep when a reading is below the set level. To measure the continuity of a circuit, press SHIFT then CONT, set the threshold resistance level and connect the circuit. NOTE Continuity has a non-selectable reading rate of FAST (0.1 PLC). Connections Connect the circuit you want to test to the INPUT HI and INPUT LO terminals of the Model 2000. The test current flows from the INPUT HI as shown in Figure 2-9.

Figure 2-9 Continuity mea surements Model 2000 STEP CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH

SCAN REM CH1 TALK LSTN SRQ 8 CH9 CH1 0 MATH REAR

SHIFT TIMER REL FILT STAT 4W BUFFER HOLD TRIG FAST MED SLOW AUTO ERR 2001 MULTIMETER Resistance Under Test

Note: Source current flows from the INPUT HI to INPUT LO terminals. Threshold resistance level You can define a threshold resistance from 1Ω to 1000Ω. The factory setting is 10Ω. Follow these steps to define the resistance level: 1. Press SHIFT then CONT. 2. Use the and keys to choose a numerical place and use the ▲ and ▼ keys to in crement or decrement the digits. Enter a value from 1 to 1000. 3. Press ENTER to confirm your setting.

Testing diodes Basic Measurements 2-35

With a Model 2000, you can measure the forward voltage drop of general-purpose diodes and the zener voltage of zener diodes. To test diodes, press SHIFT then , set the test current range, connect the diode, and take a reading from the display. NOTE Diode test has a non-selectable reading rate of MEDium (1 PLC). Connections Connect the diode leads to the INPUT HI and INPUT LO terminals on the Model 2000. The test current flows from the INPUT HI terminal as shown in Figure 2-10.

Figure 2-10 Diode testing REM CH1 Model 2000 General-purpose

TALK LSTN SRQ STEP CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH SCAN 8 CH9 CH1 0 MATH REAR

SHIFT TIMER REL FILT STAT 4W BUFFER HOLD TRIG FAST MED SLOW AUTO ERR 2001 MULTIMETER diode

REM CH1 Model 2000 Zener

TALK LSTN SRQ STEP CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH SCAN 8 CH9 CH1 0 MATH REAR

SHIFT TIMER REL FILT STAT 4W BUFFER HOLD TRIG FAST MED SLOW AUTO ERR 2001 MULTIMETER diode

Range Note: Source current flows from the INPUT HI to INPUT LO terminals. You can set the test current range from the front panel. The choices are 1mA, 100µA, and 10µA. The factory test current setting is 1mA. To set the test current, do following: 1. Press SHIFT then . 2. Use the ▲ and ▼ keys to scroll through the three test current selections. The diode test measures voltages on the 3V range for the 1mA test current and the 10V range for the 100µA and 10µA ranges. If a reading is more than 10V, the Model 2000 displays the “OVERFLOW” status message.

2-36 Basic Measurements 3 Measurement Options 3-2 Measurement Options Introduction This section describes the front panel features of the Model 2000. For those measurement op tions accessible only by a remote interface, refer to Sections 4 and 5. This section is organized as follows: • Measurement configuration — Describes ranging, filtering, relative readings, digits of resolution, and measurement rate. • Trigger operations — Uses a trigger model to explain trigger modes and sources. • Buffer operations — Discusses the reading storage buffer and buffer statistics. • Limit operations — Defines how to set reading limits. • Scan operations — Explains the internal and external scanning capabilities. • System operations — Gives details on setup saving and restoring, selecting a remote in terface, and accessing test and calibration. Measurement Options 3-3 Measurement configuration The following paragraphs discuss configuring the multimeter for making measurements. See the end of Appendix A for information about optimizing readings for speed or accuracy. Range The selected measurement range affects both the ultimate digits and accuracy of the measure ments as well as the maximum signal that can be measured. The range setting (fixed or auto) for each measurement function is saved when changing functions. Maximum readings The full scale readings for every range on each function are 20% overrange except for the 1000VDC, 750VAC, 3ADC, 3AAC, and diode test ranges. Input values more than the maximum readings cause the "OVERFLOW" messages to be dis played. Manual ranging To select a range, simply press the RANGE ▲ or ▼ key. The instrument changes one range per keypress. The selected range is displayed for one second. If the instrument displays the "OVERFLOW" message on a particular range, select a higher range until an on-range reading is displayed. Use the lowest range possible without causing an overflow to ensure best accuracy and resolution. Note that the temperature and continuity functions have just one range. Autoranging To enable autoranging, press the AUTO key. The AUTO annunciator turns on when autorang ing is selected. While autoranging is selected, the instrument automatically chooses the best range to measure the applied signal. Autoranging should not be used when optimum speed is required. Note that up-ranging occurs at 120% of range, while down-ranging occurs at 10% of nominal range. To cancel autoranging, press AUTO or the RANGE ▲ or ▼ key. Pressing AUTO to cancel autoranging leaves the instrument on the present range. The AUTO key has no effect on the temperature, continuity, and diode test functions. 3-4 Measurement Options Filter FILTER lets you set the filter response to stabilize noisy measurements. The Model 2000 uses a digital filter, which is based on reading conversions. The displayed, stored, or transmitted read ing is simply an average of a number of reading conversions (from 1 to 100). To select a filter: 1. Press FILTER once if the FILT annunciator is off; press twice if FILT is on. 2. Enter the number of readings. 3. Select the type of filter you want (moving average or repeating), then press ENTER. The FILT annunciator turns on. When a filter is enabled, the selected filter configuration for that measurement function is in effect. Pressing FILTER once disables the filter. NOTE The filter can be set for any measurement function except frequency, period, continu ity, and diode test. Filter types The moving average filter uses a first-in, first-out stack. When the stack becomes full, the measurement conversions are averaged, yielding a reading. For each subsequent conversion placed into the stack, the oldest conversion is discarded, and the stack is re-averaged, yielding a new reading. For the repeating filter, the stack is filled and the conversions are averaged to yield a reading. The stack is then cleared and the process starts over. Choose this filter for scanning so readings from other channels are not averaged with the present channel. Figure 3-1

Moving average and repeating fil ters Conversion #10 #9 #8 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 Conversion #1 Reading #1 Conversion #11 #10 #9 #8 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 Conversion #2 Reading #2 Conversion #12 #11 #10 #9 #8 #7 #6 #5 #4 Conversion #3 Reading #3

A. Type - Moving Average, Readings = 10

Conversion #10 #9 #8 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 Conversion #1 Reading #1 Conversion #20 #19 #18 #17 #16 #15 #14 #13 #12 Conversion #11 Reading #2 Conversion #30 #29 #28 #27 #26 #25 #24 #23 #22 Conversion #21 Reading #3

B. Type - Repeating, Readings = 10 Measurement Options 3-5 Response time The filter parameters have speed and accuracy tradeoffs for the time needed to display, store, or output a filtered reading. These affect the number of reading conversions for speed versus ac curacy and response to input signal changes. Relative The rel (relative) function can be used to null offsets or subtract a baseline reading from present and future readings. When rel is enabled, the instrument uses the present reading as a relative value. Subsequent readings will be the difference between the actual input value and the rel value. You can define a rel value for each function. Once a rel value is established for a measurement function, the value is the same for all ranges. For example, if 50V is set as a rel value on the 100V range, the rel is also 50V on the 1000V, 10V, 1V, and 100mV ranges. Thus, when you perform a zero correction for DCV, Ω2, and Ω4 measurements by enabling REL, the displayed offset becomes the reference value. Subtracting the offset from the actual input zeroes the display, as follows: Actual Input – Reference = Displayed Reading A rel value can be as large as the highest range. Selecting a range that cannot accommodate the rel value does not cause an overflow condi tion, but it also does not increase the maximum allowable input for that range. For example, on the 10V range, the Model 2000 still overflows for a 12V input. To set a rel (relative) value, press REL key when the display shows the value you want as the relative value. The REL annunciator turns on. Pressing REL a second time disables rel. You can input a REL value manually using the mX+b function. Set M for 1 and B for any value you want. Pressing REL enables that value to be the relative value. See Section 2 for more information on the mX+b function. Digits The display resolution of a Model 2000 reading depends on the DIGITS setting. It has no ef fect on the remote reading format. The number of displayed digits does not affect accuracy or speed. Those parameters are controlled by the RATE setting. Perform the following steps to set digits for a measurement function: 1. Press the desired function. 2. Press the DIGITS key until the desired number of digits is displayed (3½ to 6½). NOTE Frequency and period can be displayed with four to seven digits. 3-6 Measurement Options Rate The RATE operation sets the integration time of the A/D converter, the period of time the in put signal is measured (also known as aperture). The integration time affects the usable digits, the amount of reading noise, as well as the ultimate reading rate of the instrument. The integra tion time is specified in parameters based on a number of power line cycles (NPLC), where 1 PLC for 60Hz is 16.67msec and 1 PLC for 50Hz and 400Hz is 20msec. In general, the fastest integration time (FAST (0.1 PLC) from the front panel, 0.01 PLC from the bus) results in increased reading noise and fewer usable digits, while the slowest integration time (10 PLC) provides the best common-mode and normal-mode rejection. In-between settings are a compromise between speed and noise. The RATE parameters are explained as follows: • FAST sets integration time to 0.1 PLC. Use FAST if speed is of primary importance (at the expense of increased reading noise and fewer usable digits). • MEDium sets integration time to 1 PLC. Use MEDium when a compromise between noise performance and speed is acceptable. • SLOW sets integration time to 10 PLC. SLOW provides better noise performance at the expense of speed. NOTE The integration time can be set for any measurement function except frequency, peri od, continuity (FAST), and diode test (MEDium). For frequency and period, this value is gate time or aperture. For the AC functions, MEDium and SLOW have no effect on the number of power line cycles. See the discussion on “Bandwidth” that follows. Measurement Options 3-7 Bandwidth The rate setting for AC voltage and current measurements determines the bandwidth setting: • Slow — 3Hz to 300kHz. • Medium — 30Hz to 300kHz. • Fast — 300Hz to 300kHz. Bandwidth is used to specify the lowest frequency of interest. When the Slow bandwidth (3Hz to 300kHz) is chosen, the signal goes through an analog RMS converter. The output of the RMS converter goes to a fast (1kHz) sampling A/D and the RMS value is calculated from 1200 digitized samples (1.2s). When the Medium bandwidth (30Hz to 300kHz) is chosen, the same circuit is used. However, only 120 samples (120ms) are needed for an accurate calculation because the analog RMS con verter has turned most of the signal to DC. In the Fast bandwidth (300Hz to 300kHz), the output of the analog RMS converter (nearly pure DC at these frequencies) is simply measured at 1 PLC (16.6ms). Table 3-1 lists the rate settings for the various measurement functions. The FAST, MED, and SLOW annunciators are only lit when conditions in the table are met. In other case, the annun ciators are turned off. Table 3-1 Rate settings for the measurement functions Rate Function Fast Medium Slow

DCV, DCI ACV, ACI Ω2W, Ω4W FREQ, PERIOD dB, dBm (ACV) dB, dBm (DCV) Continuity Diode test Notes: NPLC=0.1 NPLC=1, BW=300 NPLC=0.1 APER=1s NPLC=1, BW=300 NPLC=0.1 NPLC=0.1 N/A NPLC=1 NPLC=X, BW=30 NPLC=1 APER=1s NPLC=X, BW=30 NPLC=1 N/A NPLC=1 NPLC=10 NPLC=X, BW=3 NPLC=10 APER=1s NPLC=X, BW=3 NPLC=10 N/A N/A

NPLC = number of power line cycles. BW = lower limit of bandwidth (in Hz). APER = aperture in seconds. N/A = not available. X = setting ignored. 3-8 Measurement Options Trigger operations The following paragraphs discuss front panel triggering, the programmable trigger delay, the reading hold feature, and external triggering. Trigger model The flowchart of Figure 3-2 summarizes triggering as viewed from the front panel. It is called a trigger model because it is modeled after the SCPI commands used to control triggering. Note that for stepping and scanning, the trigger model has additional control blocks. These are de scribed in “Scan operations” later in this section.

Figure 3-2 Front panel trig gering without stepping/scanning Idle Control Source Immediate External Idle Event Detection Delay Device Action Output Trigger

The instrument is considered to be in the idle state whenever it is not performing any mea surements or scanning functions. From the front panel, the unit is considered idle at the end of a step or scan operation when the reading for the last channel remains displayed. To restore trig gers, use the SHIFT-HALT keys. Once the Model 2000 is taken out of idle, operation proceeds through the flowchart. Control source and event detection The control source holds up operation until the programmed event occurs and is detected. The control sources are described as follows: • Immediate — With this control source, event detection is immediately satisfied allowing operation to continue. • External — Event detection is satisfied for any of three conditions: • An input trigger via the Trigger Link line EXT TRIG is received. • A bus trigger (GET or *TRG) is received. • The front panel TRIG key is pressed. (The Model 2000 must be taken out of remote before it will respond to the TRIG key. Use the LOCAL key or send LOCAL 716 over the bus.) Measurement Options 3-9 Delay A programmable delay is available after event detection. It can be set manually or an auto de lay can be used. With auto delay, the Model 2000 selects a delay based on the function and range. The AUTO settings are listed in Table 3-2. Table 3-2 Auto delay settings Function Range and delay

DCV ACV FREQ DCI ACI Ω2W, Ω4W Continuity Diode testing 100mV 1ms 100mV 400ms 100mV 1ms 10mA 2ms 100Ω 3ms 1V 1ms 1V 400ms 1V 1ms 100mA 2ms 1kΩ 3ms 1kΩ 3ms 1mA 1ms 10V 1ms 10V 400ms 10V 1ms 1A 2ms 1A 400ms 10kΩ 13ms 100∝A 1ms 100V 5ms 100V 400ms 100V 1ms 3A 2ms 3A 400ms 100kΩ 25ms 10∝A 1ms 1000V 5ms 750V 400ms 750V 1ms 1MΩ 100ms 10MΩ 150ms 100MΩ 250ms

The delay function is accessed by pressing the SHIFT-DELAY keys. The present delay set ting (AUTO or MANual) is displayed. Use the ▲ and ▼ keys to select the type of delay. If MANual is chosen, also enter the duration of the delay. The maximum is shown following: 99H:99M:99.999S Press ENTER to accept the delay or EXIT for no change. Changing the delay to MANual on one function changes the delays on all functions to MAN ual. 3-10 Measurement Options Device actions The primary device action is a measurement. However, the device action block could include the following additional actions: • Filtering — If the repeating filter is enabled, the instrument samples the specified num ber of reading conversions to yeildl single filtered reading. Only one reading conversion is performed if the filter is disabled, or after the specified number of reading conversions for a moving average filter is reached. The output of filter feeds hold. • Hold — With hold enabled, the first processed reading becomes the “seed” reading and operation loops back within the device action block. After the next reading is processed, it is checked to see if it is within the selected window (0.01%, 0.1%, 1%, 10%) of the “seed” reading. If the reading is within the window, operation again loops back within the device action block. This looping continues until the specified number (2 to 100) con secutive readings are within the window. If one of the readings is not within the window, the instrument acquires a new “seed” reading and the hold process continues. • Channel closure — When stepping or scanning, the last device action is to open the pre vious channel (if closed) and close the next channel. Using the hold feature provides an auto settling time for the scanner relays. Each open/close transition will restart the hold process and a reading for each channel will not occur until the relay settles. Output trigger After the device action, an output trigger occurs and is available at the rear panel Trigger Link connector. This trigger can be used to trigger another instrument to perform an operation (e.g., select the next channel for an external scan). Counters The trigger model for stepping and scanning contains additional blocks for counting samples (the number of channels to scan) and counting triggers. These counters are explained in the para graph “Scan operations” later in this section. Reading hold (autosettle) When a hold reading is acquired as described in “Device actions”, an audible beep is sounded (if enabled) and the reading is considered a “true measurement”. The reading is held on the dis play until an “out of window” reading occurs to restart the hold process. When operating remotely or scanning, the hold process seeks a new “seed"“once it has been satisfied and the reading has been released. When operating from the front panel, the hold pro cess does not seek a new "seed" until the held condition is removed. Measurement Options 3-11 Hold example 1. Enable HOLD, select a window percentage and enter a count. 2. Apply test probes to a signal. Once the signal becomes stable enough to satisfy the hold condition, the reading is released, and the beeper sounds (if enabled). 3. Remove the hold condition by lifting the probes. Hold will then seek a new “seed”. External triggering The EXT TRIG key selects triggering from two external sources: trigger link and the TRIG key. When EXT TRIG is pressed, the TRIG annunciator lights and dashes are displayed to indi cate that instrument is waiting for an external trigger. From the front panel, you can press the TRIG key to trigger a single reading. Pressing the EXT TRIG key again toggles you back to con tinuous triggers. The Model 2000 uses two lines of the Trigger Link rear panel connector as External Trigger (EXT TRIG) input and Voltmeter Complete (VMC) output. The EXT TRIG line allows the Mod el 2000 to be triggered by other instruments. The VMC line allows the Model 2000 to trigger other instruments. At the factory, line 1 is configured as VMC and line 2 as EXT TRIG. (Changing this config uration is described in the optional Model 2000 Repair Manual.) A connector pinout is shown in Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3 Rear Panel Pinout Pin Number Description Rear panel pinout Pin 2 External Trigger Input 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Pin 1 Voltmeter Complete Output Voltmeter Complete Output 1 External Trigger Input 2 no connection * 3 no connection * 4 no connection * 5 no connection * 6 Signal Ground 7 Signal Ground 8

* Either pin 3 or 5 may be configured as an output instead of pin 1. Either pin 4 or 6 may be configured as an input instead of pin 2. See the optional Model 2000 Repair Manual for details. 3-12 Measurement Options External trigger The EXT TRIG input requires a falling-edge, TTL-compatible pulse with the specifications shown in Figure 3-4. In general, external triggers can be used to control measure operations. For the Model 2000 to respond to external triggers, the trigger model must be configured for it.

Figure 3-4 Trigger link input pulse specifica tions (EXT TRIG) Figure 3-5 Trigger link out put pulse specifi cations (VMC) Triggers on Leading Edge TTL High (2V-5V) TTL Low (≤0.8V) 2µs Minimum Voltmeter complete The VMC output provides a TTL-compatible output pulse that can be used to trigger other instruments. The specifications for this trigger pulse are shown in Figure 3-5. Typically, you would want the Model 2000 to output a trigger after the settling time of each measurement. Meter Complete TTL High (3.4V Typical) TTL Low (0.25V Typical) 10µs Minimum External triggering example In a typical test system, you may want to close a channel and then measure the DUT connect ed to the channel with a multimeter. Such a test system is shown in Figure 3-6, which uses a Model 2000 to measure ten DUTs switched by a Model 7011 multiplexer card in a Model 7001/ 7002 Switch System.

Measurement Options 3-13 Figure 3-6

DUT test system 1 DUT #1 2 DUT #2 OUTPUT 2000 MULTIMETER

2000 Multimeter 10 DUT #10 Card 1

Figure 3-7 7011 MUX Card The Trigger Link connections for this test system are shown in Figure 3-7. Trigger Link of the Model 2000 is connected to Trigger Link (either IN or OUT) of the Model 7001/7002. Note that with the default trigger settings on the Model 7001/7002, line #1 is an input and line #2 is an output. This complements the trigger lines on the Model 2000. 7001 or 7002 Switch System 2000 Multimeter

Trigger link con nections WARNING:NO INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICABLE PARTS,SERVICE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY. NO INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICABLE PARTS,SERVICE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY. HI WARNING:NO INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICABLE PARTS,SERVICE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY. MADE IN U.S.A. IEEE-488

350V ! PEAK LO MADE IN USA 1000V PEAK TRIGGER LINK INPUT 500V (CHANGE IEEE ADDRESS FROM FRONT PANEL) ! RS232

IN SENSE Ω 4W PEAK 1 3 5 2 4 6 VMC EXT TRIG !

OUT ! FUSE LINE 250mAT (SB) 100 VAC 120 VAC 120 LINE RATING 50, 60 400HZ

125mAT (SB) 220 VAC 240 VAC 17 VA MAX

CAUTION:FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,REPLACE FUSE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING. Trigger Link Trigger Link Cable (8501) CAUTION:FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,REPLACE FUSE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING. Trigger Link

For this example, the Model 2000 and 7001/7002 are configured as follows: Model 2000: Factory defaults restored (accessed from SHIFT-SETUP) External scanning, channels 1 - 10, no timer, 10 readings (accessed from SHIFT-CONFIG) External triggers (accessed from EXT TRIG) Model 7001 or 7002: Factory defaults restored Scan list = 1!1-1!10, Number of scans = 1 Channel spacing = TrigLink To run the test and store readings in the Model 2000 with the unit set for external triggers, press STEP or SCAN. The Model 2000 waits (with the asterisk annunciator lit) for an external trigger from the Model 7001/7002. 3-14 Measurement Options Press STEP on the Model 7001/7002 to take it out of idle and start the scan. The scanner's output pulse triggers the Model 2000 to take a reading, store it, and send a trigger pulse. The following explanation on operation is referenced to the operation model shown in Figure 3-8.

Figure 3-8 Operation model 7001or 7002 Press STEP to start scan 2000

for triggering ex ample Idle Bypass B Idle A

Wait for Trigger Link Trigger Scan Channel C Wait for Trigger Link Trigger Make Measurement E

Trigger D Output Trigger No Scanned Trigger F Output Trigger Made

10 Channels ? Yes 10 Measurements ? Yes No

Measurement Options 3-15 A Pressing EXT TRIG then STEP or SCAN on the multimeter places it at point A in the flowchart, where it is waiting for an external trigger. B Pressing STEP takes the Model 7001/7002 out of the idle state and places operation at point B in the flowchart. C For the first pass through the model, the scanner does not wait at point B for a trigger. Instead, it closes the first channel. D After the relay settles, the Model 7001/7002 outputs a Channel Ready pulse. Since the instrument is programmed to scan ten channels, operation loops back up to point B, where it waits for an input trigger. E F and Remember that the Model 2000 operation is at point A waiting for a trigger. The output Channel Ready pulse from the Model 7001/7002 triggers the multimeter to measure DUT #1 (point E). After the measurement is complete, the Model 2000 outputs a completion pulse (point F) and then loops back to point A, where it waits for another input trigger. The trigger applied to the Model 7001/7002 from the Model 2000 closes the next channel in the scan. This triggers the multimeter to measure the next DUT. The process continues until all ten channels are scanned and measured. 3-16 Measurement Options External triggering with BNC connections An adapter cable is available to connect the micro-DIN Trigger Link of the Model 2000 to instruments with BNC trigger connections. The Model 8503 DIN to BNC Trigger Cable has a micro-DIN connector at one end and two BNC connectors at the other end. The BNC cables are labeled VMC (trigger line 1) and EXT TRIG (trigger line 2). Figure 3-9 shows how a Keithley Model 706 Scanner can be connected to the Trigger Link of the Model 2000 using the adapter cable. With this adapter, a Model 706 could be substituted for the Model 7001/7002 in the previous example. With the Model 706 set for External Trigger ing, the test would start when the single scan mode is selected and initiated. If the Model 2000 trigger line configuration has been changed from the factory setting, the Model 8502 Trigger Link Adapter must be used to interface with instruments having BNC trig ger connections. It has two micro-DIN connectors and six BNC connectors, one for each trigger line. Figure 3-9 Model 8503 DIN to BNC Trigger Cable DIN to BNC trig ger cable WARNING:NO INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICABLE PARTS,SERVICE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY.

350V PEAK HI ! 1000V PEAK TRIGGER LINK KEITHLEY ! MADE IN U.S.A. RS232 IEEE-488 (CHANGE IEEE ADDRESS FROM FRONT PANEL) Channel Ready

LO SENSE W 4W INPUT500V PEAK 1 3 5 2 4 6 VMC EXT TRIG ! External

FUSE LINE 250mAT (SB) 100 VAC 120 VAC ! 125mAT (SB)220 VAC 240 VAC CAUTION: CAUTION:FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,REPLACE FUSE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING. FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,REPLACE FUSE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING. 2000 Multimeter LINE RATING 50, 60 400HZ 17 VA MAX 706 Scanner Trigger

Buffer operations Measurement Options 3-17

The Model 2000 has a buffer to store from two to 1024 readings and units. It also stores the channel number for scanned readings and overflow readings. In addition, recalled data includes statistical information, such as minimum, maximum, average, and standard deviation. The buffer fills with the requested number of readings and stops. Readings are placed in the buffer after any math operations are performed. Buffered data is overwritten each time the stor age operation is selected. The data is volatile; it is not saved through a power cycle. The following paragraphs discuss storing and recalling buffered data. Storing readings Use the following procedure to store readings: 1. Set up the instrument for the desired configuration. 2. Press the STORE key. 3. Using the , , ▲, and ▼ keys to select the number of readings desired. 4. Press ENTER. The asterisk (*) annunciator turns on to indicate a data storage operation. It will turn off when the storage is finished. 3-18 Measurement Options Recalling readings Use the following steps to view stored readings and buffer statistics: 1. Press RECALL. The BUFFER annunciator indicates that stored readings are being dis played. The arrow annunciator indicates that more data can be viewed with the , , ▲, and ▼ keys. 2. As shown in Figure 3-10, use the cursor keys to navigate through the reading numbers, reading values, and statistics. For any of the buffer statistics (maximum, minimum, av erage, statndard deviation), the STAT annunciator is on. 3. Use the EXIT key to return to the normal display. Figure 3-10

Buffer locations RANGE RANGE RDG NO. 10 Reading Value RDG NO. 9 Reading Value RDG NO. 8 Reading Value RDG NO. 7 Reading Value RDG NO. 6 Reading Value RDG NO. 5 Reading Value RDG NO. 4 Reading Value RDG NO. 3 Reading Value RDG NO. 2 Reading Value RDG NO. 1 Reading Value STD DEV Standard Deviation Value Average Average Value Min At XX Minimum Value Max At XX Maximum Value

Buffer statistics Measurement Options 3-19

The MAX AT and MIN AT values are the maximum and minimum values in the buffer. The AVERAGE value is the mean of the buffered readings. The equation used to calculate the mean is: n

∑ i 1 = Xi

y where: xi is a stored reading n = -----------------

n is the number of stored readings The STD DEV value is the standard deviation of the buffered readings. The equation used to calculate the standard deviation is:

n n        2        

∑ 1n-- Xi

X2i – ∑

n-1 -------------------------------------------------------------- y =

i 1 = where: xi is a stored reading i 1 =

n is the number of stored readings NOTE The Model 2000 uses IEEE-754 floating point format for math calculations. 3-20 Measurement Options Limit operations Limit operations set and control the values that determine the HI / IN / LO status of subse quent measurements. Limits can be applied to all measurement functions except continuity. The limit test is performed after mX+b and percent math operations. Unit prefixes are applied before the limit test, for example: • Low limit = -1.0, High limit = 1.0 A 150mV reading equals 0.15V (IN). • Low limit = -1.0, High limit = 1.0 A 0.6kΩ reading equals 600Ω (HI). You can configure the multimeter to beep or not when readings are inside or outside of the limit range. Setting limit values Use the following steps to enter high and low limit values: 1. Press the SHIFT-LIMITS keys to view the present HI limit value: HI:+1.000000 ^ This value represents the absolute value of that function. 2. Use the , , ▲, and ▼ keys to enter the desired value. Move the cursor to the right most position and use the ▲ and ▼ keys to move the decimal point. 3. Press ENTER to view the present LO limit value: LO:-1.000000 ^ This value represents the absolute value of that function. 4. Enter the desired value for the low limit. Pressing ENTER returns to the normal display.

Enabling limits Measurement Options 3-21 Figure 3-11 Using limit test to sort 100Ω, 10% resistors Use the following procedure to turn on the limits operation: 1. Press the SHIFT-ON/OFF keys to view the present beeper status: BEEP: NEVER 2. Use the ▲ and ▼ keys to change the beeper status (NEVER, OUTSIDE, INSIDE). Press ENTER when done. When the multimeter returns to the normal display, the HI/IN/LO status is displayed along with the reading. To disable limit testing, press SHIFT-ON/OFF again. An example of using lim its to sort resistors is shown in Figure 3-11. LO IN HI

90Ω LO Limit 110Ω HI Limit

3-22 Measurement Options Scan operations The Model 2000 can be used with an internal scanner card (Model 2000 SCAN or 2001-TCS CAN) or with external scanner cards installed in switching mainframes such as the Models 707, 7001, and 7002. The following paragraphs discuss various aspects of using scanning with the Model 2000. Connection precautions WARNINGS Connection information for scanner cards is intended for qualified service personnel. Do not attempt to connect the DUT or external circuitry to a scanner card unless qualified to do so. To prevent electric shock that could result in serious injury or death, adhere to the following safety precautions: • Before making or breaking connections to the scanner card, make sure the Model 2000 power is turned off and power is removed from all external circuitry. • Do not connect signals that will exceed the maximum specifications of the scanner card. If both the front panel terminals and the scanner card terminals are con nected at the same time, the maximum signal ratings of the front panel ter minals are reduced to the maximum signal ratings of the scanner card. As described in the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Stan dard IEC 664, scanner cards are Installation Category I and must not be connected to mains. Scanning overview A scanner lets you switch among a number of input signals to the Model 2000 for measure ment. The channel control and scanning capabilities depend on whether an internal or external card is being used, as well as on the capabilities of the scanner card. Refer to the documentation supplied with the scanner card for specific connection information. Using an internal scanner card The optional Model 2000-SCAN scanner card lets you step through or scan up to ten 2-pole channels or five 4-pole channels. The optional Model 2001-TCSCAN Thermocouple/General Purpose Scanner Card lets you multiplex one of nine 2-pole or one of four 4-pole analog signals into the Model 2000, and/or any combination of 2- or 4-pole analog signals. Using external scanner cards When using external channels, the switching mainframe controls the opening and closing of individual channels. To synchronize Model 2000 measurements with external channel closures, connect the Trigger Link lines of the multimeter and switching mainframe. Refer to “Trigger op erations” earlier in this section for details and an example on using external triggering.

Front panel scanner controls Measurement Options 3-23

In addition to the trigger keys discussed previously, front panel keys that affect scanner card operation include: • and — Allow you to manually step through consecutive internal card channels. • OPEN and CLOSE — Let you selectively open and close internal card channels. • SHIFT-CONFIG — Selects internal or external scanning, scan list, time between scans, and reading count. • STEP — Starts a stepping operation of consecutive channels, where output triggers are sent after every channel closure. • SCAN — Starts a scanning operation of consecutive channels, where an output trigger is sent at the end of the scan list. • SHIFT-HALT — Stops stepping or scanning and restores the trigger model to a non scanning mode. Using and keys The and keys can be used to manually scan through channels on the internal scanner card. With a scanner card installed in the option slot, press the key to manually increment channels or the key to manually decrement channels. The annunciator of the closed channel is lit. Hold down either key to manually scan through channels continuously. Press OPEN to open all channels. Using OPEN and CLOSE keys The OPEN and CLOSE keys control channels on the internal scanner card only. The keys allow you to directly: • Close a specific channel (or channel pair for 4-wire resistance). • Immediately open any internal closed channel (or channel pair for 4-wire resistance). With a scanner card installed in the option slot of the Model 2000, the following prompt is displayed when the CLOSE key is pressed: CLOSE CHAN:01 Use the , , ▲, and ▼ keys to display the desired channel (1 to 10) and press ENTER. The annunciator of the closed channel will be displayed on the front panel along with normal readings. Selecting a different channel from the one that is presently closed will cause the closed channel to open and allow a settling time before closing the selected channel. Channel relays will be closed according to the presently selected function. If a 4-wire func tion is selected, both the selected channel relay and the matching relay pair will be closed. Fixed 4-pole relay pairs are: • 1 and 6 (not available for Model 2001-TCSCAN) • 2 and 7 • 3 and 8 • 4 and 9 • 5 and 10 Pressing the OPEN key will immediately open any closed scanner card channel or channel pair for 4-wire resistance. 3-24 Measurement Options Stepping and scanning trigger model additions The trigger model presented in “Trigger operations” earlier in this section has some addition al capabilities when stepping or scanning. These are outlined below: • Timer — With this control source, event detection is immediately satisfied on the initial pass. Each subsequent detection is satisfied when the programmed timer interval (up to 99H:99M:99.99S) elapses. • Reading counter — For both stepping and scanning, the reading count can be entered from SHIFT-CONFIG. (This is referred to as the trigger counter over the bus.) The read ing counter can bypass the idle state. Operation will wait until the programmed control source event occurs. • Channel counter — For scanning, the scan list length (maximum channel less minimum channel) is used to bypass the control source allowing a specified number of device ac tions to occur. (This counter is referred to as the sample counter over the bus.) These additional blocks are shown in the trigger models of Figures 3-12 and 3-13. Uses of the timer control source, reading counter, and channel counter are shown in the scanning exam ples later in this section. No Figure 3-12 Idle

Front panel trig gering with step ping Control Source Immediate External Timer Event Detection Delay Device Action Yes More Readings ? Output Trigger Reading Count (Trigger counter)

Figure 3-13 Front panel trig gering with scan ning Idle Measurement Options 3-25No

Control Source Immediate External Timer Event Detection Delay Device Action Yes Yes More Readings ? Output Trigger No More Channels ? Reading Count (Trigger counter) Scan List Length (Sample counter)

3-26 Measurement Options Using SHIFT-CONFIG to configure stepping and scanning From the SHIFT-CONFIG key combination, you can select internal or external scanning, the minimum and maximum channels in the scan list, the time between scans, and the reading count. 1. To configure stepping or scanning, perform the following: 2. Select the desired measurement function. 3. Press the SHIFT-CONFIG keys to access the step/scan configuration. 4. Select the type of scan (INTernal or EXTernal) by using the ▲ and ▼ keys and pressing ENTER. 5. Select the first channel in the scan list (MINimum CHANnel) by using the , , ▲, and ▼ keys and pressing ENTER. 6. Select the last channel in the scan list (MAXimum CHANnel) and press ENTER to con firm. 7. The next selection is for timed scans. (This is the Timer control source in the trigger model.) It sets a user-specified interval for starting scans. If you choose timed scans, the Model 2000 prompts for a time interval: 00H:00M:00.000S Use the , , ▲, and ▼ keys to select a time interval and press ENTER to confirm. 8. Next, you are prompted for a reading count (RDG CNT). This can be less than, equal to, or greater than the scan list length (up to 1024). It is the number of readings that will be stored in the buffer. The effects of these choices are further described in the scanning ex amples. 9. Press ENTER when done to return to the normal display. Note that scanned readings are always stored in the buffer, up to the setting for RDG CNT.


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DACOR DTOV127 (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or page errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD DACOR DTOV127 (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary: Use and Care Manual Distinctive® Wall Oven Models: DTO127, DTO130, DTO130, DTO230, DTOV127, DTOV130, DTOV130, DTOV230 Style and color varies, model DTO230S shown Table of Contents Important Safety Instructions ...........................................1 Operating Your Oven ....................................................5 Care and Cleaning .....................................................14 Before You Call for Service...........................................18 Warranty and Service .................................................20 Français.....................................................................21 Important Safety Instructions

INSTALLER: LEAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS WITH THE APPLIANCE. CUSTOMER: READ THIS USE AND CARE MANUAL COMPLETELY BEFORE USING THIS APPLIANCE. SAVE IT FOR FUTURE REFER ENCE. For service and warranty information see page 20. If you have any questions, call: Dacor Customer Service (800) 793-0093 (U.S.A. and Canada) Monday — Friday 6:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Pacific Time Web site: dacor.com Have the complete model and serial number for your appliance available. The numbers are found on the appli ance data label, located inside the grill, below the control panel. Open the door to expose the grill. On double ovens, the label is located behind the top grill. Write these num bers below for future reference. Model number __________________________________ Serial number __________________________________ Date of purchase ________________________________ View data plate through grate Since Dacor continuously improves the quality and perfor mance of our products, we may need to make changes to the appliance without updating this manual. Visit dacor.com to download the latest version of this manual. State of California Proposition 65 Warnings: Important Information About Safety Instructions The Important Safety Instructions and warnings in this manual cannot cover all possible problems and condi tions that can occur. Use common sense and caution when installing, maintaining or operating this appliance. Always contact the Dacor Customer Service Team about problems or conditions that you don’t understand. Safety Symbols and Labels DANGER Immediate hazards that WILL result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING Hazards or unsafe actions that COULD result in severe personal injury or death. CAUTION Hazards or unsafe actions that COULD result in minor personal injury or property damage. DANGER IMPORTANT: To avoid the possibility of explosion or fire, do not store or use combustible, flammable or explosive vapors and liquids (such as gasoline) inside or in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. Keep items that could explode, such as aerosol cans away from the oven. Do not store flammable or explosive materials in adjacent cabinets or areas. WARNING WARNING - NEVER use this appliance as a space heater to heat or warm the room. Doing so may result in overheating of the appliance. WARNING WARNING - NEVER cover any slots, holes or passages in the oven bottom or cover an entire rack with materials such as aluminum foil. Doing so blocks air flow through the oven causing a fire hazard.

WARNING: This product contains one or more chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. WARNING: This product contains one or more chemicals known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm.READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Important Safety Instructions General Safety Precautions To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, serious injury or death when using your oven, follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

WARNING • If you receive a damaged product, immediately contact your dealer or builder. Do not install or use a damaged appliance. • Make sure that the oven has been properly installed and grounded by a qualified installer according to the accompanying installation instructions. Have the installer show you the location of the circuit breaker panel or fuse box so that you know where and how to turn off power to the oven. • Do not install, repair or replace any part of the oven unless specifically recommended in the literature accompanying it. A qualified service technician must perform all other service. • Before performing any type of service, make sure that power to the oven is turned off at the circuit breaker panel or fuse box. • Only use the oven for cooking tasks expected of a home appliance as outlined in this manual. This oven is not intended for commercial use. • DO NOT TOUCH THE SURFACES OF THE OVEN DURING OR IMMEDIATELY AFTER USE. • Make sure individuals who use the oven are able to operate it properly. • Never allow anyone, including children to sit, stand or climb on any part of the oven including the door. Doing so may cause tipping, damage, serious injury or death. • Do not leave children alone or unattended in the area around the oven. Do not allow children to play with the controls, pull on the handle(s) or touch other parts of the oven. • Do not store items of interest to children above the oven. Children could be burned or injured while climbing on the appliance. • Do not tamper with the controls. • To prevent the oven from tipping forward and to provide a stable installation, make sure the oven is secured to the cabinet according to the accompanying installation instructions. • Do not heat unopened food containers such as baby food jars and cans. Pressure build up may cause the container to burst and cause injury. • Do not use water on grease fires. A violent steam explosion may result. Smother any flames with a lid, cookie sheet or flat tray. Use baking soda or a foam extinguisher to extinguish flaming grease. Be careful to avoid getting burned. • Keep flammable items, such as paper, cardboard, plastic and cloth away from and out of the oven. Do not allow pot holders to touch hot surfaces. WARNING • Do not wear loose or hanging apparel while using the oven. Do not allow clothing to come into contact with the interior of the oven and surrounding areas during and immediately after use. • Do not use towels or bulky cloth as pot holders. • Do not use the oven for storage. • Clean and maintain the oven regularly as instructed in this manual. Keep the entire oven free of grease that could catch fire. • Do not touch the outside surfaces of the oven during the self-clean cycle. They will be hot. • Use cookware only for its intended purpose. Check the manufacturer’s recommendations before use to determine if a utensil is suitable for use in an oven. Certain types of glass, ceramic and earthenware are not suitable for use in the oven. Personal injury or damage may result from the improper use of cookware. • Exercise caution when opening the oven door. Let hot air or steam escape before looking or reaching inside. • Use extreme caution if adding water to food in the oven. The steam can cause serious burns or scalds. • Use only dry pot holders when removing food and cookware from the oven. Wet pot holders can cause steam burns. • For your safety, do not use the oven to cook without the convection filter installed. When the filter is not installed, the spinning fan blades at the back of the oven are exposed. • Do not allow food to sit in the oven for more than one hour before or after cooking. Eating spoiled food can result in food poisoning. • Do not leave objects, such as aluminum foil, the meat probe or cookie sheets on the bottom of the oven. Do not allow the broil element on the ceiling of the oven chamber to be covered up. Do not line the oven with aluminum foil or other materials. Doing so may cause the oven or the items in it to overheat, creating a fire hazard or causing property damage. • Non-stick coatings, when heated, can be harmful to birds. Remove birds to a separate, well-ventilated room during cooking.

1 Getting to Know Your Oven Parts of the Oven A Control panel Your oven’s control panel consists of touch keys and a display. Use the control panel to control all the oven’s features (sometimes called modes). B Air intake/Exhaust slots The oven draws air in through the intake slots to cool its internal parts. The air comes out through the exhaust slot at the bottom of the oven. Do not block or cover the air intake or exhaust slots. C Meat probe connector When you use the meat probe, insert the skewer into the meat and plug the other end into this connector. See the Using the Meat Probe section on page 11 for proper operation. On double ovens, only the upper oven is equipped with a meat probe connector. D Oven lights There are two oven lights inside the oven chamber so that you can easily see the food inside. Touch the light key on the control panel to turn them on. The bulbs are 120 volt, 20 watt, halogen. E Rack supports There are seven sets of rack supports inside each oven chamber. They support the adjustable oven racks. They are numbered from the bottom up. F Door gasket The door gasket prevents heat from escaping when the door is closed. G Self-clean latch The self-clean latch automatically locks the oven door during the self-clean cycle. The door latches for your safety. There are very high temperatures inside the oven during the self-clean cycle. H Broil element The broil element is located on the ceiling of the oven chamber. It is the source of top heat. J Convection fan* The convection fan blows heated air into the oven chamber during the convection cooking process. The convection filter covers it. K Convection element* The convection element heats the air that is blown into the oven chamber by the convection fan during the convection cooking process. The convection filter covers it. L Convection filter* The convection filter covers the convection fan. It helps prevent the transfer of taste from one food to another when you are cooking a whole meal. It also keeps the oven cleaner and covers the moving fan blades for safety purposes. M Oven rack Your oven comes with a set of standard racks and a GlideRack™ oven rack and a set of standard racks. The total number of racks depends on the model. N Bake element Hidden below the floor of the oven chamber is the bake element. It is the source of bottom heat.

P Recessed Oven Cell Bottom The recessed oven bottom is designed to allow a 30 minute oven steam clean. See page 16 for instructions.

* On double oven models, only the upper oven is equipped for convection cooking. Skewer Plug Meat Probe 2

Getting to Know Your Oven A B G H 7 C 6 D 5 J 4 2 3 E D M F 1 P N B B K L

3 Getting to Know Your Oven Control Panel Layout A START/CONTINUE key When you use the various features (or modes) on your oven, select the cook ing mode first, then touch the START key. Also, use the START key to start the timers. B Cooking mode keypad Select the type of cooking you want to perform by touching one of the cooking mode keys. Also includes the Self-clean and PROBE keys, and on double ovens, the PROOF key. Double ovens have two cooking mode keypads, one for the upper oven and one for the lower. C CANCEL · SECURE key Use this key to turn off your oven. This key sets all temperature settings back to zero and turns off any features (except the timer) that are currently in use. It also activates the lock-out feature. On double ovens, there is a CANCEL · SECURE key for each oven. D Display The control panel display provides various types of information about the oven, including the current time (once the clock is set), the current cook settings and the cooking temperature. See below for the symbols that appear on the display. E Number keypad When you want to set the temperature, cook time or the time, use the number keypad.

F Delay timed cooking keys Use these keys to set the oven to turn on or off automatically at a later time. On double ovens, there is a set of delay timed cooking keys for each oven. See page 10 for instructions.

G TIMER keys Use the TIMER 1 and TIMER 2 keys to time an event. The two timers operate separately from each other. You can use them even if the oven is not in use. They do not turn the oven on or off. See page 10 for instructions. H CLOCK key Use this key to set the clock. See page 5 for details. J Light key Located on the number keypad. If you need to turn the oven lights on or off, touch the light key. K Sabbath key (#) Use this key to start Sabbath mode. See page 13 for details.

B F A C G H G E D J K

Control Panel - Single Oven Control Panel - Double Oven

4 Operating Your Oven

Control Panel Settings Setting the Clock 1. Touch the CLOCK key. The colon between the minutes and seconds on the time display will begin to flash. 2. Enter the current time on the number keypad before the colon stops flashing. For example: For 12:08, touch 1-2-0-8 on the keypad. Touching the # key changes the AM-PM indicator. 3. Touch START. IMPORTANT • The clock cannot be set during delay timed cooking, if one of the timers is in use or if self-clean or Sabbath mode is active. • After a power failure, the time on the display may flash, indicating that the time may not be correct. • After touching the clock key, you must enter the time and touch START soon afterward. If you wait longer than six seconds between touching keys, the display will go back to the original setting. 24/12 Hour Clock (Military Time) The oven is set to 12-hour (non-military) time at the fac tory. 24 hour time is also known as military time. 1:36 PM = 13:36 military time. If you want to switch the clock to 24 hour time or switch from military back to regular time: 1. Touch and hold the CLOCK key for six seconds. The display will indicate the mode the clock is currently set to, 12 Hr or 24 Hr. 2. Touch the # key to change the clock mode. To leave the setting as is, do not touch any keys. 3. Touch CANCEL · SECURE to return to the main dis play. If you have set the clock to 24 hour time, the keypad will allow you to enter military time when set ting the clock. Setting the Temperature Scale You can select the temperature scale (Fahrenheit or Cel sius) the oven uses to display the cooking temperature. The oven is preset at the factory to Fahrenheit. To change the temperature scale: 1. Touch and hold the BROIL key (under UPPER OVEN on double ovens) for six seconds. 2. The display will indicate the temperature scale the control panel is currently set to, “F” or “C”. 3. Touch the # key to change the temperature scale. To leave the setting as is, do not touch any keys. 4. Touch CANCEL · SECURE. The control panel is now set to the new temperature scale. Turning the Control Panel “Beep” Off/On The control panel beeps any time you touch any of the keys or when various error conditions exist. It also beeps when a timer is done counting down (page 10) or whenever the oven performs certain preset functions, for example, pre-heat is complete. The tone may be silenced so that it does not function under the above conditions. To turn the control panel “beep” off (or on): 1. Touch and hold the START TIME key for six seconds, until “beep” appears on the display. 2. Touch the # key repeatedly to switch between “On” and “Off.” 3. Touch CANCEL · SECURE when the desired mode appears on the display. To change the control panel back to the previous mode, repeat the above steps. Before You Cook... • Dacor recommends turning the oven on for one hour at 500°F to burn off any residual oils used during the manufacturing process. Any of these oils left on the inner parts can cause an undesirable smell the first few times the oven is used. • PREHEAT: When you use your oven to bake or roast, it preheats automatically. The preheat cycle rapidly brings the oven chamber up to the proper cooking temperature. It takes several minutes to preheat the oven. Preheat time depends on the temperature set tings. The time may be longer depending on the type of electrical supply in your community. There is no preheat cycle for any of the broil modes. • After you pull food out of the oven, it will continue to cook. This process is called “carry-over.” The larger the portion of food, the longer it will cook. It is best to let the meat rest after it comes out of the oven for 10 to 15 minutes before carving. Doing so will allow the meat to retain its juices and make it easier to carve. CAUTION Do not allow acids (citrus juices, tomato sauces, etc.) to remain on the oven’s surfaces. The porcelain finish may stain or pit.

5

Racks Operating Your Oven To insert a GlideRack™ oven rack... You may use either rack type on any level inside the oven. WARNING To reduce the chance of burns, position the oven racks when the oven is cool. If you must reposition a rack when the oven is hot, use pot holders. To insert the standard oven racks.. 1. Insert the end of the rack with the safety notches into the oven first. 2. Attach both sides of the rack to the rack supports in the oven as shown in the diagram below. 3. Begin to slide the rack in, and then, lift up so that the safety notches clear the ends of the rack supports. 4. Push the rack all the way in with both hands. To remove the standard oven racks... • If you want to remove an oven rack, grasp it with both hands and pull gently straight out toward you until it stops. • To remove the rack completely, lift the front of the rack up about six inches and continue to pull it out. Lifting the rack releases the safety notches. The safety notches reduce the chances of a rack coming out of the oven accidentally. Back of rack Front of rack Rack support You can pull a GlideRack oven rack out further than the standard racks and still support heavy pots and pans full of food. It is great for heavier foods and the optional Dacor baking stone. 1. Align both sets of safety clips (right and left) on the back of the rack guides with the oven rack supports as shown below. NOTE: The diagram below shows instal lation with the rack guides extended but, the rack may be installed with or without the guides extended, whichever is easier. 2. Begin to slide the rack in, lifting the front safety clips over the front of the oven rack supports. 3. Push the rack all the way in. 4. Grasp the rack in the center of the front and pull. The rack should come forward while the guides remain in place. To remove a GlideRack oven rack... • Grasp the rack with both hands and pull it gently straight out toward you until it stops. • Lift up until the front safety clips just clear the front of the rack supports on the oven. Continue to pull out. Moving the end of the rack back and forth slightly, left to right, as you pull, will make it easier to remove. Rack guides Lift front safety clips over rack supports Front of rack

Standard Rack Safety notch Slide oven rack supports into slots on the rack GlideRack Oven Rack Back of guide Oven rack support Slide oven rack supports between back safety clips

6

Starting Your Oven Operating Your Oven oven reaches the set temperature (usually in 15 to 20 minutes), it will beep and “PRE-” will disappear. Care 1. Adjust the racks to the appropriate level. 2. Determine the best cooking mode for the type of food to be cooked. Select from the following... • CONVECTION BAKE* - A combination of the convection fan and a bottom heat source. Good for single rack items in a deep pan. • CONVECTION BROIL* - A combination of the convection fan and a top heat source. Good for items that do not need to be flipped, such as thinner cuts of meat, fish, and garlic bread. • PURE CONVECTION™* - Uses convection cook ing only for even heat. Use for baked goods and multiple rack cooking. • CONVECTION ROAST* - Combines top and bottom heat sources with the convection fan. Best for rib roasts, turkeys, chickens, etc. • BAKE - Cooks with a bottom heat source only. fully place your food in the oven. Excessive browning will occur if you put the food in during preheat. Turning Off Your Oven To turn the oven off, touch the CANCEL · SECURE key. On double ovens, touch the CANCEL · SECURE key under UPPER OVEN or LOWER OVEN. NOTE 1 2 1 2 After you turn off the oven, the cooling fans may continue to run until the oven’s internal parts have cooled down. Changing the Temperature 1 2 1 2 To change to a different temperature while the oven is on: 1. Touch the key for the current cooking mode. Touch the key for the current cooking mode. The symbol for 1 2 the current cooking mode appears on the display (for example BAKE). 2. Enter the temperature on the keypad (for example

Commonly used for basic recipes. • BROIL - Uses a top heat source alone. Use for grilling smaller cuts of meat or toasting bread. * Top oven only on double ovens. 1 2 1 2 3-7-5) and touch CONTINUE. IMPORTANT 1 2 If you increase the temperature by 50°F (28°C) or more, the oven will go into preheat mode to raise the temperature rapidly to the new setting. “PRE-” will

IMPORTANT • Do not leave the oven door open for long periods during cooking or broiling. • The oven door must remain closed while broiling in all broil modes. • The broil modes will not work when the meat probe is connected. See page 8 for detailed descriptions of the various cooking modes. 3. Touch the key for the desired cooking mode. The preset (jump-in) temperature will appear on the dis play along with the symbol(s) for the selected cook ing mode (see above). On double ovens, select the desired oven by touching the cooking mode key under UPPER OVEN or LOWER OVEN on the control panel. 4. To cook at the preset temperature, touch START. To cook at a different temperature enter it (for example 4-2-5) on the number keypad, then touch START. You can enter any temperature between 100°F (37°C) and 555°F (291°C). The suggested broil temperature is 555°F. Double ovens have only one START key. Use it to start both ovens. 5. If you are using Pure Convection or one of the bake or roast modes, “PRE-” for preheating, along with the current oven temperature will appear on the display until the oven reaches the set temperature. Once the 1 2 appear on the display. To prevent excessive browning Dacor recommends that you remove the food from the oven when “PRE-” appears on the display. If you lower the temperature, it is best to wait until the display indi cates the new lower temperature before you insert the food in the oven as well. Changing the Oven Cooking Mode To change to a different cooking mode while the oven is on, for example to change from Convection Bake to Bake: 1. Touch the key for the new cooking mode, for example BAKE. 2. Touch CONTINUE. Preset (Jump-in) Temperature Settings Your oven has a preset “jump-in” temperature setting for each of the cooking modes to reduce the need to always enter the temperature. See the table below. See Starting Your Oven for directions on how to cook at the preset temperature.

7 Operating Your Oven

Cooking Mode Preset Temperature Convection Bake 325°F (163°C) Convection Broil 555°F (291°C) Pure Convection 325°F (163°C) Convection Roast 375°F (191°C) Bake 350°F (177°C) Broil 555°F (291°C) Lock-Out Feature If you want to disable the keys on the control panel when the oven is not in use: • Push and hold the CANCEL · SECURE key for about three seconds. The control panel keys will stop work ing and “OFF“ will appear on the display. Only the CANCEL · SECURE and the oven light keys remain functional. On double ovens, touching either CANCEL · SECURE key locks the control panel for both ovens. • To reactivate the control panel, touch and hold the CANCEL · SECURE key for three seconds. NOTE Using the lock-out feature turns off the timers if they are in use. 12 Hour Timer Feature Your oven is equipped with a feature that automatically turns it off after 12 hours of continuous use. The 12 hour timer resets if you change the cooking temperature or cooking mode. The oven ships from the factory with the 12 hour timer enabled. NOTE The 12 hour timer is disabled when the Sabbath feature is in use. To disable or enable the 12 hour timer feature. • With the oven off, push and hold the TIMER 1 key for about ten seconds, until the control panel beeps and “12Hr” appears on the display. “ON” will appear on the display if the 12 hour timer is enabled. • Push the # key to disable (or enable) the 12 hour timer. • Push CANCEL · SECURE to save the changes and return to the clock display. Understanding the Various Oven Modes The three basic styles of cooking in an oven are: Baking - The gentle cooking of dry goods such as cookies, cakes, soufflés, etc. Roasting - The cooking of meats or vegetables over a period of time. Broiling - Cooking with an intense heat for a short amount of time. Bake Uses only a heat source from below the food. This mode is the stand-by, non-convection mode. All baked items will 1 2 turn out nicely in this mode. Baking Tips • For best results, use a single rack when using bake mode. For cooking on multiple racks, Dacor recom mends using one of the convection modes. • Follow your recipe’s original cooking time and tem perature. • Do not open the oven door frequently during baking. Look through the oven door window to check the progress of baking whenever possible. • Use the timers to determine baking time. • Wait until the shortest recommended baking time before checking the food. For most baked goods, a wooden toothpick placed in the center should come clean when the food is done. Your oven offers three convection cooking modes... • Pure Convection • Convection Bake • Convection Roast As a general rule, in the convection modes time is about 25% shorter. Set the timer 15 minutes before the shortest stated time and add more time if necessary. For Pure Convection and Convection Bake modes... Some recipes, especially those that are homemade, may require adjustment and testing when converting from standard to convection baking. If you are unsure how to convert a recipe, begin by preparing the recipe using the standard bake settings. If the food is not cooked to your satisfaction during this first convection trial, adjust one recipe variable at a time (such as cooking time, rack position, or temperature) and repeat the convection test. If necessary, continue adjust ing one recipe variable at a time until you get satisfactory results.

8

Pure Convection Operating Your Oven Your oven offers two broil modes... The uniform air circulation provided by Pure Convection allows you to use more oven capacity at once. Use this 1 2 mode for single rack baking, multiple rack baking, roast ing and preparation of complete meals. Many foods, such as pizzas, cakes, cookies, biscuits, muffins, rolls and frozen convenience foods can be successfully prepared on two or three racks at a time. Pure Convection is also good for whole roasted duck, lamb shoulder and short leg of lamb. AIR FLOW For multiple rack baking... • Typically, when baking on two racks with your oven, use rack positions #3 and #5 (counting from the bottom up). When baking on three racks, use rack positions #2, #4 and #6. • When adapting a single rack recipe to multiple rack baking, it may be necessary to add to the baking time due to the extra bulk of the food in the oven. Convection Bake Use this mode for single rack baking. The combination of the convection fan and bottom heat source 1 2 is best for fruit crisps, custard pies, double-crusted fruit 1 2 pies, quiches, yeast breads in a loaf pan and popovers. Also, items baked in a deep ceramic dish or earthen ware clay pots are best in this mode. Most of these items cook in a deep pan and require browning on the top and bottom. Convection Roast Your oven’s Convection Roast mode uses a combination of the convection fan and heat sources above and below the 1 2 1 2 food. It is best for rib roasts, turkeys, chickens, etc. • Broil • Convection Broil WARNING • Use the broil and convection broil modes only with the oven door completely closed. • To avoid damage to the meat probe, remove it from the oven when using either of the broil modes. If the meat probe is connected the broil modes will not start. The meat probe symbol will flash when you attempt to start the oven in one of the broil modes with the meat probe connected. Broiling is a quick, flavorful way to prepare many foods, including steaks, chicken, chops, hamburgers and fish. Broil Uses a top heat source. It is best for broiling smaller amounts of food. 1 2 Convection Broil This mode uses a combination of the convection fan and a top heat source. It is best for items that do not need to 1 2 1 2 be flipped such as, thinner cuts of meat, fish and garlic bread. Broiling Tips • To reduce the chance of overcooking, use rack posi tions 1 through 4. Results will vary based on the type of food being broiled and the rack position used. • It is normal and necessary for some smoke to be present to give the food a broiled flavor. • Setting the timer is recommended to time the broiling process. • Always use a broiler pan and grill to provide drainage for excess fat and grease. Doing so will reduce spat ter, smoke and flare-ups. • Start with a room temperature broiler pan for even cooking. • Use tongs or a spatula to turn and remove meats. Never pierce meat with a fork because the natural juices will escape. • Broil food on the first side for a little more than half of the recommended time, then season and turn. Season the second side just before removing the food from the oven.

9

Timers Operating Your Oven Delay Timed Cooking Features WARNING The timers on your oven do not turn the oven on or off. They are only for timing purposes. When you want to turn the oven off automatically, use the Delay Timed Cooking Features. NOTE Touching the CANCEL · SECURE key does NOT reset or stop the timers. Your oven is equipped with two built-in timers... • You can use both of them at the same time. • You can time from 1 minute to 99 hours and 59 minutes. • The timer symbol appears on the display when one or 1 2 both of the timers is in use. To use the timers on your oven... 1. Touch the TIMER 1 or TIMER 2 key. 2. Enter the hours and minutes to be timed on the keypad and touch START. To enter 11 hours, 30 minutes, touch 1-1-3-0. To time 25 minutes, touch 2-5. When you touch START, the time will appear on the display and begin to count down. When the timer is done counting down, 0:00 will appear on the display. The timer number will flash on the display and the alarm (a beeping sound) will sound. The alarms for Timer 1 and Timer 2 have different patterns. Timer Alarm Pattern 1 2 1 1 second on, 1 second off, repeat 2 1 second on, 1 second off, 2 seconds on If you want to set the oven to automatically turn itself on or off at a later time, you can use the delay timed fea tures. Things to Know About Delay Timed Cooking • The delay timed options work for all of the various cook modes, except broil and convection broil. • You may use the timers while using the delay timed features. The timers do not have an effect on any of the delay timed cooking options. • The delay timed cycle can be canceled at any time by pushing CANCEL · SECURE. WARNING Food safety is an important consideration when using the delay timed features. To avoid potential sickness and the spoiling of food, take the following steps: • Avoid using foods that will spoil while waiting for the oven to start cooking. Typical foods to avoid include: those containing eggs and dairy products, cream soups and cooked or uncooked meats, poultry and fish. • Do not allow foods to remain in the oven after it turns completely off. When the temperature drops below 140°F (60°C), bacteria can develop (after hold mode). • If cooking will not begin immediately, place only very cold or frozen food into the oven. Most unfrozen foods should never stand in the oven for more than two hours before cooking begins. The Three Ways to Use Delay Timed Cooking • Set the time the oven turns on (START TIME) and set

1 2 1 second off, repeat it to turn off at a later time using either the COOK TIME key or the STOP TIME key.

When the alarm sounds, touch either TIMER key to stop the alarm. Touch CLOCK to return to the main display. While a timer is running you can... • Touch CLOCK to view the current time. • Touch TIMER 1 to view the time left on (or set) timer 1. • Touch TIMER 2 to view the time left on (or set) timer 2. To change the amount of time on a timer... 1. Touch the TIMER 1 or TIMER 2 key. 2. Enter the new time on the keypad and touch START. To stop a timer before time runs out... 1. Touch the TIMER 1 or TIMER 2 key twice. The timer will stop and the display will clear. 2. Touch CLOCK to return to the main display. • Set the START TIME only, then turn the oven off manu ally when you are done cooking. • Turn the oven on manually and set it to turn off at a later time using either the COOK TIME key or the STOP TIME key. About the 3 Delay Timed Settings The delay timed cooking keys are: • START TIME: The time the oven starts cooking • COOK TIME: The amount of time the oven cooks before it goes into hold mode. • STOP TIME: The clock time the oven turns off and goes into hold mode. When you set 2 of the 3 above, the oven automatically calculates the third.

10

About Hold Mode Operating Your Oven Other Things to Know About Delayed • When you set the oven to stop cooking using the COOK TIME or STOP TIME keys, it will go into “hold” mode (HLd appears on the display) when it reaches the end of the cook time you have set. The oven will keep the temperature at 150°F (66°C) for two hours. • Touch CANCEL · SECURE to turn the oven all the way off. • To avoid sickness, do not allow foods to remain in the oven after it is off (after hold mode turns off). Using Delay Timed Cooking NOTE Delay-timed cooking cannot be used in Sabbath mode. 1. Adjust the racks to the appropriate level. 2. Put the food in the oven. 3. Touch the key for the desired cooking mode (except Broil or Convection Broil). 4. Enter the desired cooking temperature on the number keypad. 5. If you want to turn the oven on immediately and turn off automatically at a later time, skip to step 8. 6. Touch the START TIME key. 7. Enter the time you want the oven to start on the keypad. For 12:35, touch 1-2-3-5. You may enter a time up to 22 hours and 59 minutes ahead of the present time. Touch # to change “AM” or “PM.” 8. If you want to set the stop time or cooking duration, touch either the STOP TIME or COOK TIME key (otherwise skip to step 9). Using the COOK TIME key allows you to determine when the oven will stop cook ing by entering the amount of time the oven is on. Using the STOP TIME key allows you to determine when the oven will stop cooking by entering the clock time. Using either key achieves the same result. 9. Touch START. 10. If you entered a START TIME, the oven will start at the start time entered. 11. If you entered a COOK TIME or STOP TIME the oven will cook until the time entered and then, go into hold mode. IMPORTANT The regular pre-heat feature (see page 5 for description) is disabled when using the Delay Timed Cooking features. The additional time required to reach the cooking temperature must be included in the amount of cooking time. The amount of cooking time required increases with the cooking temperature and the amount of food. Timed Cooking When the oven is in delay timed mode... Push the CLOCK key to view the time. Push the START TIME key to view the current start time setting. Push the STOP TIME key to view the current stop time setting. Push the COOK TIME key to view the current cook time setting. Using the Meat Probe When you cook foods like roasts and poultry, the internal temperature is the best way to tell when the food is prop erly cooked. Your oven’s meat probe is an easy way to take the guesswork out of roasting. You can use it to cook food to the exact temperature you desire. The probe can be set from (38°C) to 200°F (93°C). WARNING • To avoid the possibility of burns, use hot pads to handle, connect and unplug the meat probe when the oven is hot. • Use the handles to insert and remove the meat probe’s skewer and to connect it to the oven. Pushing or pulling on either end of the cable could damage the meat probe. To avoid breaking the meat probe, make sure the food is completely defrosted before inserting the skewer. • To prevent damage, never leave the meat probe inside the oven when it is not being used, especially during the self-clean cycle. • Using a meat probe other than the one provided with your oven may result in damage to the probe and/or the oven. NOTE • The meat probe does not work with Broil or Convection Broil and Sabbath modes. Plug in the meat probe when using the above modes, the meat probe symbol will flash indicating an error. • If the meat probe is accidently disconnected after the PROBE key is touched, the meat probe symbol will flash and the error message “OPn” will appear on the display. To use the meat probe... 1. Prepare the meat for cooking prior to setting the oven. Insert the meat probe skewer into the center of the meat. Make sure that the skewer is not inside any fatty portions of the meat and does not touch any bones. The point should rest in the thickest part of the meat. When you are cooking fowl, the tip of the skewer should rest toward the center of the bird. continued...

11 Operating Your Oven

Using the Meat Probe (cont.) 2. Before placing the meat in the oven and with the door closed, push the BAKE, CONV BAKE, PURE CONV or CONV ROAST key. The preset temperature will appear on the display. If you want to cook using a different oven temperature, enter it on the number keypad. 3. Touch START. 4. Allow the oven to preheat. Excessive browning may occur if the meat is placed in the oven during preheat mode (when “PRE-” appears on the display). Once the oven has preheated (“PRE-” disappears), put the meat in the oven using pot holders. Insert the meat probe plug into the connector inside the oven. 5. Push the PROBE key. The preset probe temperature (160°F/71°C), as well at the probe symbol, will appear on the display. If you want to cook using a different probe temperature, enter it on the keypad. Use the USDA Minimum Safe Cooking Temperature Chart as a guideline for the To cancel meat probe operation while the oven is cooking... • Touch the CANCEL · SECURE key. Important details about the meat probe: • You must select the specific cooking mode (BAKE, CONV BAKE, PURE CONV or CONV ROAST) before you touch the PROBE key. • When using the meat probe feature the preheat cycle is disabled. For best results, select the mode and allow the oven to preheat prior to starting the meat probe feature. • The meat probe function will automatically cancel after 30 seconds if the meat probe is not connected. The meat probe symbol will flash on the display. • The meat probe feature takes precedence over the delay timed cooking feature. The oven will continue to cook the meat until it reaches the selected meat probe temperature regardless of the STOP TIME or COOK TIME setting, then go into hold mode.

type of meat you are cooking. 1 2 USDA Minimum Safe Internal Cooking

6. Touch START. If you do not touch START, Probe mode will not start. When the meat probe is in use, the oven will automati cally control the cooking time. The temperature on the display during cooking is the temperature measured inside the meat. The oven will continue to cook until the meat temperature reaches the temperature you have entered. When the meat is done, the oven will go into hold mode. The temperature will reduce to 150°F (66°C) for two hours to keep the meat warm and safe for serving. To prevent sickness, do not allow foods to remain in the oven after it has turned off. Touch CANCEL · SECURE to cancel hold mode and turn the oven completely off. To change the meat probe temperature during cooking... 1. Touch PROBE. The current probe temperature will appear on the display. 2. Enter the new temperature. The oven will automati cally change to the new probe temperature. If you do not enter a temperature, the oven will continue to cook at the current setting. To change the cooking mode during meat probe cooking... 1. Touch the CANCEL · SECURE key. 2. Touch the BAKE, CONV BAKE, PURE CONV or CONV ROAST key. If you want to cook using a tem perature different than the preset oven temperature, enter it on the number keypad. 3. Touch CONTINUE. Temperatures for Various Foods Ground Meat and Meat Mixtures Beef, pork, veal, lamb 160°F (71°C) Turkey, chicken 165°F (74°C) Fresh Beef, Veal and Lamb Steaks, roasts, chops 145°F (63°C) Poultry Chicken and turkey, whole (temperature taken in thigh) 165°F (74°C) Poultry breasts, roast 165°F (74°C) Poultry thighs, legs, wings 165°F (74°C) Duck and goose 165°F (74°C) Stuffing (cooked alone or in bird) 165°F (74°C) Fresh Pork Fresh pork 160°F (71°C) Ham Fresh (raw) 160°F (71°C) Pre-cooked (reheat) 140°F (60°C) NOTE: The minimum safe internal cooking temperatures are subject to change. There are changes in bacteria and the temperatures required to eradicate them. For the most current information, contact the USDA. USDA Meat and Poultry Hot Line: Phone: (800) 535-4355 fsis.usda.gov

12 Operating Your Oven

Dehydrating/Defrosting Your oven can be used to dehydrate or defrost foods at low heat settings in the Pure Convection mode. WARNING To avoid food poisoning, cook meats immediately after defrosting them. To dehydrate or defrost foods 1. Adjust the racks to the appropriate level. 2. Place the food on the center of the oven rack. (If you are dehydrating, prepare food as recommended, then place it on a drying rack). 3. Touch the PURE CONV key. 4. To defrost meats, enter the temperature up to 150°F (66°C) on the keypad. To dehydrate, start by setting the temperature according to the table below. When dehydrating, you may need to experiment with higher temperatures. 5. Touch START. Food Type Dehydrating Temperature Fruit 100°F (38°C) Vegetables 125°F (52°C) Meat 150°F (66°C) Proofing You can use your oven to proof yeasted doughs at a low and draft-free temperature using the Bake mode. 1. Touch the BAKE key*. 2. Enter the temperature of 100°F (38°C) on the keypad. 3. Touch START. 4. Place the dough in a greased bowl inside of the oven. Cover it with either a damp cloth or plastic wrap coated with a nonstick spray. 5. Turn on the oven lights. 6. Set the timer for the amount of rise time in the recipe. * Double oven models have a PROOF key for the lower oven. In this case, you may touch it instead of the BAKE key. When using the PROOF key, the oven presets the temperature. Sabbath Mode The Sabbath mode on your oven complies with Jewish laws for use on the Sabbath and Holy Days. This feature allows the oven to perform two types of cooking, Bake and Pure Convection. When the oven is set to Sabbath mode, it disables the fol lowing features: • The oven lights • All keys, except CANCEL · SECURE, START and the 0 and 2 keys on the number keypad. NOTE • “SAb” appears on the display when Sabbath mode is in operation. • As with all other cooking modes, when setting the control panel for Sabbath operation all keys must be touched within 6 seconds of each other. Otherwise the control panel will automatically clear. • On double oven models, you cannot use one oven in normal mode when the other oven is running in Sabbath mode. • Sabbath mode will not work with the meat probe connected (the meat probe symbol will flash). • Delay-timed cooking cannot be used in Sabbath mode. • In the event of a power outage, the oven will return to Sabbath mode at the temperature it was last set to when power is restored. • If one or both timers are running, the oven cancels timer operation when Sabbath mode is selected. • You may want to use a rack thermometer to keep track of the oven temperature. Setting Up the Sabbath Feature 1. Touch the # key. 2. Touch the BAKE or PURE CONV key. On double ovens, be sure to touch the BAKE or PURE CONV key for the oven you want to use. 3. Touch the 0 or 2 keys repeatedly if you want to change the pre-selected cooking temperature shown on the display. 4. Touch (only) the START key. The oven will go into Sabbath mode and cook using the method selected in step 2. Things to Know about Sabbath Mode • The CANCEL · SECURE key on your oven remains active so that you can turn off the Sabbath feature or turn off the oven. On double ovens, both CANCEL · SECURE keys remain active so you can turn off one oven and leave the other oven running. continued...

13 Operating Your Oven

Things to Know about Sabbath Mode (cont.) • On double ovens, you may repeat steps 2 - 4 to start the other oven. Double oven models are equipped for Pure Convection only in the upper oven. • When the oven is cooking, touching the 2 key on the number keypad, then START, tells the oven to raise the temperature by 25°F (15°C). Touching the 0 key on the number keypad, then START, tells the oven to lower the temperature by 25°F (15°C). In compliance with Jewish law, the bake element will be adjusted randomly when these keys are touched and no changes will be seen on the display. On double ovens, you must touch the BAKE or PURE CONV key for the oven on which you want the temperature changed before touching the 0 or 2 key. Adjusting the Oven Temperature Even though your oven is adjusted at the factory to cook at the temperature shown on the display, it may cook faster or slower than your old oven. WARNING Do not adjust the probe or self-clean offset temperatures. The offset for the PROBE and Self-clean offsets must remain at 0 for proper and safe operation. IMPORTANT: Do not measure the temperature inside the oven with a thermometer. Opening the door will cause an incorrect reading. Also, the temperature inside the oven will vary as the elements cycle on and off. If you are not satisfied with the results from your oven, you can adjust the temperature offset as follows: 1. With the oven off, touch and hold the 0 and # keys on the number keypad at the same time. After about three seconds “PASS” will appear on the display. 2. Immediately enter 6428 on the number keypad, then START. “SLCt” (select) will appear on the display. 3. Touch the key for the cooking mode you want to change the offset for (CONV BAKE, CONV BROIL, PURE CONV, CONV ROAST, BAKE or BROIL). The current offset temperature will appear on the dis play, for example “00”, if you have not adjusted the temperature before. 4. Enter the amount you want to increase or decrease the temperature on the number keypad. To enter a minus sign, touch the # key after the number(s). A minus sign means that the oven will be cooler by the amount shown. When there is no sign in front of the number, the oven will be hotter by the amount shown. You may enter a number between 35°F or -35°F (18°C or -18°C). NOTE: “Edit” appears on the display when you start to enter the offset value. 5. Touch START to save the setting. 6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 above for any other cooking modes you need to offset. 7. Touch CANCEL to exit offset mode.

Care and Cleaning

WARNING • Clean only the parts of the oven listed in this manual. Clean them only in the manner specified. • To avoid dangerous fumes or damage to your oven’s surfaces and accessories, use only the types of cleaning solutions specified in this manual. • To avoid burns, turn off the oven(s) and make sure that all parts are cool before cleaning. • To prevent damage, do not use abrasive or corrosive cleaners or applicators such as steel wool or scouring pads, on any part of the oven unless instructed to do so. Use only a sponge, soft cloth, fibrous or plastic brush or nylon cleaning pad for cleaning the surfaces of your oven. • Do not use a steam cleaner to clean the oven. Steam could penetrate the electrical components and cause a short circuit. • Do not try to remove heavy spills with a sharp object such as a knife or metal spatula. Sharp objects may scratch your oven’s surfaces. Your Oven’s Self-clean Feature About the Self-clean Cycle • The oven will run better and produce better baked goods when it is clean. During self-cleaning, the oven is heated to very high temperatures which burn off any deposits on the surfaces of the oven. Self cleaning eliminates the need for manual scrubbing of interior surfaces. The self-clean process takes about 2 1/2 hours. • It is normal for the oven to emit smoke during the first few self-clean cycles. It is also normal for the oven to emit popping sounds during self-cleaning. These sounds are caused by the expansion and con traction of metal surfaces when the oven heats up and cools down. • Self-clean mode will not function if the meat probe is connected.

14 Care and Cleaning

WARNING • Always wipe up excess grease and other food spills with a damp cloth prior to using the self-clean cycle. Doing so will minimize smoke and increase efficiency. See the proper cleaning instructions on this page. Do not touch the outside surfaces of the oven during the self-clean cycle. They will be hot. • Items left in the oven (including the racks) during self-cleaning will become damaged or damage the oven. How to Use the Self-clean Feature IMPORTANT • On double ovens, the control panel will only allow one oven chamber to be self-cleaned at a time due to the amount of power consumed. Also, the double oven will not allow you to cook in one oven while the other is in self-clean mode. • The oven lights do not operate while the oven is in self-clean mode to protect them from damage. • Self-clean will not work with the meat probe connected (the meat probe symbol will flash). 1. Before self-cleaning the oven, remove the racks, the convection filter, all cookware (pots, pans, forks, etc.), the meat probe, foil and any other loose objects from the oven chamber. See page 17 for filter cleaning instructions. 2. Clean soil from the porcelain surfaces of the door outside of the door gasket. Rinse surfaces well with a solution of vinegar and water, then wipe dry. Heav ily soiled areas may be cleaned with a non-scratching scouring pad. 3. Clean the door gasket by dabbing it with a solution of water and mild soap. CAUTION • Take extreme caution when cleaning the door gasket. Rubbing or displacing it may damage the tight door seal required for proper cooking and self-cleaning. • Do not try to force the door open after it is locked. Damage to the door or latch may result. 4. Turn on kitchen fans or vents to help remove odors during the self-clean cycle. 5. Make sure the oven door is shut. 6. Touch the Self-clean key. 7. Touch the START key (located on the far left of the control panel). The control panel automatically locks the oven door during self-cleaning. The latch prevents the door from being opened since the high interior oven temperatures can easily cause injury. If the door is not shut, an error message will appear on the display. To correct the prob lem, touch CANCEL · SECURE and wait approximately one minute, then close the door. When the door is prop erly closed, start the self-clean process again. The display shows the self-clean cycle status: • The clean symbol indicates that self-clean is in process. • The lock symbol indicates that the door is latched. • “ON” indicates that the heating elements are on. 1 2 If you want to stop the self-clean cycle, touch the CANCEL · SECURE key. Keep in mind that the oven door will remain locked until it is safe enough to open. The lock symbol will disappear from the display when the door lock 1 2 is released. You will still need to exercise caution when the door lock is released because the inside of the oven may still be hot. After the self-clean cycle is complete... • The door latch will release when the inside has cooled down. The clean icon, lock icon and “ON“ will dis appear from the display. Exercise caution because the oven will still be hot at the time the door lock is released. • Reinstall the convection filter and oven racks before using your oven. • You may notice a powder ash residue in the bottom of the oven after self-cleaning. This condition is normal. Use a damp cloth or sponge to wipe up the residue after the oven cools down. Self-cleaning Tips • If any soil remains in the oven after the self-clean cycle is complete, you may repeat the cycle if you want. • Self-clean the oven regularly to prevent excessive soil build-up. Doing so will make the self-clean cycle work better and reduce smoke and odors. Setting the Oven to Self-clean at a Later Time 1. Prepare the oven for self-cleaning as instructed above. Observe all safety precautions and remove all items listed from inside the oven. Clean the door gasket and around the door as instructed. 2. Close the oven door. 3. Touch the Self-clean key. 4. Touch the START TIME key. continued...

15 Care and Cleaning

Setting the Oven to Self-clean at a Later Time (cont.) 5. Enter the desired start time. For example, touch 1-2- 3-0 for 12:30. You may enter a time up to 22 hours and 59 minutes ahead of the present time. 6. Touch START. When you touch START, “DELAY” will appear on the display and the oven door will lock. The oven will start to self-clean at the time selected. When the oven is set to clean at a later time... 3. Fold a dish towel in half and insert the end (double thick ness) between the door and the door gasket (right to left) to catch water that may dribble out during the process. Lay Insert end of towel here

• If you want to view the time, push the CLOCK key. • If the clock is displayed, you can push START TIME to check when the self-clean cycle will start. • When the self-clean cycle starts, “DELAY” will disap pear and “ON” will appear on the display. To cancel the time delayed self-clean cycle... • Touch CANCEL/SECURE. • If the self-clean process has not started, allow about a minute for the door to unlock before attempting to use the oven. • If the oven is in the middle of the self-clean pro cess, the door will unlock when the oven has cooled down enough to open safely. The oven will still be hot (about 400°F/205°C). Quick Steam Clean The steam clean process is a quick, simple way to clean light soil inside the oven. Steam cleaning allows you to save time and energy over the self-clean process, which should be used for heavier soil build up. Also on double ovens, unlike the self-clean process, the quick steam clean process may be performed on both ovens at the same time. WARNING • To avoid steam burns, do not pour water into the oven when it is hot. • The water remaining inside the oven will still be hot to the touch when the door is opened after the process. • Do not use a temperature higher than 185°F (85°C) 1. Remove the oven racks and all utensils from the oven. 2. Making sure the oven is cool, pour 1 1/2 cups of water (preferably distilled) into the recessed portion of the oven floor. For slightly heavier build up, you may mix a teaspoon of hand dishwashing soap into the water prior to pouring. the rest of the towel just inside on the oven floor. 4. Close the oven door, touch the BAKE key, then set the oven to 185°F (85°C). Touch START. 5. Set the timer (see page 10) for 20 minutes. 6. When the timer beeps, touch CANCEL · SECURE. Wait 10 minutes before opening the door. When you open the door, there will usually be a large amount of steam, condensation and some water inside. 7. Using a soapy sponge, wipe down the inside of the door window first. Then carefully sponge out the remaining water from the inside of the oven. 8. Scrub the inside of the oven with the soapy sponge until grease and soil is remove from the surfaces inside. Lime deposits can be removed with a cloth soaked in vinegar. 9. Make sure all surfaces are dry after cleaning by wiping down the oven with paper towels. Leave the door partially open to allow any left over condensation to escape. Repeat the process any time soil begins to build up inside. Cleaning the Exterior Control Panel WARNING Do not use abrasive cleaners or scrubbers on the control panel. They will permanently damage the finish. To avoid accidentally turning the oven on while cleaning the control panel, activate the lock-out feature. Touch the CANCEL · SECURE key for six seconds. The lock-out fea ture disables the keys. When the control panel is locked, the word “OFF” appears on the display. When you want to re-activate the control panel, touch CANCEL · SECURE for six seconds. Clean the control panel with the soft side of a sponge dampened with a mild solution of detergent and warm water. Dry completely with a soft, lint-free cloth.

16

Stainless Steel Surfaces Care and Cleaning To clean the filter... Soak it in hot, soapy water. Rinse well. You may also place CAUTION Always wipe stainless steel (silver colored) surfaces with the grain. To prevent scratching, do not use abrasive cleaners or scrubbers on stainless steel surfaces. Using a soft cloth, clean metal surfaces with a mild solu tion of detergent and warm water. Rinse and dry with a soft, lint-free cloth. Glass (Interior and Exterior) Use a mild glass cleaner to remove finger prints on glass surfaces. You can also clean glass surfaces with Dacor Cooktop Cleaning Creme. Use it according to the direc tions on the package. You may scrub the oven light lens with the rough side of a sponge and warm, soapy water. Be careful not to scratch the lens. Cleaning the Interior Convection Filter WARNING For your safety and proper oven performance, re-install the filter before using the oven to cook. If you don’t, the spinning fan blades at the back of the oven will be exposed. The convection filter is located in the back of the oven chamber (upper chamber only on double ovens). Clean the filter regularly. If it becomes clogged, the oven’s convection cooking modes will not work properly. You also need to remove the filter during the self-clean cycle. Removing your oven’s convection filter... When the oven is cool, put your fingers around the edges of the filter and gently push up. it in a dishwasher on the top rack. Dry the filter before re-installing it. Installing your oven’s convection filter... Carefully hook the metal clips on the back of the filter over the metal bar across the fan hole. Make sure it is centered over the hole. Be careful not to scratch the por celain surfaces with the back of the filter. Clips Door Gasket (Seal) WARNING Take extreme caution when cleaning the door gasket. Rubbing or displacing it may damage the tight door seal required for proper cooking and self-cleaning. Clean the door gasket by dabbing it with a solution of water and mild soap. Do not scrub it or it will become damaged. Oven Racks CAUTION To prevent damage, do not self-clean the oven racks. To clean the oven racks, apply a solution of detergent and hot water. When you need to clean heavy soil, use a scouring pad such as steel wool with plenty of water. You may also use a solution of one cup of ammonia to 2 gal lons of water. Meat Probe WARNING • To prevent damage, do not immerse the meat probe in water. • The meat probe will not function properly if the plug the connects to the oven is wet. The meat probe is constructed of silicone handles, a wire, a plug and a stainless steel skewer. To clean the skewer, use a scouring pad and hot, soapy water. When you clean the handles, wipe them with a soft sponge soaked with a solution of detergent and warm water. Dry thoroughly.

17 Care and Cleaning

Replacing the Light Bulbs WARNING • To prevent an electric shock hazard and/or personal injury, make certain that the oven and light bulb(s) are cool and that power to the oven has been turned off at the main power supply before replacing the light bulb(s). • Always make sure the lens covers are in place when using the oven(s). The lens covers protect the light bulbs from breakage caused by high oven temperatures or mechanical shock. • Replacing the lens cover without lining up the cutout with the To replace the light bulbs... 1. Replace the light bulb only with Dacor part number 107112 (120 Volt 20 Watt). Visit everythingda cor.com for ordering information. 2. Turn off power to the oven at the circuit breaker panel or fuse box. 3. Hold your hand under the lens for support and gently pry it loose using a spatula or table knife. Pull the lens cover straight out. 4. Grasp the old bulb and pull it straight out of the socket. 5. Using a glove, insert the new bulb into the socket.

light socket will damage the light fixture. • Do not use a screwdriver to remove the lens. Light bulb replacement is considered to be a homeowner maintenance operation. If all the lights do not work, before replacing them, please consult the Problem Solu tion Guide on page 18. IMPORTANT Do not touch the replacement halogen light bulbs with your fingers. Halogen bulbs are sensitive to the oils from your hand. The oils from your hand will stick to the bulb and cause it to burn out faster than normal. 6. As you reinstall the lens cover, line up the cutout on the inside rim with the light socket. Gently press it into its original position. 7. Turn the power to the oven back on at the main power supply. 8. Reset the clock (see page 5). Light bulb Light socket Cutout on inside rim of lens

Before You Call for Service Problem Solution Guide Problem May Be Caused By What to Do Nothing works. Oven not connected to power. Have a licensed electrician connect oven to properly wired electrical connection. Power to oven is off. Turn on power at circuit breaker or fuse box. Check for tripped breaker or blown fuse. Control panel locked. Touch CANCEL · SECURE key for six seconds to reactivate control panel Power outage. Contact power company Oven will not heat. Oven setting not correct. Touch CANCEL · SECURE, then follow instruc tions in Operating the Oven section. Oven set for delay timed cooking. Oven will turn on automatically at preset time. Touch CANCEL · SECURE to return to normal operation.

Attempting to broil with the meat probe connected. Foods over or under cook. Incorrect cooking time or tempera ture. Broil and convection broil settings will not work when meat probe is connected. Discon nect meat probe. Follow instructions in Operating Your Oven section.

18 Before You Call for ServiceProblem May Be Caused By What to Do

Foods over or under cook. Incorrect cooking time or tempera ture. Follow instructions in Operating Your Oven section.

Oven shuts off by itself after it has been on for 12 hours. 12 hour timer is on. Unit is set to turn off automatically after 12 hours of continuous use. Turn off 12 hour timer. See page 8.

Oven does not self-clean. Oven door not shut tightly. Check for obstructions. Shut door tightly. Oven set for delay timed cleaning. Oven will start to self-clean at preset time. Touch CANCEL · SECURE to return to normal operation. Oven not set properly. Follow instructions in Care and Cleaning section. Meat probe connected. Oven will not start self-clean cycle when meat probe is connected. Disconnect and remove meat probe. Oven door will not open. Oven is set to self-clean. Check display. If lock symbol appears on display, oven door cannot be opened. Wait for oven to complete self-clean or touch CANCEL · SECURE. Door will unlock once oven has cooled. Oven lights will not work. Oven in self-clean mode. Lights do not work when oven is in self-clean mode. See page 15. Oven in Sabbath mode. Lights do not work when oven is in Sabbath mode. See page 13. Light bulbs burned out. Replace light bulbs. Oven lights will not turn off. Light key is set to on. Touch light key to turn lights off. Sabbath mode does not work. Meat probe connected. Oven will not start Sabbath mode when meat probe is connected. Disconnect and remove meat probe.

Oven goes into hold mode too quickly after meat probe is connected. Meat probe connector is still wet after cleaning. Dry metal portion of the plug that connects to the oven using a soft dry rag.

Cooling fan continues to run after oven has been turned off. Normal operation. The cooling fan may run for a while after the oven is turned off, until the internal parts have cooled.

Time on display not correct. Time of day not set. Set time. See page 5.

Power failure or power was turned off. Cannot set clock. Oven in use. Clock cannot be set while oven is in use. Reset time. See page 5. Turn off oven to set clock.

Time flashes on display. Power failure or power turned off. Reset time. See page 5.

Control panel does not “beep” when touching the keys on the control panel and when the timer runs down to zero. Error code (a letter followed by two number) appears and stays on display, for example “U55.” Control panel tone (“beep”) is set to off. The oven controller has detected a malfunction. Turn control panel tone (“beep”) on. See page 5. Error code “C33” may be caused by leaving oven door open during cooking or broiling. Allow oven to cool and “C33” error to reset. Do not leave door open for long periods during cooking and keep door shut during broil. Other error codes indicate a problem that cannot be resolved by the customer. Call for service.

19

Getting Help Before you request service: Warranty and Service OUTSIDE THE FIFTY STATES OF THE U.S.A., THE DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, AND CANADA: LIMITED FIRST YEAR WARRANTY 1. Review the Before You Call for Service section of this manual (page 18). 2. Use the helpful tips found in our Problem Solution Guide. 3. Become familiar with the warranty terms and conditions of your product. 4. If none of these tips or suggestions resolves your problem, call our Customer Service center at the number below. Dacor’s Customer Service center is available 6:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. Pacific Time For warranty repairs or questions and for Dacor Distinctive Service (DDS) in the US and Canada Phone: (800) 793-0093, extension 2822 For non-warranty repairs or questions in the US and Canada Phone: (800) 793-0093, extension 2813 Contact us through our web site at: dacor.com/contact-us Warranty What Is Covered CERTIFICATE OF WARRANTIES: DACOR OVENS WITHIN THE FIFTY STATES OF THE U.S.A., THE DIS TRICT OF COLUMBIA, AND CANADA: FULL ONE-YEAR WARRANTY The warranty applies only to the Dacor appliance sold to the first use purchaser, starting from the date of original retail purchase or closing date for new construction, whichever period is longer. Warranty is valid on products purchased brand new from a Dacor Authorized Dealer, or other seller authorized by Dacor. If your Dacor product fails to function within one year of the origi nal date of purchase, due to a defect in material or workmanship, Dacor will remedy it without charge to you. All cosmetic damage (such as scratches on stainless steel, paint/ porcelain blemishes, etc.) to the product or included accessories must be reported to Dacor within 60 days of the original purchase date to qualify for warranty coverage. Consumable parts such as filters and light bulbs are not covered and are the responsibility of the purchaser. LIMITATIONS OF COVERAGE Service will be provided by a Dacor designated service company during regular business hours. Please note service providers are independent entities and are not agents of Dacor. Dealer display and model home display products with a produc tion date greater than 5 years, products sold “As Is,” and products installed for non-residential use, which include but are not limited to religious organizations, fire stations, bed & breakfast, and spas carry a one year parts warranty only. All delivery, installation, labor costs, and other service fees are the responsibility of the purchaser. Warranty will be null and void on product that has altered, defaced, or missing serial numbers and tags or if non-ETL or non-CUL approved product is transported from the U.S.A. The owner must provide proof of purchase or closing statement for new construction upon request. All Dacor products must be acces sible for service. If your Dacor product fails to function within one year of the original date of purchase due to a defect in material or workman ship, Dacor will furnish a new part, F.O.B. factory to replace the defective part. All delivery, installation, labor costs and other service fees are the responsibility of the purchaser. What Is Not Covered • Slight color variations may be noticed because of differences in painted parts, kitchen lighting, product placement and other factors; this warranty does not apply to color variation. • Service calls to educate the customer on proper use and care of the product. • Service fees for travel to islands and remote areas, which include but are not limited to, ferries, toll roads or other travel expenses. • Consequential or incidental damage, including but not limited to food or medicine loss, time away from work or restaurant meals. • Failure of the product when used for commercial, business, rental or any application other than for residential consumer use. • Failure of the product caused by improper product installa tion. • Replacement of house fuses, fuse boxes or resetting of circuit breakers. • Damage to the product caused by accident, fire, flood, power interruption, power surges or other acts of God. • Liability or responsibility for damage to surrounding property including cabinetry, floors, ceilings and other structures or objects around the product. • Breakage, discoloration, or damage to glass, metal surfaces, plastic components, trim, paint or other cosmetic finish caused by improper usage, care, abuse or neglect. Out of Warranty Should you experience a service issue beyond the standard war ranty period, please contact us. Dacor reviews each issue and customer concern to provide the best possible solution based on the circumstances. THE REMEDIES PROVIDED IN THE ABOVE EXPRESS WARRAN-TIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. THEREFORE, NO OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES ARE MADE, AND OUTSIDE THE FIFTY STATES OF THE UNITED STATES, THE DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA AND CANADA, ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR USE OR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO ONE YEAR FROM THE DATE OF ORIGINAL PURCHASE. IN NO EVENT SHALL DACOR BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL EXPENSE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. IN THE EVENT DACOR PREVAILS IN ANY LAWSUIT, DACOR SHALL BE ENTITLED TO REIMBURSEMENT OF ALL COSTS AND EXPENSES, INCLUDING ATTOR NEY’S FEES, FROM THE DACOR CUSTOMER. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO ANY BUYER FOR RESALE. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of inconsequential dam ages, therefore the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state.

20 Manuel d’utilisation Four mural Modèles : DTO127, DTO130, DTO130, DTO230, DTOV127, DTOV130, DTOV130, DTOV230 Le style varie, modèle illustré DTO230 Table des matières Importantes instructions de sécurité................................22 Caractéristiques..........................................................24 Utilisation...................................................................27 Entretien et nettoyage ..................................................36 Avant de demander une réparation ...............................40 Garantie et service......................................................42 Importantes instructions de sécurité

INSTALLATEUR : LEAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS WITH THE APPLIANCE. CUSTOMER: READ THIS USE AND CARE MANUAL COMPLETELY BEFORE USING THIS APPLIANCE. SAVE IT FOR FUTURE REFER ENCE. Pour plus de renseignements sur le service et la garantie, voir page 42. Si vous avez des questions, appelez : Équipe de service à la clientèle Dacor Téléphone : (800) 793-0093 (É.-U. et Canada) Du lundi au vendredi, de 6 h à 17 h, heure du Pacifique Site web : dacor.com Lors de la prise de contact, vous devrez communiquer le nom du modèle et le numéro de série de l’appareil. Notez ces numéros sur cette page pour les avoir sous la main. Le modèle et le numéro de série sont imprimés sur l’étiquette de données sur le produit. On peut le voir à travers le gril situé sous le tableau de commande. Ouvrir la porte pour exposer le gril. Sur les fours doubles, l’étiquette est située derrière le gril du haut. Numéro de modèle ________________________________ Numéro de série __________________________________ Date d’achat _____________________________________ L’étiquette de données sur le produit Dans notre effort continu d’améliorer la qualité et la perfor mance de nos produits, il peut être nécessaire d’apporter des modifications à l’appareil sans révision de ce guide. Se rendre au site dacor.com pour télécharger la dernière version du présent manuel. Avertissements de la proposition 65 de l’État de Californie : AVERTISSEMENT : Ce produit contient au moins un produit chimique connu par l’État de Californie pour être à l’origine de cancers. AVERTISSEMENT : Ce produit contient au moins un produit chimique connu par l’État de Californie pour être à l’origine de malformations et autres déficiences de naissance. Ce qui vous devez savoir instructions de sécurité Instructions de sûreté d’avertissement et importantes apparaî tre en ce livre ne sont pas censés couvrir toutes les conditions possibles et situations qui peuvent se produire. Le bon sens, l’attention et le soin doivent être employés en installant, en maintenant ou en actionnant un appareil. Entrez en contact avec toujours le fabricant au sujet des prob lèmes ou des conditions que vous ne comprenez pas. Symboles de sûreté, mots et étiquettes DANGER Risques immédiats qui RÉSULTERONT en de graves blessures ou même la mort. ADVERTISSEMENT Risques ou pratiques non sûres, qui POURRAIENT résulter en de graves blessures ou même la mort. MISE EN GARDE Risques ou pratiques non sûres qui POURRAIENT résulter en des blessures mineures ou dégâts matériels. DANGER IMPORTANT :N’entreposez et n’utilisez pas d’essence ou autres vapeurs et liquides inflammables a proximite de cet appareil ou de tout autre appareil electromenager. Garder les articles qui pourraient exploser, comme les générateurs d’aérosol, éloignés des appareils ménagers. Ne pas entreposer de produits inflammables ou explosifs dans des armoires ou zones attenantes (ou au-dessus et au-dessous). ADVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT : NE JAMAIS utiliser cet appareil comme dispositif de chauffage de la pièce. Le non-respect de cette instruction peut entraîner une surchauffe de l’appareil. ADVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT : NE JAMAIS couvrir les fentes, les trous, les grilles ou les passages sur l’appareil ménager. Ne pas revêtir le four de papier d’aluminium ou d’un autre matériel. Le faire empêche l’air de circuler dans le châssis et peut causer un incendie. LIRE ET CONSERVER CES DIRECTIVES

Importantes instructions de sécurité Mesures de sécurité générales Pour réduire le risque d’incendie, de choc électrique, de blessures ou de dommages lors de l’utilisation de cet appareil, il convient d’observer certaines précautions élémentaires dont les suivantes :

ADVERTISSEMENT • Si le produit reçu est endommagé, contactez immédiatement votre revendeur ou votre constructeur. Ne pas installer ou utiliser un appareil ménager endommagé. • Assurez-vous que votre appareil est bien installé et mis à la terre par un installateur qualifié, conformément aux directives d’installation fournies. L’installateur doit montrer au client l’emplacement du tableau disjoncteurs ou du coffret de fusibles afin qu’il sache où il se trouve et comment couper l’alimentation vers l’appareil. • Ne pas réparer ni remplacer toute pièce du four si ce n’est pas spécifiquement recommandé dans les instructions. Toute autre opération d’entretien ou de réparation doit être confiée à un technicien qualifié. • Avant de réparer l’appareil, coupez le courant au tableau de distribution et bloquez le disjoncteur pour éviter que le courant ne soit accidentellement rétabli. • N’utilisez cet appareil que pour l’usage auquel il est destiné, comme expliqué dans le présent manuel. Cet appareil ménager n’est pas destiné à l’utilisation commerciale ou de laboratoire. • NE PAS TOUCHER LES SURFACES CHAUDES DE L’APPAREIL MÉNAGER OU LES ZONES AVOISINANTES PENDANT OU IMMÉDIATEMENT APRÈS L’UTILISATION. • S’assurer que cet appareil ménager est uniquement utilisé par les personnes qui peuvent s’en servir correctement. • Ne jamais laisser qui que ce soit, y compris les enfants, s’asseoir, se tenir debout ou grimper sur un appareil, qui pourrait entraîner le basculement, des dommages, des blessures graves ou la mort. • Ne pas laisser les enfants ou les animaux domestiques seuls ou sans surveillance dans la zone autour de l’appareil ménager. Ne pas laisser les enfants jouer avec les commandes ou toucher d’autres parties de l’appareil ménager. • Ne pas entreposer des articles intéressants pour les enfants sur l’appareil ou au-dessus de ce dernier. Les enfants pourraient se brûler ou se blesser s’ils grimpent sur l’appareil. • Ne pas endommager les commandes. • Afin de prévenir les blessures attribuables au basculement vers l’avant de l’appareil, fixer l’appareil à l’armoire à l’aide des vis de montage fournies. • Ne pas chauffer des contenants d’aliments non ouverts, des pots de verre fermés ou des oeufs entiers. Ils peuvent exploser et causer des blessures. • Ne pas utiliser d’eau pour éteindre un feu de graisse. Il peut y avoir une violente explosion de vapeur. Étouffer le feu ou les flammes ou utiliser des extincteurs polyvalents à produits chimiques secs ou un extincteur à mousse. Il faut éviter de se brûler. • Garder les articles inflammables, comme le papier, le carton, le plastique et l’étoffe éloignés des surfaces chaudes. Ne pas placer produits inflammables à l’intérieur du four. Ne pas laisser les poignées toucher les surfaces chaudes. ADVERTISSEMENT • Ne pas porter de vêtements amples ou libres pendant l’utilisation de cet appareil ménager. Ne pas laisser les vêtements, les poignées, les serviettes ou les chiffons entrer en contact avec les surfaces chaudes immédiatement après l’utilisation. • Ne pas utiliser de serviettes ou de chiffons encombrants comme poignée. • Ne pas utiliser le four pour l’entreposage. • Nettoyer et entretenir correctement l’appareil ménager régulièrement en suivant les instructions figurant au mode d’emploi. Nettoyer souvent toutes les surfaces couvertes de graisse afin de prévenir les incendies provoqués par les graisses et maintenir le rendement. • Ne pas toucher les surfaces extérieures de l’appareil ménager pendant le cycle d’autonettoyage. Elles seront chaudes. • Utiliser seulement une batterie de cuisine pour l’utilisation prévue. Vérifier les recommandations du fabricant avant d’utiliser l’ustensile pour déterminer s’il peut être utilisé dans une four. Certains types de verre, de céramique et de terre cuite ne conviennent pas aux four. L’utilisation inappropriée de la batterie de cuisine peut causer des blessures ou des dommages. • Exercer une grande prudence lors de l’ouverture de la porte. Laisser l’air chaud ou la vapeur s’échapper avant de regarder à l’intérieur. • Il faut être très prudent si on ajoute de l’eau aux aliments chauds. La vapeur peut causer des brûlures graves. • Utiliser seulement des mitaines sèches de four – Des mitaines de four mouillées ou humides sur des surfaces chaudes peuvent provoquer des brûlures provenant de la vapeur. • Pour des raisons de sécurité et pour un bon rendement du four, ne pas utiliser le four pour la cuisson sans le filtre à convection installé. Lorsque le filtre n’est pas installé, les pales de ventilateur en rotation à l’arrière du four sont exposées. • Ne pas laisser les aliments reposer pendant plus d’une heure avant ou après la cuisson. La consommation d’aliments avariés peut causer l’intoxication alimentaire. • Ne pas laisser d’objets, comme du papier d’aluminium, la sonde thermique ou des plaques à biscuits au bas du four. Ne pas couvrir les éléments de grillage sur le plafond de la chambre de cuisson. Ne pas revêtir le four de papier d’aluminium ou d’un autre matériel. Cela pourrait causer la surchauffe du four ou des articles laissés à l’intérieur, ce qui crée un risque d’incendie ou cause des dommages. • Les revêtements antiadhésifs, lorsqu’ils sont chauffés, peuvent nuire aux oiseaux. Déplacer les oiseaux à une salle séparée bien ventilée.

23 Caractéristiques Les pièces du four A Tableau de commande Le tableau de commande du four se compose de touches et d’un affichage. Utiliser le tableau de commande pour commander les fonctions du four (parfois appelées modes). B Évent du four Le four aspire de l’air par des fentes d’admission pour refroidir ses pièces internes. L’air sort par la fente d’échappement au fond du four. Ne pas obstruer ou couvrir les fentes d’admission d’air ou d’échappement.

C Prise du sonde ther mique Pendant l’utilisation de la sonde thermique, insérer l’aiguille dans la viande et brancher l’autre bout dans ce raccord. Voir la section Utilisation de la sonde thermique à la page 33 pour un fonctionnement convenable. Sur les fours doubles, seul le four supérieur est muni d’un raccord de sonde thermique.

D Lampes du four Des lumières se trouvent à l’intérieur de la chambre de cuisson afin de voir facilement les aliments à l’intérieur. Appuyer sur la touche de la lumière sur le tableau de commande pour les allumer. Les lumières utilisent des ampoules à halogène de 120 V, 20 Watt. E Supports des grilles Chaque chambre de cuisson compte sept ensembles de supports de grille. Ils appuient les grilles du four ajustables. Les grilles sont numérotées, du bas au haut. F Joint de porte Le joint d’étanchéité de la porte empêche la chaleur de s’échapper lorsque la porte est fermée. G Loquet autonettoyage Le loquet d’autonettoyage verrouille automatiquement la porte du four pendant le cycle d’autonettoyage. La porte se verrouille pour des raisons de sécurité. Pendant le cycle d’autonettoyage, les températures sont très élevées à l’intérieur du four. H Éléments des grillage L’élément des grillage se trouve au plafond de la chambre de cuisson. Il s’agit de la source de chaleur supérieure.

J Ventilateur de convection* Situé derrière le filtre de convection, le ventilateur de convection souffle de l’air chauffé dans la chambre de cuisson pendant le processus de cuisson par convection.

K Élément de convection* Situé derrière le filtre de convection, l’élément à convection réchauffe l’air soufflé dans la chambre de cuisson par le ventilateur de convection pendant le processus de cuisson par convection. L Filtre de convection* Le filtre de convection couvre le ventilateur de convection. Il aide à prévenir le transfert d’une saveur d’un aliment à un autre pendant la cuisson d’un repas complet. Le filtre garde également le four plus propre et couvre les pales de ventilateur en rotation pour des raisons de sécurité. M Grille du four Le four est vendu avec ensemble de grilles GlideRackMC et une grille standard pour chaque chambre de cuisson. Le nombre total de grilles dépend du modèle. N Élément de cuisson Les éléments de cuisson sont cachés sous le plancher de la chambre de cuisson. Ils constitu ent la source de chaleur inférieure. P Fond de four renfoncé Le fond renfoncé du four est conçu de façon à permettre un nettoyage à vapeur en 30 min utes. Voir page 38. * Sur les fours doubles, seul le four supérieur est équipée pour cuisson par convection. Sonde Fiche Sonde thermique 24

Caractéristiques A B G H 7 C 6 D 5 J 4 2 3 E D M F 1 P N B B K L

25

Tableau de commande Caractéristiques

A Touche START (démarrage) B Touches de modes de cuisson C Touche CANCEL · SECURE (annuler/sécuriser) Pour utiliser les diverses fonctions (ou modes) du four, sélectionner premièrement le mode de cuisson. Appuyer ensuite sur la touche START (démarrage). De plus, utiliser la touche START pour démarrer les minuteries. Sélectionner le type de cuisson désiré en appuyant sur une des touches de modes de cuis son. Comprend également les touches Self-clean (autonettoyage) et PROBE (sonde), et sur les fours doubles, la touche PROOF (apprêt). Les fours doubles ont deux claviers de modes de cuisson, un pour le four supérieur et un pour le four inférieur. Utiliser cette touche pour éteindre le four. Cette touche règle toutes les températures à zéro et éteint toutes les fonctions (sauf la minuterie) actuellement en usage. Elle active égale ment la fonction verrouillage. Sur les fours doubles, il y a une touche CANCEL · SECURE (annuler/sécuriser) pour chaque four.

D Affichage L’affichage du tableau de commande fournit divers types d’information concernant le four, dont l’heure actuelle (après le réglage de l’horloge), les réglages de cuisson actuels et les températures de cuisson. E Touches numérique Pour fixer la température, le temps de cuisson ou l’heure, utiliser les touches numérique.

F Touches de cuisson au démarrage différé G Touches TIMER (minuterie) Utiliser ces touches régler le four pour qu’il se mette en marche ou s’arrête automatique ment plus tard. Sur les fours doubles, il y a un ensemble de touches de cuisson au démar rage différé pour chaque four. Voir page 32. Utiliser les touches TIMER 1 (minuterie 1) et TIMER 2 (minuterie 2) pour chronométrer une action. Les deux minuteries fonctionnent séparément l’une de l’autre. On peut uti liser les minuteries même si on n’utilise pas le four. Elles n’allument pas le four et elles ne l’éteignent pas. Voir page 32.

H Touche CLOCK (horloge) Utiliser cette touche pour régler l’heure. Voir page 27 J Touche lampe Situé sur les touches numérique. S’il faut allumer ou éteindre la lumière du four, appuyer sur la touche de la lampe. K (#) Touche sabbat Utiliser cette touche pour démarrer le mode sabbat. Voir page 35.

B F A C G H G E D J K

Tableau de commande - Four simple Tableau de commande - Four double

26

Réglages du tableau de commande Réglage de l’horloge Utilisation 4. Appuyer sur la touche CANCEL · SECURE (annuler/ sécuriser). Le tableau de commande retournera à l’affichage initial de l’horloge, régler à la nouvelle échelle de tempéra ture. Mettre en marche/arrêter le timbre du 1. Appuyer sur la touche CLOCK (horloge). Les deux points entre les minutes et les secondes sur l’affichage commence ront à clignoter. 2. Entrer l’heure actuelle sur les touches numérique avant que les deux points arrêtent de clignoter. Par exemple : pour 12 h 08, appuyer sur 1-2-0-8 sur les les touches numérique. Appuyer sur la touche #change le témoin AM-PM. 3. Appuyer sur START (démarrer). IMPORTANT • L’horloge ne peut pas être réglée pendant la cuisson au démarrage différé, si une des minuteries est en cours d’utilisation, si le four est en mode d’autonettoyage ou si le mode sabbat est actif. • Après une panne de courant, l’heure sur l’affichage peut clignoter, indiquant que l’heure peut ne pas être correcte. • Après avoir appuyé sur la touche de l’horloge, il faut entrer l’heure et appuyer sur START (démarrer) juste après. S’il s’écoule plus de six secondes entre les touches, l’affichage retournera au réglage initial. Horloge de 12/24 heures (temps militaire) Le four est réglé pour l’horloge de 12 heures (non-militaire) à l’usine. Le temps de 24 heures est également connu sous le nom de temps militaire. 1:36 PM = 13 h 36 en temps militaire. Si on souhaite changer l’horloge à un temps de 24 heures ou passer du temps militaire à l’heure ordinaire : 1. Appuyer et tenir la touche CLOCK (horloge) pendant six secondes. L’affichage indiquera le mode de l’horloge, 12 Hr ou 24 Hr. 2. Appuyer sur la touche # pour changer le mode de l’horloge. Pour laisser le réglage, n’appuyer sur aucune touche. 3. Appuyer sur la touche CANCEL · SECURE (annuler/ sécuriser) pour retourner à l’affichage principal. Si l’horloge est réglée au temps de 24 heures, on peut entrer le temps militaire sur les touches numérique pendant le réglage de l’horloge. Setting the Temperature Scale On peut sélectionner l’échelle de température (échelle Fahren heit ou Celsius) qu’utilise le four pour afficher la température de cuisson. Le four est préréglé à l’usine à l’échelle Fahrenheit. Pour changer l’échelle de température : 1. Appuyer et tenir la touche BROIL (sous touche UPPER OVEN sur les fours doubles) pendant six secondes. 2. L’affichage indiquera l’échelle de température utilisée par le tableau de commande, “F” ou “C”. 3. Appuyer sur la touche # pour changer l’échelle de tempéra ture. Pour laisser le réglage, n’appuyer sur aucune touche. tableau de commande Le tableau de commande émet un timbre chaque fois qu’on appuie une touche ou lorsque diverses conditions d’erreur exis tent. Il émet également un timbre lorsqu’une minuterie a ter miné son compte à rebours ou lorsque le four effectue certaines fonctions préréglées, par exemple le préchauffage est terminé. On peut étouffer la sonorité pour qu’elle ne fonctionne pas sous les conditions ci-dessus. Pour étouffer le timbre du tableau de commande (ou le commencer) : 1. Appuyer et tenir la touche START TIME (heure de démar rage) pendant six secondes, jusqu’à ce que “beep” (timbre) apparaît sur l’affichage. 2. Appuyer à plusieurs reprises sur la touche # pour passer entre “On” et “Off”. 3. Appuyer sur CANCEL · SECURE (annuler/sécuriser) lorsque le mode désiré apparaît sur l’affichage. Pour retourner le tableau de commande au mode précédent, répéter les étapes susmentionnées. Avant la cuisson • Dacor recommande d’allumer le four à 500°F (260°C) pen dant une heure afin de brûler les huiles résiduelles utilisées pendant le processus de fabrication. Les huiles laissées sur les pièces internes peuvent causer une odeur indésirable les premières fois qu’on utilise le four. • Préchauffage : Lorsqu’on utilise le four pour la cuisson ou pour rôtir, il se préchauffe automatiquement. Le cycle de préchauffage réchauffe rapidement la chambre de cuisson à la bonne température pour la cuisson. Le préchauffage du four peut nécessiter plusieurs minutes. La durée du préchauffage dépend du réglage de température. La durée peut être plus longue selon le type d’alimentation de la collectivité. Il n’y a pas de cycle de préchauffage pour les modes de grillage. • Après l’enlèvement des aliments du four, leur cuisson se poursuivra. Ce processus s’appelle “prolongement.” Plus la portion d’aliment est grande, plus elle prendra de temps à cuire. Il est préférable de laisser reposer la viande de 10 à 15 minutes lorsqu’elle sort du four avant de la couper. Procéder ainsi permettra à la viande de garder ses jus et la rendra plus facile à couper. MISE EN GARDE Ne pas laisser les acides (jus d’agrumes, sauces tomates, etc.) sur les surfaces de l’appareil ménager. Les finitions peuvent se tacher ou se trouer.

27

Grilles Utilisation Pour insérer une grille de four GlideRack... On peut utiliser l’un ou l’autre des types de grille sur n’importe quel niveau à l’intérieur du four. ADVERTISSEMENT Pour réduire le risque de brûlure, positionner les grilles du four lorsque le four est froid. S’il faut repositionner une grille lorsque le four est chaud, utiliser des mitaines de four. Pour insérer une grille de four standard... 1. Insérer d’abord le bout de la grille avec les encoches de sécurité dans le four. 2. Fixer les deux côtés de la grille aux supports de grille dans le four tel qu’illustré dans le schéma ci-dessous. 3. Commencer à glisser la grille, et la lever ensuite afin que les encoches de sécurité franchissent les bouts des supports de grille. 4. Pousser la grille complètement dans le four avec les deux mains. Pour retirer une grille de four standard... • Pour retirer une grille de four standard, la saisir des deux mains et la tirer soigneusement directement vers l’extérieur jusqu’à ce qu’elle s’arrête. • Pour retirer complètement la grille, lever le devant de la grille d’environ six pouces et continuer de la tirer. Le fait de lever la grille libère les encoches de sécurité. Les encoches de sécurité empêchent la grille de sortir du four accidentel lement. Arrière de la grille Avant de la grille Support de grille Le four est muni une grille de four GlideRack de Dacor. On peut sortir davantage la grille de four GlideRack que une grille de four standard et les grilles supportent toujours des marmites et des poêles lourdes remplies de nourriture. 1. Tenir la grille de four GlideRack avec les guides entièrement allongés à l’écart (voir le schéma ci-dessous). 2. Aligner les deux ensembles de brides de sécurité (droite et gauche) à l’arrière des guides avec les supports de grille du four tel qu’illustré. 3. Commencer à insérer la grille en la glissant. Lever les brides de sécurité avant sur le devant des supports de grille du four. 4. Pousser la grille jusqu’à l’arrière. 5. Saisir la grille dans le centre à l’avant et tirer. La grille devrait s’avancer alors que les guides demeurent en place. IMPORTANT : Ne pas placer plus de 25 livres sur la grille du four GlideRack lorsqu’il est dans le plus bas posistion. Pour retirer une grille de four GlideRack... • Saisir la grille des deux mains et tirer soigneusement directement vers l’extérieur jusqu’à ce qu’elle s’arrête. • Pour retirer complètement la grille, lever le devant de la grille d’environ six pouces et continuer de la tirer. Le fait de lever la grille libère les agrafes de sécurité. Les agrafes de sécurité empêchent la grille de sortir du four accidentelle ment. Guides Lever les brides de sécurité avant sur le devant des support Avant de la grille

Grille de four standard le encoche Grille de four GlideRack Arrière de la guide Support de grille

de sécurité Glisser les supports de grille dans les fentes sur la grille Aligner les deux ensembles de brides de sécurité

28

Démarrage du four 1. Régler les grilles au niveau approprié. Utilisation fixée. Une fois que le four atteint la température fixée (habi tuellement de 15 à 20 minutes), il émettra un timbre et “PRE-” disparaîtra. Placer soigneusement les aliments dans le four. Un brunissement excessif se produira si on place les 2. Déterminer le meilleur mode de cuisson pour le type d’aliment à cuire. Sélectionner à partir des modes suivants... • CONV BAKE (Cuisson au four par convection)* : Une combinaison du ventilateur à convection et d’une source de chaleur inférieure. Cuisson idéale pour les articles sur une seule grille dans une plaque creuse. • CONV BROIL (Grillage par convection)* : Une combinaison du ventilateur à convection et d’une source de chaleur supérieure. Cuisson idéale pour les aliments qui n’ont pas besoin d’être tournés, comme les coupes de viande plus minces, le poisson et le pain à l’ail. • PURE CONV - (Convection PureMC)* : Se sert de la cuisson à convection uniquement pour une chaleur uni forme. Utiliser ce mode pour les produits de boulange rie-pâtisserie et pour la cuisson à plusieurs grilles. • CONV ROAST (Rôtissage par convection)* : Combine les sources de chaleur supérieures et inférieures au ventilateur de convection. Cuisson idéale pour les rosbifs de côte, les dindes, les poulets, etc. aliments dans le four pendant préchauffage. Arrêt du four Pour arrêter le four, appuyer sur la touche CANCEL · SECURE (annuler/sécuriser). Sur les fours doubles, appuyer sur la touche CANCEL · SECURE sous UPPER OVEN ou LOWER OVEN. REMARQUE 1 2 1 2 Après l’arrêt du four, les ventilateurs peuvent continuer de fonctionner jusqu’à ce que les pièces internes du four se soient refroidies. Changement de la température 1 2 1 2 Pour changer à une autre température pendant que le four est en marche : 1. Appuyer sur la touche du mode de cuisson actuel. Le mode de cuisson actuel apparaît sur l’affichage, par exemple BAKE (cuisson au four). 1 2 2. Entrer la température sur les touches numérique (par exemple 3-7-5) et appuyer sur START (démarrer).

• BAKE - (Cuisson au four) : Cuisson avec une source 1 2 1 2 IMPORTANT

de chaleur inférieure uniquement. Couramment utilisé pour les recettes de base. • BROIL - (Grillage) : Cuisson avec une source de chal eur supérieure uniquement. À utiliser pour griller les plus petites coupes de viande ou pour griller du pain. * Seul le four supérieur sur les fours doubles. IMPORTANT Les modes de grillage ne fonctionneront pas lorsque la sonde thermique est branchée. Voir page 30 pour des descriptions détaillées des divers modes de cuisson. 1. Appuyer sur la touche du mode de cuisson désiré. La tem pérature préréglée apparaîtra sur l’affichage de même que les symboles du mode de cuisson sélectionné (voir cides sus). Sur les fours doubles, sélectionner le four désiré en appuyant sur la touche du mode de cuisson sous UPPER OVEN (four supérieur) ou LOWER OVEN (four inférieur) sur le tableau de commande. 2. Pour la cuisson à la température préréglée, appuyer sur START (démarrer). Pour la cuisson à une différente tem pérature, entrer la température sur les touches numéri que (par exemple 4-2-5), appuyer ensuite sur START. On peut entrer une température entre 100°F (38°C) et 555°F (291°C). La température de grillage suggérée est de 555°F. Les fours doubles ont seulement une touche START, sur le côté gauche du tableau de commande. Elle est utilisée pour démarrer les deux fours. 3. Si on utilise le mode convection pure ou un des modes de cuisson ou de rôtissage, “PRE-” pour le préchauffage, ainsi que la température actuelle du four, apparaîtra sur l’affichage jusqu’à ce que le four atteigne la température Si on augmente la température d’au moins 50°F (28°C), le four passera au mode de préchauffage pour augmenter la température rapidement au nouveau réglage. “PRE-” apparaîtra sur l’affichage. Afin de prévenir 1 2 le brunissement excessif, Dacor recommande d’enlever les aliments du four lorsque “PRE-” apparaît sur l’affichage. Changement du mode de cuisson du four 1 2 Pour changer à un différent mode de cuisson pendant que le four est en marche : 1. Appuyer sur la touche du nouveau mode de cuisson, par exemple BAKE (cuisson du four). 2. Appuyer sur START (démarrer). Réglages de température préréglés Le four compte un réglage de température préréglé pour chaque mode de cuisson afin de réduire la nécessité de toujours entrer la température. Voir le tableau ci dessous. Voir la sec tion Démarrage du four pour des directions sur la cuisson à la température préréglée. Mode de cuisson Température préréglée Cuisson au four par convection 325°F (163°C) Grillage par convection 555°F (291°C) Convection Pure 325°F (163°C) Rôtissage par convection 375°F (191°C) Cuisson au four 350°F (177°C) Grillage 555°F (291°C)

29

Fonction de verrouillage Pour désactiver les touches du tableau de Utilisation Cuisson au four (BAKE) Utilise uniquement une source de chaleur sous les aliments. Ce commande lorsque le four n’est pas utilisé : mode est le mode en veille, il n’est pas à convection. Tous les

• Pousser et tenir la touche CANCEL · SECURE (annuler/ sécuriser) pendant environ six secondes. Les touches du tableau de commande arrêteront de fonctionner et “OFF“ aliments cuiront bien dans ce mode. Conseils pour la cuisson 1 2

(arrêt) apparaîtra sur l’affichage. Seules les touches CANCEL · SECURE (annuler/ sécuriser) et des lumières fonctionneront. Sur les fours doubles, le fait d’appuyer sur l’une ou l’autre des touches CANCEL · SECURE verrouille tableau de commande des deux fours. • Pour réactiver le tableau de commande, appuyer et tenir la touche CANCEL · SECURE pendant six secondes. REMARQUE Le fait d’utiliser la fonction de verrouillage arrête les minuteries si elles sont en marche. Fonction de minuterie de 12 heures Le four est muni d’une fonction qui l’arrête automatiquement après 12 heures d’utilisation continue. La minuterie de 12 heures est réinitialisée lorsqu’on change la température de cuisson ou le mode de cuisson. La fonction activée dès que l’appareil ménager est fabriqué. REMARQUE La minuterie de 12 heures est désactivée lorsque la fonction sabbat est utilisée. Pour désactiver ou activer la minuterie de 12 heures... • Tout en arrêtant le four, appuyer et tenir la touche TIMER 1 pendant environ dix secondes, jusqu’à ce que le panneau de commande émette un timbre et que “12Hr” apparaît sur l’affichage. “ON” (en marche) apparaîtra sur l’affichage si la minuterie de 12 heures est activée. • Appuyer sur la touche # pour désactiver (ou activer) la minuterie de 12 heures • Appuyer sur la touche CANCEL · SECURE (annuler/ sécuriser) pour sauvegarder les changements et retourner à l’horloge. Comprendre les divers modes du four Les trois styles de cuisson de base d’un four sont : Cuisson au four - La cuisson douce des aliments secs comme les biscuits, les gâteaux, les soufflés, etc. Rôtissage - La cuisson des viandes ou des légumes pen dant un certain temps Grillage - Cuisson avec une chaleur intense pendant une courte durée • Suivre le temps et la température de cuisson initiales de la recette. • Ne pas ouvrir la porte du four fréquemment pendant la cuis son. Dans la mesure du possible, regarder par la fenêtre de la porte du four pour vérifier la cuisson. • Utiliser les minuteries pour déterminer le temps de cuisson. • Utiliser la position de la grille la plus basse. • Attendre jusqu’au temps de cuisson le plus court avant de vérifier les aliments. Pour la plupart des produits de bou langerie- pâtisserie, le fait qu’un cure-dent en bois placé au centre du plat sort propre est un signe que ce plat est prêt. Le four offre trois modes de cuisson par convection... • Convection Pure (PURE CONV) • Cuisson au four par convection (CONV BAKE) • Rôtissage par convection (CONV ROAST) En règle générale, dans les modes de cuisson par convection, la durée est environ 25 % plus courte. Régler la minuterie 15 minutes avant le temps le plus court indiqué et ajouter plus de temps au besoin. Pour les modes de convection pure et de cuisson par convection... Certaines recettes, surtout celles qui sont faites maison, peuvent nécessiter des rajustements et des essais pendant la conver sion de la cuisson standard à la cuisson par convection. Si on est incertain sur la façon de convertir une recette, commencer par préparer la recette à l’aide des réglages de cuisson standard. Si les aliments ne sont pas cuits convenablement pendant ce premier essai de la cuisson par convection, rajuster une variable de la recette à la fois (comme le temps de cuisson, la position de la grille ou la température) et répéter l’essai de la cuisson par convection. Au besoin, continuer de rajuster une variable de la recette à la fois jusqu’à l’obtention de résultats satisfaisants.

30 Utilisation

Convection Pure (PURE CONV) La circulation d’air uniforme fournie par la convection pure permet d’utiliser plus de capacité du four à la fois. Utiliser ce Le four offre deux modes de grillage... • Grillage (BROIL) • Grillage par convection (CONV BROIL)

mode pour la cuisson sur une seule grille, la cuisson sur plus ieurs grilles, le rôtissage, ainsi que la préparation de repas com 1 2 ADVERTISSEMENT

plets. Bon nombre d’aliments, comme la pizza, les gâteaux, les biscuits, les muffins, les pains mollets et les aliments congelés prêts à servir peuvent être préparés sur deux ou trois grilles à la fois. La convection pure convient également au canard entier rôti, à l’épaule d’agneau et au gigot d’agneau court. Direction du flux d’air AIR FLOW • Lorsqu’on utilise les réglages grillage (BROIL) et grillage par convection (CONV BROIL), la porte du four doit être complètement fermée. • Pour éviter d’endommager la sonde thermique, la retirer du four pendant l’utilisation de l’un ou l’autre des modes de grillage. Si la sonde thermique est branchée, les modes de grillage ne fonctionneront pas. Le symbole de la sonde thermique clignotera si la sonde thermique est branchée lorsqu’on tente de mettre le four en marche dans un des modes de grillage. Le grillage est une façon rapide et savoureuse de préparer de nombreux aliments, dont les biftecks, le poulet, les côtelettes, les hamburgers et le poisson. Grillage (BROIL) Le mode de grillage utilise une source de chaleur supérieure. Le mode est idéal pour le grillage de plus petites quantités de nour

riture. 1 2

Pour la cuisson à plusieurs grilles... • Habituellement, pendant la cuisson à deux grilles, utiliser les positions de grille nos 1 et 3, ou 2 et 4 (en comptant à partir du bas). • Pendant l’adaptation d’une recette à une seule grille à la cuisson à plusieurs grilles, il peut être nécessaire d’ajouter du temps de cuisson en raison du volume supplémentaire d’aliment dans le four. Cuisson au four par convection (CONV BAKE) Utiliser ce mode pour la cuisson à une seule grille. La combi naison du ventilateur de convection et de la source de chaleur 1 2 inférieure est idéale pour les croustades aux fruits, les flans 1 2 pâtissiers, les tartes aux fruits à deux croutes, les quiches, les pains à la levure dans un moule à pain et les popovers. De plus, il est préférable d’utiliser ce mode pour cuire les aliments dans un plat en céramique creux ou des récipients en terre cuite. La plupart de ces aliments cuisent dans un plat creux et exigent du brunissement sur le dessus et au fond. Rôtissage par convection (CONV ROAST) Le mode de rôtissage par convection du four se sert d’une com binaison du ventilateur de convection et des sources de chaleur 1 2 1 2 supérieure et inférieure. Ce mode est idéal pour les rosbifs de côte, les dindes, les poulets, etc. Grillage par convection (CONV BROIL) d’une source de chaleur supérieure. Ce mode est idéal pour les aliments qui n’ont pas besoin d’être tournés comme les coupes 1 2 de viande plus minces, le poisson et le pain à l’ail. 1 2 Conseils pour le grillage • La présence de fumée est normale et nécessaire pour donner une saveur grillée aux aliments. • Il est recommandé de régler la minuterie pour chronométrer le processus de grillage. • Toujours utiliser une lèchefrite et un gril pour l’égouttage du gras et de la graisse supplémentaire, ce qui réduira les éclaboussures, la fumée et les flambées. • Commencer avec une lèchefrite à température ambiante pour une cuisson égale. • Utiliser des pinces ou une spatule pour tourner et enlever les viandes. Ne jamais percer la viande avec une fourchette parce que les jus naturels s’échapperont. • Griller les aliments sur le premier côté pour un peu plus de la moitié du temps recommandé, assaisonner et tourner. Assaisonner le deuxième côté juste avant de retirer les ali ments du four.

31

Minuterie (Timer) ADVERTISSEMENT Utilisation Pour arrêter une minuterie avant l’écoulement du temps : • Appuyer deux fois sur les touches TIMER 1 (minuterie 1) ou Les minuteries sur le four ne mettent pas le four en marche ou ne l’arrêtent pas. Elles servent uniquement à chronométrer. Lorsqu’on veut arrêter le four automatiquement, utiliser les Fonctions de cuisson au démarrage différé. REMARQUE Le fait d’appuyer sur la touche CANCEL · SECURE (annuler/ sécuriser) ne réinitialise ou n’arrête PAS les minuteries. Le four est muni de deux minuteries intégrées : • On peut utiliser les deux minuteries en même temps. • On peut chronométrer d’une minute à 99 heures et 59 min utes. • Le symbole de la minuterie apparaît sur l’affichage lorsqu’une des minuteries ou les deux minuteries sont utilisées. Pour utiliser les minuteries sur le four... 1. Appuyer sur la touche TIMER 1 (minuterie 1) ou TIMER 2. 2. Entrer les heures et minutes à chronométrer sur les touches numérique et appuyer sur START (démarrer). Pour entrer 11 heures, 30 minutes, appuyer sur 1-1-3-0. Pour chronométrer 25 min utes, appuyer sur 2-5. Lorsqu’on appuie sur START, le temps apparaîtra sur l’affichage et le compte à rebours commencera. Lorsque la minuterie a terminé son compte à rebours, 0:00 1 2 apparaîtra sur l’affichage. Le chiffre de la minuterie clignotera sur l’affichage et émettra un timbre. Les timbres de la minuterie 1 et la minuterie 2 ont différents sons. Minuterie Son du timbre 1 2 1 1 seconde en marche, 1 seconde arrêtée, répéter 2 1 seconde en marche, 1 seconde arrêtée, 2 sec ondes en marche, 1 seconde arrêtée, répéter 1 2 Lorsque le timbre retentit, appuyer sur une des touches minute rie (TIMER) pour arrêter le timbre. Appuyer sur CLOCK (hor loge) pour retourner à l’affichage principal. Pendant que la minuterie est en marche, on peut... • Appuyer sur CLOCK pour voir l’heure actuelle. • Appuyer sur TIMER 1 pour voir le temps qui reste sur la minuterie 1. • Appuyer sur TIMER 2 pour voir le temps qui reste sur la minuterie 2. Pour changer le temps sur une minuterie : 1. Appuyer sur les touches TIMER 1 (minuterie 1) ou TIMER 2. 2. Entrer le nouveau temps sur les touches numérique et appuyer sur START (démarrer). TIMER 2. La minuterie s’arrêtera et l’affichage s’effacera. • Appuyer sur CLOCK pour retourner à l’affichage principal. Fonctions de cuisson au démarrage différé Pour régler le four pour qu’il se mette en marche ou s’arrête automatiquement plus tard, on peut se servir des fonctions de cuisson au démarrage différé. Choses à connaître au sujet de la cuisson au démarrage différé • Les options au démarrage différée fonctionnent pour tous les modes de cuisson, sauf le grillage et le grillage par convec tion. • On peut se servir des minuteries avec les fonctions au démar rage différé. Les minuteries n’ont pas d’effet sur les options au démarrage différé. • On peut annuler le cycle de démarrage différé en tout temps en appuyant sur la touche CANCEL · SECURE. ADVERTISSEMENT La salubrité des aliments est un élément important de l’utilisation des fonctions au démarrage différé : • Éviter d’utiliser des aliments qui seront avariés au moment où on attend le démarrage de la cuisson. Les aliments habituels à éviter comprennent : ceux qui contiennent des oeufs et des produits laitiers, des potages crème, ainsi que des viandes, de la volaille et du poisson cuits et crus. • Ne pas laisser les aliments dans le four après l’arrêt complet. Lorsque la température descend sous 140°F (60°C), les bactéries peuvent se développer (après le mode maintien). • Si la cuisson ne commence pas immédiatement, placer uniquement des aliments très froids ou congelés dans le four. La plupart des aliments décongelés ne devraient jamais être laissés dans le four pendant plus de deux heures avant le début de la cuisson. Trois façons d’utiliser la cuisson au démarrage différé • Régler l’heure à laquelle le four doit s’allumer (START TIME) et régler l’heure à laquelle le four doit s’arrêter soit à l’aide de la touche COOK TIME (durée) soit à l’aide de la touchee STOP TIME (heure d’arrêt). • Régler uniquement l’heure de démarrage START TIME ensuite arrêter le four manuellement à la fin de la cuisso. • Mettre le four en marche manuellement et régler l’heure à laquelle le four doit s’arrêter soit à l’aide de la touche COOK TIME soit à l’aide de la touche STOP TIME.

32

Au sujet du mode maintien Utilisation Autres choses à connaître au sujet de la • Lorsqu’on règle le four pour arrêter la cuisson à l’aide des touches COOK TIME (durée) ou STOP TIME (heure d’arrêt), il passera au mode “maintien” (HLd apparaîtra sur l’affichage) à la fin du temps de cuisson réglé. Le four gardera la température à 150°F (66°C) pendant deux heures. • Appuyer sur CANCEL · SECURE (annuler/sécuriser) pour arrêter complètement le four. • Afin d’empêcher les aliments de coller, ne pas laisser les aliments dans le four après son arrêt (après la fin du mode maintien). Utilisation de la cuisson au démarrage différé REMARQUE La cuisson au démarrage différé ne peut pas être utilisée en mode Sabbat. 1. Rajuster les grilles au niveau approprié. 2. Placer les aliments dans le four. 3. Appuyer sur la touche du mode de cuisson désiré, sauf le grillage (BROIL) ou le grillage par convection (CONV BROIL). 4. Entrer la température de cuisson désirée sur les touches numérique. 5. Si on veut mettre le four en marche immédiatement et l’arrêter automatiquement plus tard, passer à l’étape 8. 6. Appuyer sur la touche START TIME (heure de démarrage). 7. Entrer l’heure à laquelle le four doit se mettre en marche sur les touches numérique. Pour 12:35, appuyer sur 1-2- 3-5. On peut entrer une heure jusqu’à 22 heures et 59 minutes d’avance. Appuyer sur la touche # pour changer à “AM” ou “PM”. 8. Si on veut régler l’heure d’arrêt ou le temps de cuisson, appuyer sur les touches STOP TIME (heure d’arrêt) ou COOK TIME (durée), autrement passer à l’étape 9. Le fait d’utiliser la touche COOK TIME permet d’indiquer quand le four s’arrêtera en entrant le temps de fonctionnement. Uti liser la touche STOP TIME permet d’indiquer quand le four s’arrêtera en entrant l’heure. L’une ou l’autre des touches atteint le même résultat. 9. Appuyer sur START (démarrer). 10. Si on a entré une heure de démarrage START TIME, le four commencera à l’heure de démarrage entrée. 11. Si on a entré une durée (COOK TIME) ou une heure d’arrêt (STOP TIME), le four cuira jusqu’à l’heure entrée et passera ensuite au mode maintien. IMPORTANT La fonction préchauffage (voir page 27 pour de description détaillée) est désactivée lorsque les fonctions de cuisson des démarrage différé est utilisée. Le temps requis pour chauffer doit être inclus dans le temps de cuisson. Le temps de cuisson requis augmente avec la température de cuisson et la quantité de aliment. cuisson au démarrage différé Lorsque le four est en mode de démarrage différé... • Appuyer sur la touche CLOCK pour voir l’heure de démar rage actuelle. • Appuyer sur la touche START TIME pour voir l’heure de démarrage. • Appuyer sur la touche STOP TIME pour voir l’heure d’arrêt. • Appuyer sur la touche COOK TIME pour voir le temps de cuisson. Utilisation de la sonde thermique Pendant la cuisson des aliments comme les rôtis et la volaille, la température interne est la meilleure façon de savoir quand ils sont bien cuits. La sonde thermique du four est une manière facile d’enlever la conjecture du rôtissage. On peut l’utiliser pour cuire les aliments à la température exacte désirée. La sonde peut être réglée de 100°F (38°C) à 200°F (92°C). ADVERTISSEMENT • Pour réduire la possibilité de brûlures, utiliser des coussinets chauds pour manipuler, brancher et débrancher la sonde thermique lorsque le four est chaud. • Utiliser les poignées pour insérer et retirer l’aiguille de la sonde thermique et la brancher au four. Le fait de pousser ou tirer sur l’un ou l’autre des extrémités du câble pourrait endommager la sonde thermique. Afin d’éviter de briser la sonde thermique, s’assurer que les aliments sont entièrement décongelés avant d’insérer l’aiguille. • Afin de prévenir les dommages, ne jamais laisser la sonde thermique à l’intérieur du four lorsqu’il n’est pas en marche, surtout pendant le cycle d’autonettoyage. • Le fait d’utiliser une sonde thermique différente que celle fournie avec le four peut endommager la sonde et/ou le four. REMARQUE • La sonde thermique ne fonctionne pas avec les modes de grillage (BROIL) ou de grillage par convection (CONV BROIL) et sabbat. Brancher la sonde thermique pendant l’utilisation des modes ci dessus, le symbole de la sonde thermique clignotera pour indiquer une erreur. • Si la sonde thermique est accidentellement débranchée après avoir appuyé sur la touche PROBE (sonde), le symbole de la sonde thermique clignotera et le message d’erreur “OPn” apparaîtra sur l’affichage. Utilisation 1. Préparer la viande pour la cuisson avant de régler le four. Insérer la brochette de la sonde thermique dans le centre de la viande. S’assurer que la brochette n’est pas à l’intérieur des parties grasses de la viande et ne touche pas d’os. La pointe devrait se trouver dans la partie la plus épaisse de la viande. Lorsqu’on cuit de la volaille, la pointe de la bro chette devrait se trouver vers le centre de l’oiseau. continué...

33 Utilisation

Utilisation de la sonde thermique (suite) 2. Avant de placer la viande dans le four et avec la porte fermée, appuyer sur la touche BAKE, CONV BAKE, PURE CONV or CONV ROAST. La température préréglée appa raîtra sur l’affichage. Si on veut cuire avec une température différente, il faut l’entrer sur les touches numérique. 3. Appuyer sur START (démarrer). 4. Laisser le four se préchauffer. Il peut y avoir un brunisse ment excessif si la viande est placée dans le four pendant le préchauffage (lorsque “PRE-” apparaît sur l’affichage). Après le préchauffage du four (“PRE-” disparaît), placer la viande dans le four à l’aide de poignées. Insérer la sonde thermique branchée au raccord à l’intérieur du four. 5. Appuyer sur la touche PROBE (sonde). La tem pérature préréglée de la sonde (160°F/71°C), ainsi que le symbole de la sonde apparaîtront sur l’affichage. Si on veut cuire avec une différ ente température de sonde, il faut l’entrer sur les touches numérique. Utiliser le tableau de Température de cuisson sécuritaire minimum du USDA comme lignes directrices Pour annuler le fonctionnement de la sonde thermique pendant la cuisson... • Appuyer deux fois sur la touche PROBE. Débrancher la sonde thermique du raccord. Le four retournera aux réglages précédents. Détails importants au sujet de la sonde thermique : • Il faut sélectionner le mode de cuisson précis (BAKE, CONV BAKE, PURE CONV ou CONV ROAST) avant d’appuyer sur la touche PROBE (sonde). • Lorsqu’on appuie sur la touche PROBE (sonde), le cycle de préchauffage est désactivé. Pour de meilleurs résul tats, sélectionner le mode de cuisson et laisser le four se préchauffer avant d’appuyer sur la touche PROBE. • La fonction de la sonde thermique s’annulera automatique ment après 30 secondes si la sonde thermique n’est pas branchée. Le symbole de la sonde thermique clignotera sur l’affichage. • La fonction de la sonde thermique s’annulera automatique ment après 30 secondes si la sonde thermique n’est pas

pour le type de viande à cuire. 1 2 branchée. Le symbole de la sonde thermique clignotera sur

6. Appuyer sur START (démarrer). Si on n’appuie pas sur START, la sonde de fonctionnera pas. Lorsque la sonde thermique est utilisée, le four contrôlera automatiquement le temps de cuisson. La température sur l’affichage pendant la cuisson est la température mesurée à l’intérieur de la viande. Le four continuera la cuisson jusqu’à ce que la température de la viande atteigne la température entrée. Lorsque la viande est prête, le four passera au mode maintien. La température sera réduite à 150°F (66°C) pendant deux heures pour garder la viande chaude et sécuritaire à servir. Afin de prévenir les maladies, ne pas laisser les aliments dans le four après qu’il s’arrête. Appuyer sur CANCEL · SECURE (annuler/ sécuriser) pour annuler le mode maintien et arrêter complète ment le four. Pour changer la température de la sonde thermique pendant la cuisson... 1. Appuyer sur PROBE (sonde). La température actuelle de la sonde apparaîtra sur l’affichage 2. Entrer la nouvelle température. Le four passera automa tiquement à la nouvelle température de la sonde. Si on n’entre pas une température, le four continuera la cuisson au réglage actuel. Pour changer le mode de cuisson pendant la cuisson à la sonde thermique... 1. Appuyer sur la touche CANCEL · SECURE (annuler/ sécuriser). 2. Appuyer sur la touche BAKE, CONV BAKE, PURE CONV or CONV ROAST. Si on veut cuire à une différente tempéra ture que la température préréglée du four, il faut l’entrer sur les touches numérique. 3. Appuyer sur START (démarrer). l’affichage STOP TIME ou durée COOK TIME , et passera ensuite au mode maintien. Température de cuisson sécuritaire minimum du USDA Viande hachée et mélanges de viande Boeuf, porc, veau, agneau 160°F (71°C) Dinde, poulet 165°F Boeuf frais, veau et agneau À point 145°F (63°C) Volaille Dinde, poulet, entier (température prise dans la cuisse) 165°F (74°C) Poitrines de volaille, rôti 165°F (74°C) Cuisses, ailes, jambes de volaille 165°F (74°C) Canard et oie 165°F (74°C) Farce 165°F (74°C) Porc frais Moyen 160°F (71°C) Jambon Fraîche (crue) 160°F (71°C) Préchauffé (réchauffé) 140°F (60°C) REMARQUE : Les températures de cuisson interne sécuritaire minimum sont sous réserve de modification. Il y a des modifica tions dans les bactéries et les températures requises pour les éradiquer. Pour obtenir les renseignements les plus à jour, com muniquer avec le Département de l’agriculture des États-Unis. fsis.usda.gov

34

Déshydrater/Décongélation Utilisation Mode Sabbat

Le four peut être utilisé pour déshydrater ou décongeler des aliments à des réglages de chaleur réduite en mode convection pure. ADVERTISSEMENT Afin de prévenir l’intoxication alimentaire, cuire les viandes immédiatement après leur décongélation. Pour déshydrater ou décongeler des aliments 1. Régler les grilles au niveau approprié. 2. Placer les aliments au centre de la grille de four. Si on dés hydrate des aliments, préparer des aliments tel que recom mandé, ensuite les placer sur le séchoir vertical. 3. Appuyer sur la touche PURE CONV (convection pure). 4. Pour décongeler des viandes, entrer la température jusqu’à 150°F (66°C) sur le clavier numérique. Pour la déshydrata tion, régler d’abord la température selon le tableau ci-des sous. Pendant la déshydratation, il peut être nécessaire de faire un essai avec des températures plus élevées. 5. Appuyer sur START (démarrer). Type d’aliments Température de déshydratation Fruit 100°F (38°C) Légumes 125°F (52°C) Viande 150°F (66°C) Fermenter (PROOF) On peut utiliser le four pour fermenter les pâtes à levure à base de farine bise à une basse température sans courant d’air à l’aide du mode cuisson au four (BAKE). 1. Appuyer sur la touche BAKE*. 2. Entrer la température de 100°F (38°C) sur les touches numérique. 3. Appuyer sur START (démarrer). 4. Placer la pâte dans un bol graissé à l’intérieur du four. Cou vrir le bol d’un chiffon humide ou d’un film étirable recou vert d’une vaporisation antiadhésive. 5. Allumer les lumières du four 6. Régler la minuterie pour le temps de levage indiqué dans la recette. * Modèles de fours doubles ont une touche fermenter (PROOF) pour le four inférieur. On peut appuyer sur cette touche au lieu de la touche BAKE. Lorsqu’on utilise la touche fermenter (PROOF), le four règle la température au préalable. Le mode sabbat sur le four respecte les lois juives pour l’utilisation pendant le sabbat et les jours saints. Cette fonction permet au four d’effectuer deux types de cuisson, la cuisson au four (BAKE) et la convection pure (PURE CONV). Lorsque le four est réglé au mode sabbat, les fonctions suivantes sont désactivées : • Les lumières du four • Toutes les touches, sauf CANCEL · SECURE, START et les touches 0 et 2. NOTE • “SAb” apparaît sur l’affichage lorsque le mode sabbat est en cours d’utilisation. • Comme avec tous les autres modes de cuisson, pendant le réglage du panneau de commande pour le fonctionnement sabbat, il faut appuyer sur toutes les touches avec des intervalles de moins de six secondes entre elles. Autrement, le tableau de commande s’effacera automatiquement. • Sur les modèles de fours doubles, on ne peut pas utiliser un four en mode normal pendant que l’autre four fonctionne en mode sabbat. • Le mode sabbat ne fonctionnera pas si la sonde thermique est branchée (le symbole de la sonde thermique clignotera). • La cuisson au démarrage différé ne peut pas être utilisée en mode sabbat. • En cas de panne de courant, le four retournera au mode sabbat au dernier réglage de température lorsque le courant est rétabli. • Si une ou les deux minuteries fonctionnent, le four annule le fonctionnement des minuteries lorsque le mode sabbat est sélectionné. • On peut utiliser un thermomètre de grille pour surveiller la température du four. Réglage de la fonction sabbat 1. Appuyer sur la touchee #. 2. Appuyer sur la touche BAKE (cuisson au four) ou PURE CONV (convection pure). Sur les fours doubles, s’assurer d’appuyer sur la touche BAKE ou PURE CONV du four qu’on veut utiliser. 3. Appuyer à plusieurs reprises sur les touche se 0 ou 2 pour changer la température de cuisson présélectionnée montrée sur l’affichage. 4. Appuyer (uniquement) sur la touche START (démarrer). Le four passera au mode sabbat et fonctionnera selon la méthode sélectionnée à l’étape 2. Ce qu’il faut connaître au sujet du mode sabbat • La touche CANCEL · SECURE (annuler/sécuriser) sur le four demeure active afin de pouvoir annuler la fonction sabbat ou arrêter le four. Sur les fours doubles, les deux touches CANCEL · SECURE demeurent actives afin de pouvoir arrêter un four et laisser l’autre fonctionner. continué...

35 Utilisation

Ce qu’il faut connaître au sujet du mode sabbat (suite) • Sur les fours doubles, on peut répéter les étapes 2 à 4 pour démarrer l’autre four. Certains modèles de fours doubles sont équipés pour la convection pure dans seulement un four. • Pendant la cuisson, le fait d’appuyer sur la touche 2 et d’appuyer ensuite sur START, (démarrer), indique au four d’augmenter la température de 25 °F (15°C). Le fait d’appuyer sur la touche 0 et d’appuyer ensuite sur START, indique au four de diminuer la température de 25°F (15°C). En conformité avec la loi juive, les éléments de cuisson seront rajustés de façon aléatoire lorsqu’on appuie sur ces touches et aucune modification ne sera vue sur l’affichage. Sur les fours doubles, il faut appuyer sur la touche BAKE ou PURE CONV (convection pure) du four pour lequel on veut changer la température avant d’appuyer sur la touche 0 ou 2. Réglage de la température du four Même si le four est réglé à l’usine pour cuire à la température indiquée sur l’affichage, la cuisson peut se faire plus rapidement ou lentement que votre ancien four. ADVERTISSEMENT Ne pas rajuster la température de correction de la sonde ou de l’autonettoyage. Les corrections concernant la sonde et l’autonettoyage doivent demeurer à 0 pour le fonctionnement approprié et/ou sécuritaire. IMPORTANT : Ne pas mesurer la température à l’intérieur du four avec un thermomètre. Ouvrir la porte causera une lecture incorrecte. De plus, la température à l’intérieur du four variera au fur et à mesure que les éléments de cuisson se mettent en marche et s’arrêtent. Si on n’est pas satisfait des résultats du four, on peut régler la température de correction comme suit : 1. Lorsque le four est arrêté, appuyer et tenir les touches 0 et # sur les touches numérique en même temps. Après envi ron trois secondes, “PASS” apparaîtra sur l’affichage. 2. Entrer immédiatement 6428 sur les touches numérique, ensuite appuyer sur START (démarrer). “SLCt” (sélection ner) apparaîtra sur l’affichage. 3. Appuyer sur la touche du mode de cuisson pour lequel on veut corriger la température (CONV BAKE, CONV BROIL, PURE CONV, CONV ROAST, BAKE ou BROIL). La température de correction actuelle apparaîtra sur l’affichage, par exemple “00”, si la température n’a pas été réglée auparavant. 4. Entrer le chiffre correspondant à l’augmenter ou la diminu tion de la température sur les touches numérique. Pour entrer un signe négatif, appuyer sur # après les chiffres. Un signe négatif indique que le four sera refroidi selon la tem pérature entrée. Lorsqu’il n’y a pas de signe devant le chif fre, le four se réchauffera selon la température entrée. On peut entrer un chiffre entre 35°F ou 35°F (18°C ou -18°C). 5. Appuyer sur START pour sauvegarder les modifications. 6. Répéter les étapes 3 à 5 ci-dessus pour tous les autres modes de cuisson devant être corrigés. 7. Appuyer sur CANCEL · SECURE pour sortir du mode de correction.

Entretien et nettoyage

ADVERTISSEMENT • Nettoyer seulement les parties de l’appareil indiquées dans le présent manuel. Nettoyer l’appareil ménager uniquement de la façon précisée. • Afin d’éviter les fumées dangereuses ou les dommages à l’appareil ménager et aux accessoires, utiliser seulement les types de solutions de nettoyage précisées dans le présent manuel. • Afin d’éviter une commotion électrique ou des brûlures, s’assurer que toutes les pièces sont froides avant le nettoyage. • Afin de prévenir les dommages, ne pas utiliser de nettoyants ou applicateurs abrasifs ou corrosifs comme la laine d’acier ou les tampons à récurer, sur n’importe quelle partie de l’appareil, à moins que ce soit indiqué. Utiliser uniquement une éponge, un chiffon doux, une brosse fibreuse ou en plastique, ou un tampon nettoyeur en nylon pour nettoyer les surfaces de l’appareil. • Ne pas utiliser un nettoyeur à vapeur pour nettoyer l’appareil ménager. La vapeur pourrait s’infiltrer dans les composantes électriques et causer un court-circuit. • Ne pas essayer d’enlever les matières renversées importantes avec un objet pointu comme un couteau ou une spatule en métal. Les objets pointus peuvent égratigner les surfaces de l’appareil ménager. Autonettoyage La fonction d’autonettoyage du four • Le four fonctionnera mieux et produira de meilleurs produits de boulangerie-pâtisserie lorsqu’il est propre. Pendant l’autonettoyage, le four est chauffé à des températures très élevées qui brûlent les dépôts sur les surfaces du four. L’autonettoyage élimine le besoin d’un lavage manuel des surfaces intérieures. Le processus d’autonettoyage nécessite de deux à quatre heures. • Il est normal que le four dégage de la fumée pendant le cycle d’autonettoyage. Il est également normal que le four émette des crépitements pendant l’autonettoyage. Ces crépitements sont causés par l’expansion et la contrac tion des surfaces de métal lorsque le four se chauffe et se refroidit. • Le mode d’autonettoyage ne fonctionnera pas si la sonde thermique est branchée.

36 Entretien et nettoyage

ADVERTISSEMENT • Toujours essuyer la graisse excédentaire et les autres aliments renversés à l’aide d’un chiffon humide avant d’utiliser le cycle d’autonettoyage. Cela minimisera la fumée et augmentera l’efficacité. Voir les directives de nettoyage appropriées sur cette page. • Ne pas toucher les surfaces extérieures de l’appareil ménage pendant le cycle d’autonettoyage. Elles seront chaudes. • Les articles laissés dans le four pendant l’autonettoyage s’endommageront ou endommageront le four. Comment utiliser la fonction d’autonettoyage IMPORTANT • Sur les fours doubles, le tableau de commande permettra seulement à un four d’être nettoyé à la fois en raison de la quantité d’électricité consommée. De plus, l’ordinateur du four double empêchera la Le tableau de commande verrouille automatiquement la porte du four pendant l’autonettoyage. Le verrou empêche la porte de s’ouvrir étant donné que les températures élevées à l’intérieur peuvent facilement causer des blessures. Si la porte n’est pas fermée, un message d’erreur s’affichera. Afin de rectifier le problème, appuyer sur CANCEL · SECURE (annuler-sécuriser) et attendre environ une minute, ensuite fermer la porte. Lorsque la porte est bien fermée, recommencer le processus d’autonettoyage. L’affichage montre le statut du cycle d’autonettoyage : • Le symbole de nettoyage indique que l’autonettoyage est en cours. • Le symbole de verrouillage indique que la porte est verrouillée. Pour arrêter le cycle d’autonettoyage, appuyer sur la touche CANCEL · SECURE (annuler-sécuriser). Garder à l’esprit que 1 2 la porte du four demeurera verrouillé (le symbole de verrouil lage s’affichera) jusqu’à ce qu’on puisse ouvrir la porte en toute sécurité. Il faut faire preuve de prudence parce que l’intérieur du

cuisson dans un four pendant que l’autre est en mode autonettoyant. four sera quand même chaud. 1 2

• Les lumières du four ne fonctionneront pas pendant le mode d’autonettoyage du four afin de les protéger. • L’autonettoyage ne fonctionnera pas lorsque la sonde thermique est branchée (le symbole de la sonde thermique clignotera). 1. Avant de procéder à l’autonettoyage, retirer les grilles, le filtre de convection, toute la batterie de cuisine (marmites, poêles, fourchettes, etc.), la sonde thermique, les feuilles d’aluminium et tout autre objet libre de la chambre de cuis son. Voir la page 39 pour connaître les instructions de nettoyage du filtre. 2. Nettoyer la souillure des surfaces en porcelaine de la porte à l’extérieur du joint de porte. Bien rincer les surfaces à l’aide d’une solution de vinaigre et d’eau, puis essuyer. On peut nettoyer les zones très sales avec un tampon à récurer qui n’égratigne pas. 3. Nettoyer le joint de porte en appliquant une solution d’eau et de savon doux par petites touches. MISE EN GARDE • Il faut être extrêmement prudent pendant le nettoyage du joint de porte. Le frotter ou le déplacer peut endommager le joint d’étanchéité serré de la porte nécessaire pour la cuisson et l’autonettoyage. • Pendant l’autonettoyage, ne pas ouvrir la porte par la force une fois qu’elle est verrouillée, cela risque d’endommager la porte ou le verrou. 4. Allumer les ventilateurs ou les évents de la cuisine pour aider à enlever les odeurs pendant le cycle d’autonettoyage. 5. S’assurer que la porte du four est fermée. 6. Appuyer sur la touche Self-clean (autonettoyage). 7. Appuyer sur la touche START (démarrer). Après l’achèvement du cycle d’autonettoyage : • Le verrou de la porte se libérera lorsque l’intérieur se sera refroidi. L’icône de nettoyage, l’icône de verrouillage et le témoin “ON“ (en marche) disparaîtront de l’affichage. Il faut faire preuve de prudence parce que le four sera quand même chaud au moment où le verrou de la porte est libéré. • Réinstaller le filtre de convection et les grilles du four avant d’utiliser le four. • On peut remarquer un résidu de cendre au fond du four après l’autonettoyage. Cette situation est normale. Utiliser un chiffon ou une éponge humide pour essuyer le résidu après le refroidissement du four. Conseils concernant l’autonettoyage • S’il reste de la saleté dans le four après le cycle d’autonettoyage, on peut répéter le cycle. • Effectuer régulièrement l’autonettoyage du four pour préve nir l’accumulation excessive de la saleté. Cela améliore l’efficacité du cycle d’autonettoyage et réduit la fumée et les odeurs. Régler le four à la position d’autonettoyage plus tard 1. Préparer le four pour l’autonettoyage en suivant les instruc tions. Suivre toutes les mesures de sécurité et retirer tous les articles énumérés de l’intérieur du four. Nettoyer le joint de porte et autour de la porte en suivant les instructions. 2. Fermez la porte du four. 3. Appuyer sur la touche Self-clean (autonettoyage). 4. Appuyer sur la touche START TIME (heure de démarrage). 5. Entrer le démarrage différé désiré. Par exemple, appuyer 1-2-3-0 pour 12 h 30. On a la possibilité de choisir l’heure jusqu’à 22 heures et 59 minutes d’avance. continué...

37 Entretien et nettoyage

Régler le four à la position d’autonettoyage plus tard (suite) 6. Appuyer sur START. (démarrer). Lorsqu’on appuie sur START, “DELAY” (différé) apparaîtra sur l’affichage et la porte du four se verrouillera. L’autonettoyage commencera à l’heure choisie. Lorsque le four est réglé pour un autonettoyage ultérieur... • On peut voir l’heure en appuyant sur la touche CLOCK. 3. Tout en vous assur ant que le four est frais, versez 375 ml d’eau (eau distillée de préférence) dans la partie renfoncée du fond du four. Pour une accumula tion légèrement plus importante, vous pouvez mélanger Insérez linge à vaisselle

• Si l’heure est affichée, on peut voir le démarrage différé du cycle d’autonettoyage en appuyant sur START TIME. • Lorsque le cycle d’autonettoyage commence, “DELAY” (différé) disparaîtra et “ON” (en marche) apparaîtra sur l’affichage. Pour annuler le cycle d’autonettoyage au démarrage différé... • Appuyer sur CANCEL/SECURE (annuler/sécuriser). • Si le processus d’autonettoyage n’a pas commencé, atten dre environ une minute pour le déverrouillage de la porte avant de tenter d’utiliser le four. • Si le processus d’autonettoyage est en cours, la porte se déverrouillera lorsque le four se sera assez refroidi pour ouvrir la porte de façon sécuritaire. Le four sera quand même chaud (environ 400oF/204°C). Nettoyage à vapeur rapide Le processus de nettoyage à la vapeur offre une façon rapide et simple de nettoyer une légère accumulation de salissure à l’intérieur du four. Le nettoyage à la vapeur vous permet d’économiser du temps et de l’énergie comparativement au processus d’auto-nettoyage, qui devrait être utilisé pour une accumulation de salissure plus importante. Dans le cas des cuisinières à deux fours, le processus de nettoyage à la vapeur rapide peut se faire dans les deux fours en même temps, con trairement au processus d’auto-nettoyage. ADVERTISSEMENT • Afin d’éviter les brûlures, ne versez pas d’eau dans le four lorsqu’il est chaud. • L’eau qui reste à l’intérieur du four lorsque vous ouvrirez la porte après le nettoyage sera encore chaude • Ne réglez pas le four à une température supérieure à 85 °C (185 °F). 1. Retirer les grilles, le filtre de convection, toute la batterie de cuisine (marmites, poêles, fourchettes, etc.), la sonde thermique, les feuilles d’aluminium et tout autre objet libre de la chambre de cuisson. 2. Tout en vous assurant que le four est frais, versez 375 ml d’eau (eau distillée de préférence) dans la partie renfoncée du fond du four. Pour une accumulation légèrement plus importante, vous pouvez mélanger une cuillère à thé de savon à vaisselle dans l’eau avant de la verser. une cuillère à thé de savon à vaisselle dans l’eau avant de la verser. 4. Fermez la porte du four, appuyez sur le bouton BAKE. Réglez ensuite la température du four à 85 °C (185 °F) et appuyez sur START (démarrer). 5. Réglez la minuterie à 20 minutes. 6. Lorsque le signal sonore de la minuterie retentit, appuyez sur CANCEL · SECURE. (annuler ∙ sécuritaire). Attendez 10 minutes avant d’ouvrir la porte. Lorsqu’on ouvre la porte, il y a habituellement une grande quantité de vapeur, de con densation et d’eau à l’intérieur. 7. À l’aide d’une éponge savonneuse, essuyez d’abord l’intérieur de la fenêtre de la porte. Ensuite, essuyez soi gneusement le reste de l’eau à l’intérieur du four. 8. Frottez l’intérieur du four à l’aide de l’éponge savonneuse jusqu’à ce qu’il ne reste plus de graisse et de salissure sur les surfaces intérieures. Vous pouvez enlever les dépôts de chaux avec un chiffon imbibé de vinaigre. 9. Assurez-vous que toutes les surfaces sont sèches après le nettoyage en essuyant le four à l’aide d’essuie-tout. Laissez la porte entrouverte afin de permettre à la condensation de s’échapper. Répétez le processus chaque fois que la salissure commence à s’accumuler à l’intérieur du four. Nettoyage de l’extérieur Tableau de commande ADVERTISSEMENT Ne pas utiliser de nettoyants ou applicateurs abrasifs sur le tableau de commande. Ils peuvent endommager la finition de façon permanente. Afin d’éviter d’allumer le four accidentellement pendant le nettoyage du panneau de sécurité, activer la fonction de verrouillage. Appuyer la touche CANCEL · SECURE (annuler/sécuriser) pendant six secondes. La fonction de verrouillage désactive les touches. Lorsque le tableau de commande est verrouillé, le mot “OFF” (arrêt) est affiché. Lorsqu’on veut réactiver le tableau de commande, appuyer sur CANCEL · SECURE pendant six secondes. Nettoyer le tableau de commande avec le côté doux d’une éponge humectée d’une solution douce de détergent et d’eau tempérée. Sécher complètement le tableau de com mande à l’aide d’un chiffon doux non pelucheux.

38 Entretien et nettoyage

Nettoyage des surfaces en acier inoxydable MISE EN GARDE Toujours essuyer les surfaces en acier inoxydable (argentées) dans le sens du grain. Pour éviter les égratignures, ne pas utiliser des nettoyants ou des lavettes abrasifs sur les surfaces en acier inoxydable. À l’aide d’un chiffon doux, nettoyer les surfaces en métal avec une solution douce de détergent et d’eau tempérée. Rincer les surfaces et les sécher avec un chiffon doux non pelucheux. Verre (intérieur et extérieur) Utiliser un nettoyant pour verre doux pour enlever les emprein tes digitales. On peut également nettoyer les surfaces de verre avec la crème nettoyante pour table de cuisson de Dacor. Utiliser la crème selon les directives de l’emballage. On peut frotter les lentilles de la lumière du four avec le côté rugueux d’une éponge et de l’eau tempérée savonneuse. Éviter de l’égratigner. Nettoyage de l’intérieur Nettoyage de le filtre de convection ADVERTISSEMENT Pour des raisons de sécurité et pour un bon rendement du four, ne pas utiliser le four pour la cuisson sans le filtre à convection installé. Lorsque le filtre n’est pas installé, les pales de ventilateur en rotation à l’arrière du four sont exposées. Le filtre de convection se trouve à l’arrière de chaque chambre du four. Nettoyer régulièrement le filtre. Si on permet au filtre de s’obstruer, les modes de cuisson par convection du four ne fonc tionneront pas correctement. Il faut également retirer le filtre pendant le cycle d’autonettoyage. Retirer le filtre de convection... Après le refroidissement du four, placer les doigts autour des bords du filtre et pousser doucement vers le haut. Pour nettoyer le filtre... Tremper le filtre dans de l’eau chaude savonneuse. Bien rincer le filtre. On peut également placer le filtre dans le panier du haut d’un lave-vaisselle. Sécher le filtre avant de le réinstaller. Installation du filtre de convection du four... Accrocher soigneusement les agrafes en métal à l’arrière du filtre sur la barre métallique à travers le trou du ventilateur. S’assurer qu’elle est centrée sur le trou. Éviter de gratter les surfaces en porcelaine avec le dos du filtre. Agrafes en métal Joint de porte (sceau) ADVERTISSEMENT Il faut être extrêmement prudent pendant le nettoyage du joint de porte. Le frotter ou le déplacer peut endommager le joint d’étanchéité serré de la porte nécessaire pour la cuisson et l’autonettoyage. Nettoyer le joint de porte en appliquant une solution d’eau et de savon doux par petites touches. Ne pas frotter le joint de porte ou il s’endommager. Grilles MISE EN GARDE Afin de prévenir les dommages, ne pas autonettoyer les grilles du four. Pour nettoyer les grilles du four, appliquer une solution de déter gent et d’eau chaude. Lorsqu’il est nécessaire de nettoyer beau coup de saleté, utiliser un tampon de récurage comme la laine d’acier avec suffisamment d’eau. On peut également utiliser une solution d’une tasse d’ammoniac pour deux gallons d’eau. Sonde thermique MISE EN GARDE Afin de prévenir les dommages, ne pas immerger la sonde thermique dans de l’eau. La sonde thermique est fabriquée de poignées en silicone, d’une fiche et d’une aiguille en acier inoxydable. Pour nettoyer l’aiguille, utiliser un tampon de récurage et de l’eau chaude savonneuse. Essuyer les poignées avec une éponge douce trem pée d’une solution de détergent et d’eau tempérée.

39 Entretien et nettoyage

Remplacement de l’ampoule ADVERTISSEMENT • Afin de prévenir la commotion électrique et/ou les blessures, s’assurer que le four et les ampoules sont froids et que l’alimentation au four est coupée au niveau du bloc d’alimentation avant de remplacer les ampoules. • Toujours s’assurer que les lentilles sont en place pendant le fonctionnement du four. Les lentilles protègent les ampoules du bris causé par les températures élevées du four ou le choc mécanique. • Le fait de remplacer les lentilles sans aligner l’entaille avec la douille 2. Couper l’alimentation à l’appareil ménager au niveau du tableau disjoncteurs ou du coffret de fusibles. 3. Appuyer la main sous la lentille et enlever doucement l’ampoule à l’aide d’une spatule ou d’un couteau de cuisine. Retirer la lentille. 4. Saisir l’ancienne ampoule et la retirer de la douille. 5. À l’aide d’un gant, insérer la nouvelle ampoule dans la dou ille. 6. Pendant la réinstallation de la lentille, aligner l’entaille sur le rebord intérieur avec la douille de la lumière. Appuyer doucement pour remettre la lentille à sa place initiale. 7. Ouvrir

endommagera le dispositif d’éclairage. • Ne pas utiliser un tournevis pour retirer les lentilles. Le remplacement de l’ampoule est jugé comme une opération d’entretien relevant du propriétaire. Avant de remplacer les ampoules qui ne fonctionnent pas, voir Guide de dépannage. IMPORTANT Ne pas toucher l’ampoule à halogène de remplacement avec ses doigts. Les ampoules à halogène sont sensibles aux huiles de la main. Les huiles de la main colleront à l’ampoule et cette dernière brûlera plus rapidement. Pour remplacer les ampoules... 1. Remplacer l’ampoule uniquement avec le numéro de pièce 107112 de Dacor (120 volts, 20 watt seulement). Voir everythingdacor.com. l’alimentation au four au niveau de l’alimentation principale. 8. Réinitialiser l’horloge (voir page 27). Ampoule Douille de la lumière Aligner l’entaille sur le rebord intérieur de la lentille avec la douille de la lumièr

Avant de demander une réparation Guide de dépannage Problème Cause probable À faire

Rien ne fonctionne. L’appareil ménager n’est pas branché à l’alimentation électrique. Demander à un installateur qualifié raccorder l’appareil ménager à la boîter de connexion instal lée par un électricien agréé.

L’alimentation est coupée. Alimenter à l’appareil au niveau du disjoncteur ou du coffret de fusibles. Le tableau de commande est verrouillé. Appuyer sur la touche CANCEL · SECURE pendant 6 secondes pour réactiver le tableau de commande. Panne de courant. Communiquer avec la compagnie d’électricité. Le four ne chauffe pas. Le réglage du four n’est pas correct. Appuyer sur CANCEL · SECURE, Suivre les instruc tions de la section Utilisation.

Les aliments cuisent trop ou pas assez. Le four est réglé pour la cuisson au démarrage différé. On tente de griller avec la sonde ther mique branchée. Temps ou température de cuisson incorrecte. Le four se mettra en marche automatiquement à l’heure préréglée. Appuyer sur CANCEL · SECURE pour retourner au fonctionnement normal. Les réglages de grillage (BROIL) et de grillage par convection (CONV BROIL) ne fonctionneront pas lorsque la sonde thermique est branchée. Suivre les instructions de la section Utilisation.

40 Avant de demander une réparationProblème Cause probable À faire

Le four s’arrête par lui-même après 12 heures de fonc tionnement. La minuterie de 12 heures est en marche. L’appareil est réglé pour s’arrêter automatiquement après 12 heures d’utilisation continue. Arrêter la minuterie de 12 heures. Voir page 30.

Le four ne s’autonettoyage pas. La porte du four n’est pas bien fermée. Vérifier la présence d’obstructions. Bien fermer la porte.

Le four est réglé pour un nettoyage à démarrage différé. L’autonettoyage du four se fera à l’heure préréglée. Appuyer sur CANCEL · SECURE pour retourner au fonctionnement normal.

Le four n’est pas réglé correctement. Suivre les instructions de la section Nettoyage et entretien. La sonde thermique est branchée. Le cycle d’autonettoyage du four ne commencera pas lorsque la sonde thermique est branchée. Débrancher et retirer la sonde thermique. La porte du four ne s’ouvre pas. Le four est réglé pour s’autonettoyer. Si le symbole de verrouillage apparaît, on ne peut pas ouvrir la porte. Attendre la fin de l’autonettoyage ou appuyer sur CANCEL · SECURE.

Les lumières du four ne fonction nent pas. Les lumières du four ne s’éteignent pas. Le four est en mode autonettoyage. La touche de la lumière est désactivée lorsque le four se trouve en mode autonettoyage Le four est en mode sabbat. La touche de la lumière est désactivée lorsque le four se trouve en mode sabbat. Les ampoules sont brûlées. Remplacer les ampoules. La touche des lumières est réglée. Appuyer sur la touche des lumières pour éteindre les lumières.

Le mode sabbat ne fonctionne pas. La sonde thermique est branchée. Le mode sabbat ne fonctionnera pas si la sonde thermique est branchée. Débrancher et retirer la sonde thermique.

Le four passe trop rapidement au mode d’attente après la connexion de la sonde thermique. Le connecteur de la sonde thermique est encore mouillé après le nettoyage. À l’aide d’un chiffon sec, séchez la partie en métal de la prise qui se branche au four.

Le ventilateur continue de fonc tionner après l’arrêt du four. L’heure sur l’affichage n’est pas Fonctionnement normal. Le ventilateur peut fonctionner pendant un certain temps après l’arrêt du four, jusqu’au refroidisse ment des pièces internes. L’heure n’est pas réglée. Régler l’heure. Voir page 27.

affichée correctement. Panne de courant ou l’alimentation a été coupée. Réinitialiser l’heure. Voir page 27.

Ne peut pas régler l’heure. Le four est en usage. On ne peut pas régler l’heure lorsqu’on utilise le four. Arrêter le four pour régler l’heure. L’heure clignote sur l’affichage. Panne de courant ou l’alimentation a été coupée. Arrêter le four pour régler l’heure. Régler l’heure. See page 27.

Le tableau de commande n’émet pas de timbre lorsqu’on appuie sur le panneau de commande et lorsque se termine le compte à rebours de la minuterie. Un code d’erreur apparaît et demeure sur l’affichage, par exem ple “U55.” Le timbre du tableau de commande est désactivé. Un code d’erreur ayant une lettre suivi d’un chiffre qui apparaît et demeure sur l’affichage indique un problème qui ne peut pas être résolu par le client. Activer le timbre. Voir page 27. Communiquer avec un service de dépannage.

41 Garantie et service

Pour obtenir de l’aide Avant de demander une réparation : 1. Passer en revue la section Avant de demander une répa ration de ce manuel (page 40). 2. Effectuer les verifications nécessaires indiquées. 3. Prendre connaissance des conditions générales de la garan tie. 4. Si le problème n’est pas résolu, contacter l’équipe du service à la clientèle de Dacor. Pour des réparations sous garantie, contacter : Téléphone : (800) 793-0093, ext. 2822 (É.-U. et Canada) Du lundi au vendredi, De 6 h à 17 h, heure normale du Pacifique Pour les réparations hors garantie, contacter : Téléphone : (800) 793-0093, ext. 2813 (É.-U. et Canada) Du lundi au vendredi, De 6 h à 17 h, heure normale du Pacifique Pour nous contacter, veuillez consulter notre site Web à : dacor.com/contact-us Garantie Ce Qui Est Couvert CERTIFICAT DE GARANTIE : FOUR MURAL DACOR DANS LES CINQUANTE ÉTATS DES É.-U., LE DIS TRICT DE COLUMBIA ET AU CANADA : GARANTIE COMPLÈTE D’UN AN La garantie s’applique uniquement à l’appareil Dacor vendu au premier acheteur, à partir de la date de l’achat au détail initial ou la date de clôture de la nouvelle construction, la période la plus longue l’emportant. La garantie est valide sur les produits ache tés neufs d’un distributeur agréé de Dacor ou d’un autre vendeur autorisé de Dacor. Si votre appareil Dacor arrête de fonctionner pendant la période de un an à compter de la date d’achat originale en raison d’une défec tuosité des matériaux ou du travail, Dacor y remédiera sans frais. Tous les dommages esthétiques (comme les égratignures sur l’acier inoxydable, les imperfections dans la porcelaine/peinture, etc.) du produit ou des accessoires inclus doivent être signalés à Dacor dans les 60 jours suivant la date d’achat originale afin d’être couverts par la garantie. À l’exception de ce qui est susmentionné, les pièces consommables comme les filtres et les ampoules ne sont pas couvertes par la garantie et relèvent de la responsabilité de l’acheteur. LIMITES DE LA COUVERTURE Le service sera effectué par une entreprise de services désignée par Dacor pendant les heures d’ouverture ordinaires. Veuillez noter que les fournisseurs de services sont des entreprises indépendantes et ne sont pas des agents de Dacor. Les produits exposés par le distributeur et ceux exposés dans la maison témoin dont la date de production est d’au moins cinq ans, les produits vendus tels quels et les produits installés pour l’utilisation non résidentielle, comprenant entre autres les organ ismes religieux, les casernes de pompiers, les chambres d’hôtes et les spas ont uniquement une garantie d’un an pour les pièces. Les coûts de la livraison, de l’installation, de la main-d’oeuvre et des autres services relèvent de la responsabilité de l’acheteur. La garantie est nulle et non avenue pour un produit modifié ou endommagé, ou un produit n’ayant pas de numéro de série ou d’étiquettes. Le propriétaire doit fournir, sur demande, la preuve d’achat ou le relevé de clôture de la nouvelle construction. Tous les produits Dacor doivent être accessibles aux fins d’entretien. La garantie est nulle et non avenue si un produit non approuvé CSA est transporté des É.-U. HORS DES CINQUANTE ÉTATS DES É.-U., LE DIS TRICT DE COLUMBIA ET AU CANADA : GARANTIE LIMITÉE À LA PREMIÈRE ANNÉE Si votre produit DACOR cesse de fonctionner durant l’année qui suit la date initiale d’achat, à cause d’un défaut de matériel ou de main-d’oeuvre, DACOR fournira une nouvelle pièce, FAB en usine, pour remplacer la pièce défectueuse. Tous les frais de livraison, installation et main-d’oeuvre sont la responsabilité de l’acheteur. Le propriétaire devra fournir une preuve d’achat sur demande et l’appareil devra être accessible pour la réparation. Les coûts de la livraison, de l’installation, de la main-d’oeuvre et des autres services relèvent de la responsabilité de l’acheteur. Ce Qui N’est Pas Couvert • Les légères variations de couleur attribuables aux dif férences des pièces peintes, à l’éclairage de la cuisine, au placement du produit ou à d’autres facteurs; la présente garantie ne s’applique pas aux variations de couleur. • Les appels de service pour former le client aux bons usage et entretien du produit. • Les frais de service pour les déplacements vers les îles et les endroits éloignés, comprenant entre autres, les frais pour les traversiers, les frais des autoroutes à péage ou d’autres dépenses. • Les dommages indirects comprenant entre autres, la perte d’aliments ou de médicaments, les absences du travail ou les repas au restaurant. • Une panne du produit s’il est utilisé pour le commerce, les affaires ou la location ou pour tout autre application que pour l’usage résidentiel du client. • La défaillance du produit causée par une mauvaise installa tion du produit. • Le remplacement des fusibles ou des boîtes de fusibles de la maison ou le réenclenchement des disjoncteurs. • Les dommages au produit causés par un accident, un incendie, une inondation, une coupure de l’alimentation électrique, une augmentation subite du voltage ou d’autres actes de la nature. • La responsabilité quant aux dommages des biens avoisin ants, dont les armoires, les planchers, les plafonds et les autres structures ou objets autour du produit. • Le bris, la décoloration ou les dommages au verre, aux surfaces métalliques, aux composantes plastiques, aux gar nitures, à la peinture, la porcelaine ou autre fini esthétique, causés par un usage ou un entretien inadéquats, un abus ou par négligence.

42 Garantie et service Hors garantie Communiquez avec nous si un problème survient après la péri ode normale de la garantie. Dacor examine chaque problème et préoccupation du consommateur afin de fournir la meilleure solution possible en fonction des circonstances. LES RECOURS OFFERTS DANS LES GARANTIES EXPRESSES CI-DESSUS SONT LES RECOURS UNIQUES ET EXCLUSIFS; PAR CONSÉQUENT AUCUNE AUTRE GARANTIE EXPRESSE N’EST OFFERTE , ET HORS DES CINQUANTE ÉTATS DES É.-U., LE DISTRICT DE COLUMBIA ET AU CANADA, AUCUNE GARANTIE IMPLICITE , Y COMPRIS MAIS SANS Y ÊTRE LIMITÉE , TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADAPTATION À UN USAGE PARTICU LIER POUR UN ACHAT . EN AUCUN CAS , DACOR NE SERA TENU RESPONSABLE POUR DES FRAIS ACCESSOIRES OU DES DOMMAGES INDIRECTS . AUCUNE GARANTIE N’EST OFFERTE , EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE À UN ACHETEUR POUR LA REVENTE. Certains états ou provinces n’autorisent pas de restriction à la durée d’une garantie implicite ni l’exclusion ou la restriction de dommages accessoires ou indirects; les restrictions ou exclusions pourraient donc ne pas s’appliquer à vous. Cette garantie vous donne des droits particu liers et vous pourriez également avoir d’autres droits qui varient selon les états et provinces. 43 Notes 44 © 2014 Dacor, all rights reserved. Part No. 108042 Rev. C Dacor ● 14425 Clark Avenue, City of Industry, CA 91745 ● Phone: (800) 793-0093 ● Fax: (626) 403-3130 ● dacor.com


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL

3M MP225 (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or page errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD 3M MP225 (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary: projector operator's guide 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 h s il gn E 2 © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 E n Contents g l i s h Intended Use Statement .......................................................................... 4 Safety Information ................................................................................... 4 Safety Labels .......................................................................................... 7 Package Contents ................................................................................... 8 Parts ...................................................................................................... 9 Getting Started ..................................................................................... 10 Making Connections .............................................................................. 14 Basic Operating Instructions .................................................................. 18 Cleaning the Projector ........................................................................... 22 Troubleshooting .................................................................................... 23 Specifications ....................................................................................... 25 Limited Warranty ................................................................................... 27 © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 3 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 h Intended Use Statement s i l g n E The 3M Mobile Projector MP225 is designed to operate with the 3M specified battery and 3M power adapter in normal office or home environments. • 0˚–35˚C (32˚–95˚F) • 10–80% RH (without condensation) • 0–1829 m (0–6000 feet) above sea level The ambient operating environment should be free of airborne smoke, grease, oil and other contaminants that can affect the operation or performance of the projector. Use of this product in adverse conditions will void the product warranty. Safety Information Please read, understand, and follow all safety information contained in these instructions prior to the use of this projector. Retain these instructions for future reference. Explanation of Signal Word Consequences m Warning: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury and/or property damage. m Caution: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/or property damage.  Warning: Hazardous voltage 4 © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 E n g l m Warning i s h To reduce the risk associated with hazardous voltage: • Do not modify this product in any way. Use only 3M approved replacement components. • Do not attempt to service this projector other than battery replacement. There are no user-serviceable parts other than the battery. Service to be performed only by a 3M authorized service provider using 3M approved system components. • Do not use the wall power supply in a wet environment. • Do not use with a damaged wall power supply. Replace damaged part prior to use. To reduce the risk associated with fire and explosion: • Do not immerse the projector or battery in any liquid or allow either to get wet. • Use only 3M approved power supply and lithium ion battery provided. • Do not disassemble or short circuit the battery. • Do not dispose of the battery by incineration or fire. • Do not operate this projector in any environment above 35°C (95°F). • Do not expose the projector or battery to direct sunlight in a closed space such as a vehicle. • Do not carry the battery in pockets, purses or handbags where it may contact metal objects. • Do not place battery in contact with metal objects. • Do not expose or store battery in direct sunlight or excessive heat (>60°C [140°F]), or in moist or caustic environments. To reduce the risks associated with driver distraction: • Do not use this projector in a moving motor vehicle. To reduce the risks associated with choking: • Keep AV adapters and other small parts away from young children. © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 5 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 h s i l m Warning g n E To reduce the risk associated with fire and explosion, battery leakage or overheating: • Do not immerse the battery in water or allow it to get wet. • Do not reverse the positive(+) and negative(-) terminals. • Do not connect the battery directly to a wall outlet. Use only the 3M specified wall charger or automobile charger. • Do not strike, throw or subject the battery to physical shock. • Do not pierce the battery or break it open. • Keep batteries out of the reach of children. • Do not recharge the battery near a heat source or in extremely hot conditions. • Do not use the battery if it gives off an odor, generates heat, or becomes discolored or deformed. • Keep away from exposed flames if the battery leaks or emits an odor. • Flush the eyes with water and seek medical attention if the battery leaks and battery fluid gets in the eyes. m Caution To reduce the risks associated with hearing loss: • Be sure to read earphone manufacturer's instructions with respect to volume level. • User is responsible to set a safe volume level. To reduce the risk associated with environmental contamination: • Dispose of all system components in accordance with applicable government regulations. To reduce the risks associated with LED bright light: • Do not stare directly into the projector lens. To reduce the risks associated with tripping and falling: • Position the charging cord and data cables so that they are not a tripping hazard. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS 6 © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225

Safety Labels LITHIUM ION BATTERY Model No. LIN370-002 23Wh (10.95V 2100mAh) P/N 78-6972-0058-8 m Warning • Use a specified charger. E n g l i s h

• Do not throw the battery into fire or heat. • Do not short-circuit the battery terminals. • Do not disassemble the battery. Charging Specification Standard Charge 12.3V/1.1A Cut Off Voltage 9V Max Charge 12.3V/2.1A LED Light Output

CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT IEC60825-1 :1993+A1 :1997+A2:2001 Maximum Radiant Power: 1.693 mW

© 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 7 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225

h s il gn E Package Contents 1 3M Mobile Projector MP225 2 Rechargeable Battery 3 Outlet Adapters (4) 4 Power Adapter 5 Product Warranty and Safety Guide 6 Quick Start Guide 7 AV Cable for Apple® Devices 5 1 2 4 3 6 7

8 © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225

Parts 1 Power Button 2 Mute Button 3 Volume Down Button 4 Volume Up Button 5 Battery Status Button 6 Status Indicator 7 Focus Wheel 8 Lens 9 Speaker 10 Flip Stand 11 Tripod Socket 12 Battery 13 Battery Latch 14 Earphone jack 1 4 2 5 3 6 7 8 9 E n g li s h

15 VGA-A/V Input 16 DC Power Input 9 11 12 13 10 14 15 16

© 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 9 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 h Getting Started s i l g n E Removing the Protective Film When the projector is shipped, there is a protective film between the battery and the battery contacts on the projector. Remove the protective film by removing the battery and the protective film, discard the film and finally install the battery. Install Battery The 3M Mobile Projector MP225 comes with a rechargeable battery. The battery should be fully charged before using the projector with the battery. To install the battery: point the contacts on the battery toward the contacts on the projector, insert the end farthest from the battery latch first, then push down until the battery clicks into place. Remove Battery To remove the battery: slide the battery latch away from the battery and then lift the battery out, starting at the end closest to the latch. Important Note: Use only the 3M specified battery: 78-6972-0058-8. 10 © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 E n Power Adapter g l i s h The power adapter is used to charge the battery or power the projector. There are four outlet adapters to give you the flexibility to power the 3M MP225 projector in most countries. Installing an Outlet Adapter onto the Power Adapter 1 Select the outlet adapter that will plug into your wall outlet. 2 Align the outlet adapter to the power adapter and slide the outlet adapter into place. Replacing the Outlet Adapter 1 Push the button on the outlet adapter. 2 Slide the outlet adapter up. 3 Remove the outlet adapter. 4 Replace with the new outlet adapter. © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 11 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 h s Charge the Battery i l g n E The rechargeable battery gives you up to two hours of battery life. When the battery needs to be charged, the status indicator will flash red. The battery should be fully charged before using the projector. Charge the battery by connecting the power adapter to the projector. 1 Turn the projector power off. 2 Connect the power adapter to the projector’s DC input. 3 Connect the other end of the power adapter into the electrical outlet. 4 The status indicator will change to amber while the battery is charging. 5 Allow three hours to fully charge the battery. When charging is complete, the status indicator will turn off. 110–240 VAC 50/60 Hz Note: The battery status will not appear when the power adapter is connected to the projector. The power adapter icon will appear instead. 12 © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 E n g Battery Charging Notes: l i s h • If the projector power is off, allow three hours for the battery to fully recharge. If the projector power is on, the battery will take longer to charge. • The battery has a lifespan and ages every time it is fully charged and discharged. The battery will gradually lose charge capacity as it ages. Therefore, as the battery ages the battery life will decrease. Battery Maintenance Tips: • Remove the battery when the projector will not be used for one week or longer. • Charge and discharge the battery by turning on the projector at least once a month. • When storing the battery for more than a month, store it at 50% charge. The battery is at 50% charge when the battery icon has three bars. • Do not store a fully discharged battery because it may lose the ability to be recharged. • Do not store a fully charged battery because it may lose the ability to be recharged to full power. © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 13 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 h Making Connections s i l g n E The 3M Mobile Projector MP225 will display informational icons depending on the input device and signal being detected. The 3M MP225 was designed to operate with the 3M VGA and AV cables only. Connecting to Apple® Devices Use the supplied AV cable to input video from an Apple device into the VGA-AV input on the projector. Compatible Devices: The New iPad (3rd Gen.)/iPad 2/iPad 1, iPhone 4S/ iPhone 4/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 3G, iPhone, iPod Touch 4G/3G/2G, iPod Classic, iPod Nano 5G/4G/3G Instructions 1 Connect the AV Cable to the projector’s VGA-AV input. 2 Connect the 30 pin connector to your Apple Device. to Apple® Device 14 © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 E n Connecting to a Composite Video Device g l i s h (Optional Accessory) Use the AV cable to input video from camcorders, digital cameras, DVD players and digital media players into the VGA-AV input on the projector. 1 Connect the AV cable to the projector’s VGA-AV input. 2 Connect the other end of the AV cable to the video device’s audio and video outputs. Tip: Some video devices do not have the standard audio and video connections and may require an AV cable specified by the manufacturer. The AV cable allows you to connect your video device to your TV monitor or your projector and may be purchased from the video device manufacturer. Once you have the AV cable, use the cable adapters to connect the video device cable and the projector cable. © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 15 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 h s Connecting to a Component Video Device i l g (Optional Accessory) n E For component video input, you must purchase the optional 3M MP225 Component AV Cable [3M part number 78-6972-0032-3]. This cable sends a higher quality video signal for the best possible image. 1 Connect the component AV cable to the projector’s VGA-AV input. 2 Connect the other end of the AV cable to the video device’s audio and video outputs. Important Note: There are two red connectors on the Component AV cable. One is for the right audio channel and the other is for the Pr component video signal. Be careful to connect the red audio to red audio and red video to red video. If these connectors are switched, the projected image will appear green and an abnormal noise will come from the right speaker. Tip: Some video devices do not have the standard audio and video connections and may require an AV cable specified by the manufacturer. The AV cable allows you to connect your video device to your TV monitor or your projector and may be purchased from the video device manufacturer. Once you have the AV cable, use the cable adapters to connect the video device cable and the projector cable. Some video devices, by default, will not output a video signal. The video device’s manual should provide instructions on how to change the video output setting. 16 © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 E n Connecting to a Computer (Optional Accessory) g l i s h Use the VGA-audio cable to connect the projector to desktop computers, laptop computers, ultra-portable computers and some personal digital assistants (PDAs). The projector supports VGA, SVGA, XGA, and WXGA resolutions. For best results, set the computer’s resolution to SVGA (800x600). 1 Connect the VGA cable to the 3M Mobile Projector MP225. 2 Connect the VGA cable to the computer’s video and audio outputs. 3 Set the computer resolution to one of the supported resolutions.

Description Resolution (width x height) Refresh Rate

VGA 640 x 480 60 Hz SVGA 800 x 600 60 Hz XGA 1024 x 768 60 Hz WXGA 1280 x 768 60 Hz 1280 x 960 60Hz 1440 x 900 60Hz MAC 640 x 480 67Hz 832 x 624 75Hz 1152 x 870 75Hz © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 17 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 h Basic Operating Instructions s i l g n E Powering On Press and hold the power button for three seconds. Release the power button when the projector begins to project an image and the status indicator turns green. Tip: The video output on some devices is turned off by default. Please refer to the device’s documentation for details on enabling the video output. Powering Off Press and hold the power button for three seconds. Release the power button when the projected image is gone. The projector is off when the status indicator is off or solid amber. When the status indicator is solid amber, the battery is charging. 18 © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 E n Status Indicator Light g l i s h The status indicator light provides information about the projector’s state. Status Indicator Light Meaning Flashes green three times A new power source is connected to the projector and the projector is ready to be powered on. Projector is off. If the power adapter is connected to the

Blank projector, and the battery is installed, the battery has finished charging.

Flashes green The projector is starting up. Solid green The projector is on. Solid amber The projector is off and charging the battery. Flashes amber The projector has overheated and needs to cool. Flashes red twice and pauses then repeats The projector cannot charge the battery. Flashes Red The projector cannot turn on because the battery needs to be charged. On Screen Icons The projector will display a video icon when it is connected to a video cable or a video source. Icon Description/ Meaning The projector detects the audio/video cable. The projector detects an NTSC video input signal. NTSC The projector detects a PAL video input signal. PAL The projector detects the component audio/video cable. The projector detects the video input signal and displays the video source’s resolution and refresh rate below the

RGB 480i 60Hz 800x600 60Hz component icon. The projector detects the VGA-audio cable. The projector detects computer input signal and displays the input resolution and refresh rate The projector does not support the video signal. The projector is measuring and synchronizing to video input signal.

© 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 19 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 h s Adjusting Image Size i l g n E The 3M MP225 Projector can project a diagonal image of 10 to 80 inches (254–2032 mm). Refer to the chart for associated dimensions. Image Size Diagonal Width Height Distance 10 in (25.4 cm) 8 in (20.3 cm) 6 in (15.2 cm) 12 in (30.5 cm) 14 in (35.56 cm) 11 1/4 in (28.4 cm) 8 3/8 in (21.3 cm) 16 3/4 in (42.7 cm) 20 in (50.8 cm) 16 in (40.6 cm) 12 in (30.5 cm) 24 in (61 cm) 26 in (66.04 cm) 20 3/4 in (52.8 cm) 15 5/8 in (39.6 cm) 31 2/8 in (79.2 cm) 32 in (81.28 cm) 25 5/8 in (65 cm) 19 1/4 in (48.8 cm) 38 3/8 in (97.5 cm) 38 in (96.52 cm) 30 3/8 in (77.2 cm) 22 3/4 in (57.9 cm) 45 5/8 in (115.8 cm) 44 in (111.76 cm) 35 1/4 in (89.4 cm) 26 3/8 in (67.1 cm) 53 in (134.1 cm) 50 in (127 cm) 40 in (101.6 cm) 30 in (76.2 cm) 60 in (152.4 cm) 60 in (152.4 cm) 48 in (121.9 cm) 36 in (91.4 cm) 72 in (182.9 cm) 70 in (177.8 cm) 56 in (142.2 cm) 42 in (106.7 cm) 84 in (213.4 cm) 80 in (203.2 cm) 64 in (162.6 cm) 48 in (121.9 cm) 96 in (243.8 cm) Important Note: As you increase the size of the projected image, you will need to decrease (darken) the ambient room lighting. Adjusting the Focus Turn the focus wheel to sharpen the image. 20 © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 E n Adjusting the Volume g l i s h Press the Volume Up or Volume Down button to adjust the sound. A volume bar will appear on the screen to help you set the volume level. Muting the Volume Press the MUTE button to mute the volume. An icon will appear on the screen to indicate the current setting. To restore the volume, press the MUTE button again. If you press the Volume Up or Volume Down button while the volume is muted, the volume will also be restored, but from an initial volume level of zero. Checking the Battery Level To check the battery, press the Battery Status button. A battery bar will appear on the screen indicating the amount of charge currently in the battery. © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 21 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 h s Attaching the Tripod (Optional Accessory) i l g n E The table-top tripod (optional accessory) mounts to the bottom of the projector. Tip: The 3M MP225 Projector will attach to most camera tripods. Cleaning the Projector 1 Turn off the projector and disconnect power and other cables. 2 Use a soft cloth, such as the 3M™ High Performance Cleaning Cloth, to wipe off dust. If the dust is difficult to remove, dampen the cloth with clean water and then wipe the projector clean. Then use a clean cloth to dry the projector. Important Note: Do not use cleaning chemicals or solvents to clean the projector. Cleaning chemicals and solvents may cause the plastic parts to discolor. 22 © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 E n Troubleshooting g l i s h The projector will not turn on. • The battery is not properly installed, or the power adapter is not connected to the projector and a working wall outlet. Test the electrical outlet by plugging another electrical device (like a radio) into the wall outlet to confirm that the wall outlet works. • Attempt to remove and replace the battery. • Hold down the power button until the projector powers up. The status indicator is flashing red when the power button is held down. • The battery needs to be charged or reinstalled. See “Charge the Battery” on page 12. The image is not visible or is very dim. • The 3M MP225 Projector is a battery-operated device and requires controlled lighting conditions. The image may appear very dim in brightly lit rooms. • Make sure the status indicator is green. This indicates that the projector is powered on and projecting an image. • Project the image onto a flat, white surface. • Decrease the light on the surface where the image is being projected. • Decrease the size of the image. • When there is nothing connected to the projector, it will project the startup screen. The projector is displaying a question mark. • The projector does not support the video or computer input signal. Switch to a signal that the projector supports. See “Supported Computer Signals” on page 26. A computer is connected to the projector but the projector will not display the computer’s image. • Plug the VGA-audio cable into the projector and the icon in the upper-left corner of the image will display the “VGA-Audio cable” icon. See “On Screen Icons” on page 19. The projector is making a noise. • The projector has a small fan for cooling the LED light source. The fan turns on and off automatically based on the projector’s internal temperature. The fan will turn on more often in warm environments or at high altitudes. • The speakers make noise when the volume is set to high and nothing is connected to the projector audio inputs. This is typical. Reduce the projector’s volume setting to zero. • The speakers may make noise when the component AV cable is not correctly connected to the video device. There are two red connectors on the component AV cable. One is for the right audio channel and the other is for the Pr component video signal. If these connectors are switched, the projected image will appear green and an abnormal noise will come from the right speaker. © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 23 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 h s My video device is connected to the projector but the projector will not i l g n display the video. E • Unplug the AV cable from the projector and the splash screen will display. • Plug the AV cable into the projector and the icon in the upper-left corner of the image will display the “AV cable” icon. See “On Screen Icons” on page 19. • The video output on some devices is turned off by default. Please refer to the device’s documentation for details on enabling the video output. 24 © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 E n Specifications g l i s h Projector Description Specification Imager Technology LCOS Size 9.4 mm (0.37") Resolution SVGA 800 x 600 Pixels Aspect Ratio 4:3 Projection Distance 8.4 in. – 50.4 in. (213–1280 mm) Image Size 10 in. – 60 in. Diagonal (254–1524 mm)

Throw Ratio (Diagonal: Distance) 1:0.84

Lens Offset 1:1 (none) Inputs DC-in, AV-in (inc. VGA and component) Compatible Resolutions VGA, SVGA, XGA, WXGA, 1280 x 960 @ 60Hz, 1440 x 900 @ 60Hz, MAC 640 x 480 @ 67Hz, 832 x 624 @ 75Hz, 1152 x 870 @ 75Hz Vertical Scan Rate 50 Hz / 60 Hz, MAC - 67 Hz / 75 Hz Horizontal Scan Rate 31.5 kHz – 49.68kHz Video Compatibility NTSC, PAL Video Resolutions 480i, 480p, 576i, 576p, PAL, NTSC, H.264, SD (480i/576i), HD (720p/1080i) Dimensions 5.91 x 2.56 x 1.20 in. (150 x 65 x 30.5 mm) Weight ≤ 11.46 oz (≤ 325 g) Tripod Socket ¼" - 20

Operating Conditions Temperature Range 32 – 95°F (0-35°C)

Humidity Range 10–80% RH without condensation Altitude Range Sea Level to 1,829 m (6000') © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 25 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 h s LIN370-002 Rechargeable Lithium-Ion Battery i l g n Description Specification E Type (LIN370-002) Rechargeable Lithium-Ion Battery Rated Capacity 10.95 V 2100 mAh, 23 Wh Dimensions 81.5 x 64 x 23 mm Important Note: Do not throw battery into trash. Please dispose of it according to federal, state, or local laws. Supported Computer Signals Description Resolution (width x height) Refresh Rate VGA 640 x 480 60 Hz SVGA 800 x 600 60 Hz XGA 1024 x 768 60 Hz WXGA 1280 x 768 60 Hz 1280 x 960 60Hz 1440 x 900 60Hz MAC 640 x 480 67Hz 832 x 624 75Hz 1152 x 870 75Hz Replacement Parts / Accessories Description 3M Part Number Power Adapter with US, EU, UK, AUS plugs 78-6972-0063-8 Lithium-Ion Battery 78-6972-0058-8 AV Video Cable 78-6972-0031-5 Optional VGA Cable 78-6972-0062-0 Optional Component AV cable 78-6972-0032-3 Optional 3M Adapter Cable for Apple® 78-6972-0064-6 26 © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 E n Limited Warranty g l i s h This warranty applies to the continental US only. The warranty terms, conditions, remedy and limitation may vary in other countries. Contact your local 3M Company for warranty information. • The 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 (the “3M product”) is warranted to be free from defects in material or manufacture for a period of 1 year from the date of purchase. • All other accessories included with the 3M product are warranted to be free from defects in material or manufacture for a period of 1 year from the date of purchase. • Optional product accessories that are not sold as part of the 3M product are subject to individual warranties. THE WARRANTIES STATED ABOVE ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE MADE IN PLACE OF ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR ANY INDUSTRY PRACTICE OR CUSTOM OR TRADE USAGE. In the event the 3M product fails to conform to the above stated warranties within the applicable warranty period, your exclusive remedy shall be, at 3M’s option, to replace or repair the 3M product or to refund the purchase price of the 3M product. All replaced parts or products become property of 3M. If the product is repaired, 3M will repair the defective part(s) with a new or used part(s). If the 3M product is replaced, 3M will replace the 3M product with the same or equivalent model and with a new or refurbished 3M product. In the case of an approved warranty claim, the replacement 3M product will carry only the remaining term of the original 3M product’s warranty period as stated above. For warranty service, you must provide proof of the date of the original purchase else the manufacturing code date will be used to establish the start date of the warranty. The following are exclusions to the above listed warranty: a. This warranty does not cover 3M product that is modified or damaged through improper storage, misuse, abuse, accident, vandalism, improper installation, neglect, improper shipping, damage caused by acts of war, disasters such as fire, flood, and lightning, improper electrical current, software problems, interaction with non-3M products, or service other than by an 3M Authorized Service Provider, neglect or mishandling by any person. Normal wear and tear is not covered under warranty. b. 3M product is designed to operate in the typical indoor environment. This warranty does not cover 3M product used outside of the following circumstances: • 100V–240V AC, 50/60 Hz • 0˚–35˚C (32˚–95˚F) • 10–80% RH (without condensation) • 0–1829 m (0–6000 feet) above sea level © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 27 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 h s c. The air intake and exhaust vent must be clear of obstructions. Inadequate air i l g n ventilation will cause the 3M product to malfunction or will cause damage to E the 3M product which will void the warranty. d. This warranty does not cover any additional costs including, but not limited to, those associated with removal, cleaning or installation of the 3M product, adjustments, (mechanical or electronic) made to the 3M product. e. This warranty covers only normal use of the product. 24-hour-per-day or other excessive continual use causes strain and is not considered normal use. f. This warranty does not cover consumables (e.g., batteries). g. This warranty is not transferable. h. 3M is not responsible for warranty service should the 3M label or logo or the rating label or serial number be removed unless otherwise stated in writing for the purposes of private labeling for partnership requirements. i. This warranty does not cover postage, insurance, or shipping costs incurred in presenting your 3M product for warranty service. Said costs are the customer’s responsibility. If a claimed defect cannot be identified or reproduced in service, the customer may be held responsible for cost incurred. Should your warranty upgrade include a “change out” service and the claimed defect cannot be identified or reproduced by the technician, the customer will be responsible for call out costs. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE APPROPRIATE 3M PRODUCT MANUAL OR TO USE THE 3M PRODUCT IN ACCORDANCE WITH 3M’S INTENDED USE STATEMENT, WILL VOID ALL WARRANTIES AND LIMITED REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY STATED IN THE APPLICABLE 3M PRODUCT MANUAL, 3M SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF PROFITS, REVENUE OR BUSINESS) RESULTING FROM, OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO PERFORMANCE, USE OR INABILITY TO USE ANY OF THE 3M PRODUCT. This limitation applies regardless of the legal theory upon which damages are sought. For warranty support, please call or write your local 3M office or a 3M Authorized Service Provider to obtain an RMA # (Return Material Authorization number) before returning the product. If you are inside the Continental United States of America, please contact 3M Customer Service at 1-866-631-1656 or email meetings@ mmm.com. What 3M Will Do To Correct Problems: • If your 3M product requires service, 3M will ask you to bring or send the 3M product, securely packaged in its original container or equivalent, along with proof of the date of original purchase, to your 3M Service Dealer or 3M Service Center. • 3M will, at its option, repair or replace the defective unit without charge for parts or labor. Return of the 3M product will be at 3M’s expense. • When warranty service involves the exchange of the 3M product or of a part, the item replaced becomes 3M property. 28 © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 E n g • The exchanged 3M product or part may be new or previously refurbished l i s h to the 3M standard of quality, and at 3M’s option, the replacement may be another model of like kind and quality. • 3M’s liability for replacement of the warranted 3M product or part will not exceed the original retail selling price of the 3M product. Exchange or replacement products or parts assume the remaining warranty period of the product covered by this limited warranty. FCC STATEMENT - CLASS B This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class “B” computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTICE: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS: This equipment complies with the requirements of FCC equipment provided that the following conditions are met. If the cables include a EMI ferrite core, attach the ferrite core end of the cable to the projector. Use the cables which are included with the projector or specified. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. CE Statement ElectroMagnectic Compatibility Statement: Meets 2004/108/EC Directive Low Voltage Directive: Meets 2006-95-EC Directive. © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 29 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 h s WEEE Statement i l g n E The following information is only for EU-members States: The mark shown to the right is in compliance with Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive 2002/96/ EC (WEEE). The mark indicates the requirement NOT to dispose the equipment as unsorted municipal waste, but use the return and collection systems according to local law. RoHS Statement 3M Mobile Interactive Solutions can provide RoHS certification for products meeting the RoHS directive.1 European (EU) Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive, 2002/95/EC, 1 RoHS compliant means that the product or part does not contain any of the substances in excess of the following maximum concentration values in any homogeneous material, unless the substance is in an application that is exempt under RoHS, as amended:(a) 0.1% (by weight) for lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers; or (b) 0.01% (by weight) for cadmium. This information represents 3M’s knowledge and belief, which may be based on information provided by third party suppliers to 3M. Patents This product includes a component covered by U.S. Patent Nos. 7,071,908 and 7,667,678, Hong Kong Patent No. HK1088976, Australia Patent No. 2004241602, United Kingdom Patent No. 2417360 and other U.S. and international patents pending, owned by Syndiant Inc. 30 © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 3M™ Mobile Projector MP225 E n g li s h © 2012 3M. All Rights Reserved. 31

3M is a trademark of 3M Company. 3 Mobile Interactive Solutions 3M Austin Center 6801 River Place Blvd. Austin, TX 78726-9000 866-631-1656 3MPocketProjector.com meetings@mmm.com © 3M 2012. All Rights Reserved. 78-6971-1627-1


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHROMALOX STAR-14A (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or page errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD CHROMALOX STAR-14A (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary: DIVISION SECTION 4 VTS SALES REFERENCE (Supersedes PG435 ) PG435-1 161-304901-003 DATE NOVEMBER, 2003 Chromalox® STAR-05A, -06A and -14A Cart Kit For Conversion of Fixed Style to Portable Style

STAR-05A Fixed Heater Before Conversion See Page 2 – Fig. 1 STAR-06A Fixed Heater Before Conversion See Page 3 – Fig. 1 STAR-14A Fixed Heater Before Conversion See Page 4 – Fig. 1 STAR-05 Portable Heater After Conversion See Page 2 – Fig. 2 STAR-06A Portable Heater After Conversion See Page 3 – Fig. 2 STAR-14A Portable Heater After Conversion See Page 4 – Fig. 2

© 2010 Chromalox, Inc.

FR NT VIEW BACK VIEWUPPER BRACKET 3/8 X 1-1/2" BOLT WITH LOCKWASHER AND NUT 4.5 kW FIXED STYLE HEATER 4.5 kW FIXED STYLE HEATE 4.5 kW UNIT CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONVERTING A FIXED STYLE INTO A PORTABLE STYLE (Installation of Cart making it a Portable Heater Voids UL Listing) 1. The kit (168-053169-079) that converts a 4.5 KW fixed style radi ant heater into a portable includes the following parts. Verify that all parts are included, if not, contact the Chromalox Service Department at 1-800-368-2493. (1)Lower Leg Assy. (7) 3/8-16 x 1-1/2” Long Bolts (4 Req’d) (2)Upper Handle (8) 3/8-16 Nuts (2 Req’d) (3)Front Leg (9) 3/8 Lockwashers (4 Req’d) (4)Grip (10) 10-32 x 1/2” Long Self Tapping (5)Grille Screw (2 Req’d) (6)Cross Brace FR NT VIEW SIDE VIEW 1/2BACK VIEW 2. Loosen nuts on upper bracket and remove bracket. Bolts, lock washers and nuts will be reused, but upper bracket can be disre garded. 3. Using the bolts, lockwashers and nuts removed in step 3, slide one of the bolts in the extrusion grove to the 4-5/16” dimension and one 3/8” bolt to the 8-3/4” dimension. 4. Place the cross brace (7) on the bolt and secure i n place using the lockwashers and nuts provided. 5. Place lower leg assy. (1) onto brace and upper 3/8” bolts. Slide the 3/8-16 x 1-1/2” long bolts through the cross b race (7) and the lower leg (1). Secure in place with lockwashers and nuts provided. 6. Slide the two (2) 3/8-16 x 1-1/2” long bolts into the top center extrusion. Locate one at 3/4” and the other at 2-1/4” as shown. 7. Place upper handle (3) onto two (2) bolts. Secure in place with washers and nuts provided. 8. Slide grip (7) onto end of upper handle (5). 9. Stand heater vertically. If heater does not sit evenly, loosen nuts that secure lower leg assy and adjust accordingly. 10.Rotate heater back until handle (3) is on floor. 11.Install front leg (4) with two 10-32 x 1/2” long self tapping screws (11). 12.Snap grille (6) into lip of extrusion.

2

23-5/8" 6.0 kW UNIT CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS

32-1/2 3 11-1/2" 9 2 2 56 15 6 Scribe Line on Extrusion INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONVERTING A FIXED STYLE INTO A PORTABLE STYLE (Installation of Cart making it a Portable Heater Voids UL Listing) 1. The kit (168-053169-079) that converts a 6.0 KW fixed style radiant heater includes the following parts. Verify that all parts are included, if not, contact the Chromalox Service Department at 1-800-368-2493. (1) Lower Leg (10) 1/4-20 x 1/2” Long Bolt (4 Req’d) (2) Axle (11) 1/4-20 Square nut (4 Req’d) (3) Wheel (2 Req’d) (12) Pop Rivet (4 Req’d) (4) Cap (2 Req’d) (13) No. 10 Sheet Metal Screw ( Req’d) (5) Upper Handle (14) 3/8-16 x 1-1/2” Long Bolts (2 Req’d) (6) Front Leg (15) 3/8-16 Nuts (2 Req’d) (7) Grip (16) 3/8 Lockwashers (2 Req’d) (8) Grille (17) 10-32 x 1/2” Long Self Tapping (9) Baffle Screw (2 Req’d) 2. Using hammer tap cap (4) onto one end of axle (2). Slide one wheel (3) onto axle. Slide end of axle through both holes of lower leg (1). Slide remaining wheel onto portion of axle protruding through lower leg. Tap cap on axle.

6.0kW Fixed Style Heater 8 2x Loop of Grill 4 7 3. Remove Lower Bracket by removing nuts and washers. 4. Slide the two (2) 3/8” bolts in the outer extrusions to the 4-1/2” dimension and the one (1) 3/8” bolt in the center extrusion to the 8- 15/16” dimension. 5. Place lower leg assy made in step 2 onto the three (3) bolts. Secure in place with washers and nuts removed in step 3. 6. Loosen three nuts on upper bracket and reposition to the 3” dimension shown. 7. Slide the two 3/8-16 x 1-1/2” long bolts (14) into the top center extru sion. Locate one at 3/4” and the other at 2-1/4” as shown. 8. Place upper handle (5) onto two bolts. Secure in place with washers and nuts provided. 10 9. Slide grip (7) onto end of upper handle (5). 10.Stand heater vertically. If heater does not sit evenly, loosen nuts that secure lower leg assy and adjust accordingly. 11.Rotate heater back until handle (5) is on floor. 12.Install front leg (6) with two 10-32 x 1/2” long self tapping screws (17). 13.Install baffle (8) using pop rivets, if pop rivet gun is not available use the No. 10 sheet metal screws. 3 14.Place grille prongs into slots of reflector using a counterclockwise rota tion see Detail A. Insert 1/4-20 screws through looped end of grille with 1/4-20 square nut on opposite side. Tighten screws with screw driver. 15.If fixed heater is being converted to a portable by the factory, then drill out nameplate rivets and replace nameplate with 196-891789-004. 6.0 kW Fixed Style Heater Modified to add cart, baffle and grille

2x Prong of Grill

11-1 2 13.5 kW UNIT CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS 23-5 855-5 8 13.5 kW Fixed Style Heater 3 INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONVERTING A FIXED STYLE INTO A PORTABLE STYLE (Installation of Cart making it a Portable Heater Voids UL Listing) 1. The kit (168-053169-057) that converts a 13.5 kW fixed style radiant heater into a protable includes the following parts. Verify that all parts are included, if not, contact the Chromalox Service Department at 1-800-368-2493. (1)Lower Leg (7) Grille (2 Req’d)

6 2 5 2 5 6 (2)Axle (8) Baffle (3)Wheel (2 Req’d) (9) 1/4-20 x 1/2” long bolt (4 Req’d) (4)Cap (2 Req’d) (10) 1/2-20 Square nut (4 Req’d) (5)Upper Handle (11) Pop Rivet (6 Req’d) 3 (6)Grip (2 Req’d) (12) No. 10 Sheet Metal Screw (6 Req’d) 2. Using hammer tap cap (4) onto one end of axle (2). Slide one wheel (3) onto axle. Slide end of axle through both holes of lower leg (1). Slide remaining wheel onto portion of axle protruding through lower leg. Tap cap on axle. 3. Remove Lower Bracket by removing nuts and washers. 4. Slide the two 3/8” bolts in the outer extrusions to the 7-3/32” dimension and the one 3/8” bolt in the center extrusion to the 11-17/32” dimension. 7 5. Place lower leg assy made in step 2 onto the three bolts. Secure in place

with washers and nuts removed in step 3. 1 9 6. Remove upper bracket by removing nuts and washers. 7. Place upper handle (5) onto three bolts. secure in place with washers and

5 6 Scribe Line nuts removed in step 6. 4 8 8. Slide grips (6) onto ends of upper handle. 3

9. Stand heater vertically. If heater does not sit evenly, loosen nuts that

on Extrusion secure lower leg assy and adjust accordingly. 10.Rotate heater back until handle (5) is on floor. 2x Prong of Grill

11.Install baffle (8) using pop rivets, if pop rivet gun is not available use the NO. 10 sheet metal screws. 4 12.Place grille prongs into slots of reflector using a counterclockwise rotation see Detail A. Insert 1/4-20 bolts (9) through looped end of grille with 1/4- 20 square not (10) on opposite side. Tighten screws with screw driver. 13.Install remaining grille in same manner as step 12. 14.If fixed heater is being converted to a portable by the factory, then drill out nameplate rivets and replace nameplate with 196-891789-004. 2x Loop of Grill 13.5 kW Fixed Style Heater Modified to add cart, baffle and grille 4 GENERAL IMPORTANT: SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

FIRE HAZARD. Do not use as a residential or household heater. Keep combustible material away from heater. Do not operate heater where flamma ble vapors, gases or liquids are present. To avoid personal injury read “IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS” on this page before installation or operation of heater.

IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS

When using electrical appliances, basic precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following: 1. Read all instructions before using this heater. 2. This heater is hot when in use. To avoid burns, do not let bare skin touch hot surfaces. Keep combustible materials, such as furniture and papers at least 7 feet from the front of the heater. 3. Do not leave heater unattended while in operation. 4. Always disconnect heater when not in use. 5. Do not use outdoors in areas subject to wind. 6. Connect to properly grounded outlets or building ground. 7. This heater has hot surfaces. Do not use it in areas where gaso line, paint or flammable liquids are used or stored. 8. Use this heater only as described in this manual. Any other use not recommended by the manufacturer may cause fire, electric shock or injury to persons. 9. In order to prevent equipment damage, protect with a ground fault device such as Chromalox STAR-TG series monitor. 10. These instructions amend the fixed instructions that came with the original heater. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

Table 1 WIRING Use type “SO” or equal power cord. Refer to table 1 for proper wire gage and number of conductors. Amperage Cord Ga./No. cond. Model Volts KW 1 Phase 3 Phase 1 Phase 3 Phase STAR-05-81-P 208 4.5 21.6 NA 12/3 NA STAR-05-21-P 240 4.5 18.8 NA 12/3 NA STAR-05-71-P 277 4.5 16.2 NA 14/3 NA STAR-05-41-P 480 4.5 9.4 NA 14/3 NA STAR-05-61-P 600 4.5 7.5 NA 14/3 NA STAR-06-83-P 208 6 28.8 16.7 10/3 12/4 STAR-06-23-P 240 6 25.0 14.4 10/3 12/4 STAR-06-71-P 277 6 21.7 — 10/3 — STAR-06-43-P 480 6 12.5 7.2 12/3 12/4 STAR-06-63-P 600 6 10.0 5.8 12/3 12/4 STAR-14-83-P 208 13.5 NR 37.5 NR 6/4 STAR-14-23-P 240 13.5 NR 32.5 NR 8/4 STAR-14-71-P 277 13.2 47.7 — 6/3 — STAR-14-43-P 480 13.5 28.1 16.2 10/3 12/4 STAR-14-63-P 600 13.5 22.5 13.0 10/3 12/4 NA - Not Available NR - Not Recommended RENEWAL PARTS IDENTIFICATION Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333-557518-001 End Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039-510848-001 Vinyl Grip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 024-304894-001 Grill for STAR-06. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143-304892-001 Grills for STAR-14 (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134-304892-003 Hardware for Mounting Grills GR14TW Screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248-075512-123 Square Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200-048688-007

5 2150 N. RULON WHITE BLVD., OGDEN, UT 84404 Limited Warranty: Please refer to the Chromalox limited warranty applicable to this product at chromalox.com/customer-service/policies/termsofsale.aspx. Phone: 1-800-368-2493 chromalox.com


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL